Honeywell R7910A SOLA HC, R7911 SOLA SC Product data

R7910A SOLA HC (Hydronic Control)
R7911 SOLA SC (Steam Control)
PRODUCT DATA
APPLICATION
The R7910A SOLA HC is a hydronic boiler control system and
the R7911 SOLA SC is a Steam Control system that provide
heat control, flame supervision, circulation pump control, fan
control, boiler control sequencing, and electric ignition
function. It will also provide boiler status and error reporting.
Multiple boilers can be joined together to heat a system
instead of a single, larger burner or boiler. Using boilers in
parallel is more efficient, costs less, reduces emissions,
improves load control, and is more flexible than the traditional
large boiler.
R7910A Hydronic Control shown.
For R7911, “Steam Control” would replace
“Hydronic Control” on label.
SOLA HC/SC System may Consist of:
R7910/R7911 Control Device
S7999B Touchscreen Display—required for setup and ModBus communication but not required for the system to operate once
the R7910A/R7911 is programmed.
S7999C Local Operator Interface, which can setup and monitor the R7910/R7911.
S7910A Local Keyboard Display Module
Flame Rod or UV flame detector (C7027, C7035, or C7044)
Temperature Sensor, NTC Type 10KΩ at 77°F (25°C) or 12KΩ at 77°F (25°C)
Limit Sensor, NTC Type 10KΩ at 77°F (25°C)
Fans (VFD)
R7911 uses a Steam Sensor, 0-15 or 0-150 psi - 4-20mA source type
66-1171-03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
FEATURES
• Power
• Flame
• Alarm
Safety and Boiler Protection
• Flame Sensing
• Ultraviolet (C7027, C7035, C7044 Sensors)
• Flame Rod
• Single Element (Internal spark generator
and flame sense using the same element)
• Dual Element (separate elements for
ignition spark and flame sense)
R7910 Hydronic Control
• Frost Protection, Slow Start, Anti-condensate, Boiler
Delta-T, Stack Limit, Boiler Limit, DHW Limit, Outlet TRise Limit
R7911 Steam Control
• Slow Start, Stack Limit
Integrated Control Functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inputs
Primary Flame Safeguard Control
Internal or external spark generator
Algorithm Prioritization
Firing Rate Limiting
• R7910 Hydronic Control
• Anti-Condensate, Stack Limit, Boiler
Delta-T,
• Boiler Slow Start, Outlet Limit
• R7911 Steam Control
• Stack Limit
PID Load Control
• R7910 Hydronic Control
• CH (Central Heat)
• DHW (Domestic Hot Water)
• R7911 Steam Control
• Steam
Remote Reset
TOD (Time of Day)
PWM for Variable Frequency Drives
Auxiliary Output Control
• R7910 Hydronic Control for Pumps
• 3 outputs, 5 different programmable
features)
• R7911 Steam Control
• 3 programmable output features
Burner Demand sources
• R7910 Hydronic Control
• CH, DHW and Frost Protection
• R7911 Steam Control
• Steam sensor
Loops of Control
• R7910 Hydronic Control has two loops of
Control
• CH
• DHW
• R7911 Steam Control has One loop of Control
• Steam
High Limit and Control (Meets UL 353)
• R7910 Hydronic Control
• CH, DHW and Stack
• R7911 Steam Control
• Stack
Fifteen Item Fault Code History including equipment
status at time of lockout
Fifteen Item Alert Code Status including equipment
status at time of internal alerts
24Vac Device Power
R7910: 24 or 120Vac Digital I/O models available.
R7911: 120Vac Digital I/O
Flame Signal test jacks (Vdc)
Three Status LEDs
66-1171—03
• Analog Inputs
• NTC Sensor Inputs (10kohm or 12kohm)
NOTE:12kohm and 10kohm single sensors cannot
be used for Limit Application functions
(10kohm dual sensors only).
• R7910 Hydronic Control
• Outlet Limit And Temperature
• DHW Limit and Temperature
• Stack Limit and Temperature
• Inlet Temperature
• Outdoor Temperature
• R7911 Steam Control
• Stack Limit and Temperature
• Other Analog Inputs
• PWM Feedback
• Flame Signal from either a Flame Rod or
Ultraviolet Detector
• R7910 and R7911: 4-20mA Control Input,
Remote Setpoint, Remote Firing Rate
• R7911: 4-20mA Steam Input Pressure (15
or 150 psi)
• Digital Inputs
• Pre Ignition Interlock (Programmable)
• LCI (Load [or Limit] Control Input)
(Programmable)
• Interlock (Programmable)
• Annunciation (8 Programmable) (6
Programmable plus High Fire and Low Fire
Switch Interlocks—model specific)
• Remote Reset
• TOD (Time of Day)
Outputs
• Analog Outputs
• Modulation
• 4-20mA
• 0-10 Vdc
• PWM for Variable Frequency Drives
• Digital Outputs
• Auxiliary Output Control
• R7910 Hydronic Control for Pumps
3 outputs, 5 different programmable
features)
• R7911 Steam Control
3 programmable output features
• Combustion Blower
• External Ignition
• Pilot Valve
• Main Valve
• Alarm
2
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Models Available:
Table 1. SOLA HC/SC Models Available.
Model
Hydronic/Steam
Digital I/O
Flame
Detection
Modulation Output
R7910A1001
Hydronic
24V
PWM 4-20mA 0-10V
FR/UV
R7910A1019
Hydronic
120V
PWM 4-20mA 0-10V
FR/UV
R7910A1027
Hydronic
120V
PWM 4-20mA 0-10V
FR/UV
R7910A1084*
Hydronic
24V
PWM 4-20mA 0-10V
FR
R7911A1000
Steam
120V
PWM 4-20mA 0-10V
FR/UV
R7911A1026
Steam
120V
PWM 4-20mA 0-10V
FR/UV
HFS/LFS Inputs
BOTH
*
BOTH
* Contains built in anticipation for Low Voltage Stat Input
3
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Application .........................................................................................................................................................
Features .............................................................................................................................................................
Overview ............................................................................................................................................................
Installation ..........................................................................................................................................................
Wiring .................................................................................................................................................................
Startup ................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter Control Blocks (PCB) .......................................................................................................................
Programming Safety Parameters .......................................................................................................................
Annunciator ........................................................................................................................................................
Functional Sub Systems ....................................................................................................................................
Demand and Rate .......................................................................................................................................
CH Hydronic Loop Demand and Rate ........................................................................................................
DHW Loop Demand and Rate (Hydronic only) ...........................................................................................
Frost Protection (Hydronic only) .................................................................................................................
Rate Limits and Override ............................................................................................................................
Anticondensation (Hydronic Control) ..........................................................................................................
The Burner Control Uses: ...........................................................................................................................
Modulation Output ......................................................................................................................................
Pump Control ..............................................................................................................................................
Fault Handling ....................................................................................................................................................
Lockouts and Alerts ....................................................................................................................................
Alarms for Alerts .........................................................................................................................................
Burner Control Operation ...................................................................................................................................
Safety Shutdown of Burner Control Functions ............................................................................................
Operational Sequence ................................................................................................................................
Appendix A: Parameter Glossary .......................................................................................................................
Appendix B: Hydronic Device Parameter Worksheet Example ..........................................................................
R7910A Lockout and Hold Codes. .....................................................................................................................
PREFACE
66-1170 for the S7999B or 65-0303 for the S7999C operation
and setup screens. This document will assist in understanding
the parameters being setup.
This Product Data sheet is intended to provide a general
overview of the R7910 SOLA HC and R7911 SOLA SC. The
chosen set of parameters for a certain boiler type needs to be
functionally tested for correct operation.
Appendix B is a worksheet example of a R7910 device
parameters and how they might be setup to provide a system
function.
Note that this sheet (like the S7999B System Operator
Interface and S7999C Local Operator Interface) shows most
available parameters. The actual product may have
parameters made invisible or read-only by the OEM, as they
apply for their product.
This document is a textbook version of the parameters. The
glossary beginning on page 91 provides an abbreviated
parameter explanation along with a reference page for a more
in-depth explanation.
The actual setup of the R7910 or R7911 is accomplished using
the S7999B System Operator Interface, the DSP3944 Setup
Tool, or the S7999C Local Operator Interface. Refer to form
66-1171—03
1
2
9
11
12
19
19
20
62
20
23
25
34
41
44
51
57
51
54
64
64
64
65
65
65
91
102
107
The chosen set of parameters for a certain boiler type MUST
be functionally tested for correct operation.
4
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
FEATURES, continued
Lockout messages are stored in the R7910/R7911 non-volatile
memory (File and lockout remain with power interruption) and
Alerts are stored in the volatile memory (file clears on power
interruption).
Access codes through the display allow for different levels of
setup.
—
The OEM level allows for equipment to operate within
guidelines that they feel necessary for safe and efficient operation of their equipment. The OEM makes
available the parameters that the installing contractor
needs for installation adjustments of the equipment.
— The installer setup information is customized by the
OEM. The access code for the installer level must be
obtained from the OEM.
— The User level allows for non critical adjustments for
the individual piece of equipment. These would include
but not limited to:
• Read the error log from R7910A/R7911.
• Lockout causes the burner control to shutdown and
requires manual or remote reset to clear the lockout.
• It always causes the alarm contact to close.
• Gets logged into the 15 item lockout history.
• Alerts include every other kind of problem that does not
shut the burner down. Examples of alerts are faults from
non–safety functions or abnormal events that are relevant
to an operator or end user.
• Alerts never require manual intervention to reset
them (an alert is not a condition, it is an event).
• Whether the alarm contact closes or not is
programmable by the OEM for each alert.
• Alerts are logged in the 15 item alert history and
sorted in chronological order. Only one instance of
each alert fault code occurs in the history,
corresponding to the most recent occurrence of the
alert.
• Monitor the input and output variables of the
controller.
• Read parameters from R7910A/R7911.
• CH and DHW setpoint adjustment.
Operational Features
Sensor Select
Self Test
Inputs for Header or Outdoor temperature sensors might be
available from various sources, so parameters are provided to
select the input source. These parameters determine:
• how temperatures are obtained;
• if/where temperature information is stored;
• where a control loop gets its data.
The Safety Processor performs Dynamic Self Checks that
supervise microcomputer performance to ensure proper
operation. The microcomputer tests itself and its associated
hardware with comprehensive safety routines. Any malfunction
will be detected by the microcomputer to cause a safety
shutdown and cause the Dynamic Safety Relay to de-energize
all safety-critical loads.
Sensor Signal Conditioning
The analog sensors signal includes filtering to reduce the effect
of noise and spurious read events. This filter includes
averaging to smooth sensor output and reject occasional
spurious values to prevent them from affecting the average.
Initialization
The R7910A/R7911 will start up in either the configured or
unconfigured condition. In the Configured condition it is ready
to operate a burner.
Sensors won’t cause a fault condition unless the value is
requested for control purposes. Thus it is not a fault for a
sensor to be absent or otherwise non-operational unless it is
used for something (i.e. outdoor temperature).
The R7910A/R7911 is in the unconfigured condition whenever
a safety parameter requires editing (Commissioning). The
R7910A/R7911 remains unconfigured and will not operate a
burner until all safety parameters have been reviewed and
confirmed.
If its value is requested and a sensor fault exists, then an alert
condition is triggered by the requestor in response to the fault
status, unless this is either a normal operating condition (e.g.,
the DHW sensor used as a switch) or causes a lockout (e.g., a
failed high limit sensor).
Safety Lockout
The R7910A/R7911 can be set up to maintain a lockout
condition on power interruption or to reset the lockout on a
power interruption.
Safety sensors include the comparison of redundant sensors.
If a safety sensor mismatch occurs this is reported to the caller
as a fault (which will cause the operator to take an appropriate
action).
Reset
Pressing and releasing the reset button (or the remote reset
input) causes a lockout condition to be cleared, and the
microcomputer that operates the burner control part of the
R7910A/R7911 to reinitialize and restart.
Sensor faults will include:
• out-of-range: low
• out-of-range: high—distinguishing low vs. high is
important when sensor inputs are being used as digital on/
off inputs; in this case these out-of-range values are not
faults.
• mismatch—applies to safety sensors, where two sensors
are compared.
A safety lockout can also be reset through a writable
parameter from the system display through Modbus.
Fault Handling
The R7910A/R7911 implements two kinds of faults: lockouts
and alerts.
5
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Non-Volatile Memory
Temperature Settings
The R7910A/R7911 will store the following items in non-volatile
memory (Information remains in control on power interruption):
All parameters that provide a temperature have a possible
value of “None.”
• Factory configuration data
• Parameter Control Blocks (for example, Read only and
Password Settings)
• All configuration parameters
• The 15 item lockout history
• Cycle and Time history
This value is a special code that is not a legal temperature. If
the R7910/R7911 Control is configured with a “none”
temperature, then this setting must be set up by the installer
before the control will operate.
Modbus/ECOM Event Handling
The Modbus and ECOM communication system responds to
queries and can write new values to the parameters. See
Product Data Sheet 65-0310 for software interface
specifications (ModBus).
Lockout History
The lockout history contains 15 records. Each record is a
snapshot of the following values as they existed at the time of
the lockout.
WARNING
• Burner Lockout/Hold identifies the cause of the lockout.
• Burner State identifies the state of the burner control (e.g.
standby, purge, run).
• Burner Displayed Time: mm:ss is the displayed timer
used by the Burner Control at the time of lockout (e.g.
prepurge time, ignition time, etc.).
• Annunciator First-out is the first-out code for the lockout.
• Burner Run Time is the elapsed time of burner operation.
• Burner Cycle Count is the number of burner cycles (based
on the main valve being turned on).
• All analog sensor values (Inlet, Header, Outlet, Outdoor,
DHW, Stack, or Steam)
Explosion Hazard.
Improper configuration can cause fuel buildup and
explosion.
Improper user operation may result in property loss,
physical injury, or death.
The S7999B1026 System Operator Interface or
S7999C Local Operator Interface used to change
Safety Configuration Parameters is to be done only by
experienced and/or licensed burner/boiler
operators and mechanics.
Cycle and Time History
Response to Writing:
• Safety parameters will cause a lockout and must be
reviewed and verified before the control will operate again.
• Non-safety parameters may be written at any time and will
become effective within a short time; however, any behavior
that is seeded by the parameter value and is currently inprogress (e.g. a delay time) may not respond to the change
until the next time this behavior is initiated.
The non-volatile memory contains the following parameters
and status values related to cycle counts and elapsed
operation time:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Burner Run Time: hhhhhh:mm
Burner cycle count: 0-999,999
CH cycle count: 0-999,999
DHW cycle count: 0-999,999
Boiler pump cycle count: 0-999,999
Auxiliary pump cycle count: 0-999,999
System pump cycle count: 0-999,999
Required Components (not supplied)
Dual Element Sensor contains Sensor plus Limit (10kohm,
Beta = 3950). Note: 12kohm sensors with Beta of 3750 may
be used as sensors, but not as safety limits.
• 50001464-006
6” with Molex splice connector
• 50001464-007
42” without connector
These are writable parameters so they may be altered if the
R7910A/R7911 is moved, the burner is replaced or some
component is replaced.
There are also two non-writable counters:
Single Element Sensor only (10 kohm, Beta = 3950)
• 198799Z
42" leads without connector
• 32003971-002
6" leads with Molex Splice Connector
• 32003971-003
CONTAINS:
(1) 198799Z sensor with 42" leads
(2) 118826 ANCHORS;
(3) 199624AB MTG. SCREWS;
(2) 121958 WIRE NUTS;
(1) 32002217-002 SENSOR CLIP;
(2) 291125 TIE STRAP
• UV Flame Sensor - C7027, C7035, or C7044
• Flame Rods - C7007, 8, 9
• Pilot Burner Assemblies - Q179A, C, C7005
• External Ignition Transformer - Q624A1014, Q652B1006
• Gas Valves Solenoid V8295 (24Vac),
V4295/7 (120Vac)
Fluid Power V4055 (120 Vac) with
V5055 or V5097
V4730/V4734/V8730 Premix valves
with Venturi
• Modulation Motor - M7294 (4-20 ma or 0-10Vdc)
• Controller Run Time: hhhhhh:mm
• Control cycle count: 0-999,999
Flame Signal Processing
The flame signal processing will monitor either a flame rod or a
UV flame sensor. The flame signal voltage at the test jacks or
on the bar graph on the display is the measured voltage in the
range from 0V to 15V. The display could show stronger
numerical data.
The incoming flame signals are filtered to eliminate transient
and spurious events.
The Flame failure response time (FFRT) is 4 seconds.
Flame sensitivity is set by the Flame Threshold parameter,
which will provide the ON/OFF threshold specified in volts or
microamps (1 volt is equivalent to 1 microamp).
66-1171—03
6
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
• Transformer (for powering R7910/R7911 40va minimum) AT72D (40VA) AT88 (75VA)
• R7911 - Pressure Sensor (15 or 150) 4-20mA source type
• 50032893 - 001 Bag of connectors
Required but purchased outside Honeywell:
• Circulating Pumps 24 or 120 Vac
• Blower Motor, on/off or VFD
7
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Connectors for field wiring: May be obtained separately outside Honeywell. See list below.
ICP Device
Plug #
Description
Mates with …
Manf.
Part Number
J1
Flame Detection
Interface
Molex
0050841060 (Shell), 0002081002 (Pin, 14-20 AWG)
J2
PWM Combustion Molex
Blower Interface
0039012040 (Shell), 0039000059 (Pin, 18-24 AWG)
J3
Comm. Interface
OST
EDZ1100/9 (SCREW)
J4
Line Voltage I/O
Lumberg
3623 06 K129
(IDC, Pins 1 - 6)
3615-1 06 K129 (SCREW, Pins 1 - 6)
3623 06 K130
(IDC, Pins 7 - 12)
3615-1 06 K130 (SCREW, Pins 7 - 12)
J5
Line Voltage I/O
Lumberg
3623 07 K01
(IDC)
3615-1 07 K01
J6
Line Voltage I/O
Lumberg
3623 08 K43
(IDC)
3615-1 04 K185 (SCREW, Pins 1- 4)
(SCREW)
J7
Line Voltage I/O
Lumberg
3623 07 K48
(IDC)
3615-1 07 K48
J8
Low Voltage I/O
Lumberg
3623 06 K127
(IDC, Pins 1 - 6)
3615-1 06 K127 (SCREW, Pins 1 - 6)
3623 06 K128
(IDC, Pins 7 - 12)
3615-1 06 K128 (SCREW, Pins 7 - 12)
3615-1 04 K188 (SCREW, Pins 5- 8)
(SCREW)
J9
Low Voltage I/O
Lumberg
3623 07 K59
(IDC)
3615-1 07 K59
J10
High Voltage I/O
Lumberg
3623 08 K64
(IDC)
3615-1 04 K187 (SCREW, Pins 1- 4)
(SCREW)
J11
High Voltage I/O
Lumberg
3623 07 K30
(IDC)
3615-1 07 K30
3615-1 04 K186 (SCREW, Pins 5- 8)
(SCREW)
Accessories:
•
•
•
•
S7910A Local Keyboard Display Module
S7999B System Operator Interface
DSP3944 System Display for system Setup when S7999B or S7999C not required.
PM7910 Program Module - Storage module for the R7910 non-safety setup parameters, may be written to for storage or used
for configuration of replacement controls or multiple systems, Commands given from any display interface through the R7910.
• S7999C1008 Local Operator Interface
• 50031353-001 Software Configuration Tool
66-1171—03
8
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
OVERVIEW
• Digital inputs for room limit control, high limit control,
Air pressure switch, Gas pressure switch, low water
cutoff, valve proof of closure switch.
Functions provided by the R7910A/R7911 include automatic
boiler sequencing, flame supervision, system status indication,
firing rate control, load control, CH/DHW control, limit control,
system or self-diagnostics and troubleshooting.
• Optional switches:
• Time of Day switch
The R7910 maximum version of the controller offers:
• Burner switch
• NTC-temperature sensor for:
• Outlet Limit And Temperature
• DHW (Domestic Hot Water) Limit and Temperature
• Stack Temperature Limit and Temperature
• Inlet Temperature
• Outdoor Temperature (R7910 only)
• Remote Reset
• Easy modification of the parameters on three levels:
• End-user
• Installer / Service engineer
• Manufacturer
• Modulating output PWM-driven rotation speed controlled
DC-fan for optimal modulation control.
• Three Pump Outputs with 5 selectable operation modes
• 24Vac or 120Vac (model specific) offer:
• Output control of gas valve (Pilot and Main) and
External Ignition Transformer
•
•
•
•
Integrated spark transformer
Optional external spark transformer
Optional combined ignition and flame sensing
Test jacks for flame signal measurement from either a flame
rod or UV flame sensor.
• Alarm Output
OUTDOOR
TEMP
T
FLAME SIGNAL
T
STACK T
INTERLOCK(S)
ALARM
HEADER
TEMP
T
OUTLET
PII
R7910
FAN
LIMIT(S)
DOMESTIC
HOT WATER
TANK
ANNUNCIATION (8)
IGNITOR
BOILER
REMOTE RESET
PILOT
VALVE
TOD
T
STAT
BOILER
MIX
LOOP
T
HEAT
LOAD
CH
LOOP
DHW
LOOP
MAIN VALVE(S)
INLET
BUILDING
AUTOMATION
SYSTEM
KEY
COMMUNICATION
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
WATER
LOCAL
DISPLAY
SYSTEM
DISPLAY
M27058
Fig. 1. General R7910 hydronic boiler schematic.
• ECOM is used for the S7910 Local Keyboard display for
R7910/R7911 monitoring and changing setpoints. Some
equipment setup and checkout is available using the S7910
along with remote reset of a lockout on the R7910/R7911.
• The R7910/R7911 has two RS485 communication ports for
ModBus that allows for interfacing to one or all R7910/
R7911s of a system and presents them individually to the
user. The S7999B System Operator interface and S7999C
Local Operator interface are color touchscreen displays
used for configuration and monitoring of the R7910A/
R7911. Control Operation and display status in both test
and graphical modes can be shown along with the ability to
setup. The R7910/R7911 can also be remotely reset
through the S7999B/C display.
Fig. 1 shows two loops of heat control: Central Heating (CH),
and an optional second loop for Domestic Hot Water (DHW)
can be configured on each R7910A. The DHW loop transfers
heat from the boiler outlet to hot water appliances in
conjunction with the primary system heat loop. Priority
assignment to each heat loop can be configured to specify
which loop gets serviced first.
COMMUNICATIONS AND
DISPLAYS
Three modes of communications are available to the R7910.
9
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Storage/Shipping Temperature: -40°F to 150°F
(-40°C to 66°C).
• Either ModBus RS485 communication port can be used to
allow configuration and status data to be read and written to
the R7910/R7911. Support a Master S7999B or a Building
Automation master to control the R7910 or R7911 to
respond to a single ModBus address to service the requests
of the ModBus master in a Lead/Lag arrangement.
The local S7910 Keyboard display, the S7999B System
Operator interface, and the S7999C Local Operator Interface
are optional components.
Humidity:
Up to 95% Relative Humidity, noncondensing at 104°F for 14
days. Condensing moisture may cause safety shutdown.
Vibration: 0.0 to 0.5g Continuous (V2 level)
Enclosure: Nema 1/IP40.
The S7999B (or the DSP3944 which is a portable S7999B) or
the S7999C is required configuration of the parameters of the
R7910/R7911 but is not needed for the operation of the system
once configured.
Approvals:
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)(cUL): Component Recognized: File No. MP268 (MCCZ)
R7910 and R7911 are certified as UL372 Primary Safety
Controls.
The R7910 is certified as UL353 Limit Rated device when
using part number 50001464 dual element limit rated NTC
sensors.
CSD-1 Acceptable.
Meets CSD-1 section CF-300 requirements as a Primary
Safety Control.
Meets CSD-1 section CW-400 requirements as a Temperature
Operation control.
Meets CSD-1 section CW-400 requirements as a Temperature
High Limit Control when configured for use with 10kohm
NTC sensors.
Federal Communications Commission, Part 15,
Class B.Emissions.
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Ratings:
Operating voltage
24Vac (20 to 30 Vac, 60 Hz ±5%)
Connected Load for Valve and annunciator functions:
24Vac, 60Hz
120Vac (+10%/-15%), 60Hz (±5%)
Model Specific
Corrosion:
R7910A/R7911 should not be used in a corrosive environment.
Operating Temperature: -4°F to 150°F (-20°C to 66°C)
66-1171—03
Dimensions: See Fig. 2.
10
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
[4] Ø 3/16 (5) MAX
[2] 5-19/64 (135)
2-19/32 (66)
[2] 8-21/32
(220)
9-21/64
(237) MAX
6-21/64 (161)
M27063
Fig. 2. R7910A/R7911 dimensions in in. (mm).
* All sensors attached to the R7910 MUST be all 12K or 10K
sensors (don't mix and match).
Table 2. NTC Sensors (temperature versus resistance).
12K NTC (kOhm)*
Beta of 3750
10K NTC (kOhm)*
Beta of 3950
-30 (-22)
171.70
176.08
-20 (-4)
98.82
96.81
-10 (14)
58.82
55.25
0 (32)
36.10
32.64
10 (50)
22.79
19.90
20 (68)
14.77
12.49
25 (77)
12.00
10.00
30 (86)
9.81
8.06
40 (104)
6.65
5.32
50 (122)
4.61
3.60
60 (140)
3.25
2.49
70 (158)
2.34
1.75
80 (176)
1.71
1.26
90 (194)
1.27
0.92
100 (212)
0.95
0.68
110 (230)
0.73
0.51
120 (248)
0.56
0.39
Temp C (F)
INSTALLATION
WARNING
Fire or Explosion Hazard.
Can cause property damage, severe injury,
or death.
To prevent possible hazardous boiler operation, verify
safety requirements each time a control is installed on
a boiler.
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard.
Can cause severe injury, death or property damage.
Disconnect the power supply before beginning
installation to prevent electrical shock and equipment
damage. More than one power supply disconnect can
be involved.
11
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
When Installing This Product…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.
Read these instructions carefully. Failure to follow them
could damage the product or cause a hazardous condition.
Refer to the wiring diagram provided as part of the appliance or refer to Fig. 3.
Check the ratings given in the instructions and on the
product to make sure that the product is suitable for your
application.
Installer must be a trained, experienced combustion service technician.
Disconnect the power supply before beginning installation to prevent electrical shock and equipment damage.
More than one disconnect may be involved.
All wiring must comply with applicable local electrical
codes, ordinances and regulations.
After installation is complete, check out product operation as provided in these instructions.
Electrical Connections
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The relay module is not designed to be weather-tight. When
installed outdoors, protect the relay module using an approved
weather-tight enclosure.
Mounting The R7910/R7911
1.
WIRING
3.
2.
4.
WARNING
1.
2.
Always use a grommet when placing the high voltage
cable through a sheet metal panel.
Never join the high voltage cable with other wires.
• Be sure that there is a good electrical return path between
the R7910A/R7911 and sparking electrode (ground
connection).
• A short ignition wire normally leads to lower levels of
radiated electromagnetic fields.
• Use a Spark cable (32004766 or R1298020) or equivalent.
• Heat-resistant up to 248°F (120°C).
• Isolation voltage up to 25 kV DC.
Ground Connection
The ground connection on the controller must not be used as a
central ground connection for the 120 Vac connections.
Use the common ground terminal next to the controller,
close to connector J4 terminal 12.
Connect the central ground terminal with the connection
contact of the controller (connector J4 terminal 12).
66-1171—03
Wire according to specifications, following all local ordinances and requirements.
Do not bundle the low voltage wires with the ignition
cable, 120 Vac wires, CH Pump or DHW Pump.
Bundle the wires for the fan and join them with the other
24V low-voltage wires.
Bundle the wires for the NTC sensors and the PWM
combustion blower control separately.
High Voltage Cable
Electrical Shock Hazard.
Can cause serious injury, death or property
damage.
Disconnect power supply before beginning wiring to
prevent electrical shock and equipment damage. More
than one disconnect may be involved.
2.
Pump A: Connector J4 terminal 6 & 7.
Pump B: Connector J4 terminal 4 & 5.
Pump C: Connector J4 terminal 2 & 3.
Blower: Connector J5 terminal 6 & 7.
Alarm: Connector J6 terminal 7 & 8.
Wiring Connectors J2, J8, J9, and J10
Low Voltage Connections
(includes NTC Sensor Inputs, 4 to 20 mA
Input, PWM Combustion Blower Motor
output, combustion blower speed
(tachometer) input, Remote and TOD reset,
current and voltage outputs)
Select a location on a wall, burner or electrical panel.
The R7910/R7911 can be mounted directly in the control
cabinet. Be sure to allow adequate clearance for servicing.
Use the R7910/R7911 as a template to mark the four
screw locations. Drill the pilot holes.
Securely mount the R7910/R7911 using four no. 6
screws.
NOTE: The device can be removed and replaced in the field
without rewiring.
1.
Wiring to connectors J4, J5, J6 and J7.
Line Voltage (120Vac) or Low Voltage (24Vac) by model
number.
Dry Contacts available for:
Weather
3.
24Vac Supply to connector J8 terminal 1.
24Vac Return to connector J8 terminal 2.
Ground to central ground terminal, not to Ground on
J4 terminal 12.
Limit String and Annunciator inputs and
Safety Load Outputs
Do not install the relay module where it could be subjected to
vibration in excess of 0.5G continuous maximum vibration.
2.
Refer to Table 5 for terminal contact ratings.
Use 18 AWG or larger wires.
Wire according to specifications, following all local ordinances and requirements.
Device Power Supply, 24Vac
Vibration
1.
Connect the ground wire of the main power connector,
the CH pump, the DHW pump (if present) and the ignition wire to the central ground terminal.
12
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Note that the high voltage ignition spark, the high voltage
ignition lead and the return path of the current that flows during
sparking is an important source of electromagnetic
interference.
c. Do not route the Flame rod sense lead wire or
ground wire near the ignition spark high-voltage
cable or other line voltage wiring.
UV Flame Detection
A ground return wire is required in the appliance to reduce the
high frequency components of the actual return current.
1.
2.
Communications: Connector J3
1.
2.
Connect the S7910A Keyboard Display only to the
ECOM port, connectors J3 terminal 1, J3 terminal 2, J3
terminal 3. Do not connect the S7999 display to these
connectors.
Connect the S7999B/C Display to either J3 Modbus port
(MB1 or MB2), connectors a, b, c.
3.
Final Wiring Check
1.
Check the power supply circuit. The voltage and frequency tolerance must match those of the R7910A/
R7911. A separate power supply circuit may be required
for the R7910A/R7911. Add the required disconnect
means and overload protection.
2. Check all wiring circuits.
3. Install all electrical connectors.
4. Restore power to the panel.
The R7910A/R7911 can be removed and replaced in the field
without requiring re-wiring.
Flame Signal: Connector J1
1.
2.
Connect the UV Flame detector sense lead (blue wire) to
connector J1 terminal 4.
Connect the UV Flame detector ground lead (white wire)
to connector J1 terminal 6.
Do not route the UV Flame detector wiring near the ignition spark high-voltage cable or other line voltage wiring.
Flame Rod: Single Element
a. Connect the Flame rod for both ignition spark and
flame sense to the ignition transformer terminal.
b. Connect the Flame rod ground to connector J1 terminal 3.
c. Install a jumper between connector J1 terminal 1 and
terminal 2.
Flame Rod: Dual Element (separate elements for ignition
spark and flame sense)
a. Connect the Flame rod sense lead to connector J1
terminal 2.
b. Connect the Flame rod ground to connector J1 terminal 3.
The lengths of the wires and electrical ratings for each terminal
are specified in Table 5 on page 16.
Table 3. Wire Sizes.
Application
Recommended Wire Size
Recommended Part Number(s)
TTW60C, THW75C, THHN90C
Maximum
Leadwire
Distance (in
feet)
300
Line Voltage
Terminals
14, 16, 18 AWG Copper
conductor, 600 volt
insulations, moistureresistance wire
Remote Reset/
TOD
18 AWG two-wire twisted
Beldon 8443 or equivalent
pair, insulated for low voltage
1000
Temperature
(operating)
Sensors
18 AWG two-wire twisted
Beldon 8443 or equivalent
pair, insulated for low voltage
50
Temperature
(Limit) Sensors
18 AWG two-wire twisted pair Beldon 8723 shielded cable or equivalent
with ground.
50
Flame Sensor
14, 16, 18 AWG Copper
(Flame Rod/UV) conductor, 600 volt
insulations, moistureresistance wire
TTW60C, THW75C, THHN90C
Ignition
Ignition Cable rated for 25kV 32004766-001 (2') or -003 (per foot)
at 482F(250C)
Grounding
14 AWG copper wire
30
3
TTW60C, THW75C, THHN90C
13
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
ICP DEVICE PIN OUT
PLUG CONNECTORS
BLUE
UV
FAN POWER (25 VDC)
FAN GND
PWM OUT
TACHOMETER
WHITE
EGND
L2 FOR 120VAC OR
24VAC RETURN (OPTOS)
L1
P
P
P
{
PUMP B {
PUMP C {
PUMP A
BLOWER/HSI
EX. IGNITION
MAIN VALVE
2
PILOT VALVE
INTERLOCK
ALARM
PRE IGN INTLK
LCI
ANNUN 1/IAS
ANNUN 2
ANNUN 5
ANNUN 6
ANNUN 7 / HFS
ANNUN 8 / LFS
J1
1
4
2
5
3
6
J2
4
3
2
1
J8
J4
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SOLA
HYDRONIC
CONTROL
J5
J9
POWER
J6
J3
MB1
A B C
MULTIPLE
APPLIANCE
CONTROLLER
J11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ALARM
J7
MB2
A B C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J10
FLAME
RESET
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PIM
FLAME
STRENGTH
ANNUN 3
ANNUN 4
{
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
24 VAC
24 VAC RTN
S1
S2
S3
S3S4
S4
S5
STAT
+ 4-20 mA
REMOTE SP MODULATION
(OUTLET)
(OUTLET)
(OUTDOOR / HEADER)
S6
S6S7
(DHW)
S7
S8
S8S9
(DHW)
(STACK )
S9
1
(INLET)
(STACK / HEAT
EXCHANGER)
REMOTE RESET
TOD
+
+
–
4 TO 20 MA
I
0 - 10 VDC
MA /VDC RTN
V
S7999
ECOM
1 2 3
BUILDING
AUTOMATION
SYSTEM
S7910
S7999C
ECOM
MODBUS
MODBUS
M31120
1
R7910A1084 HAS AN INTERNAL LOAD RESISTOR FOR A THERMOSTAT INPUT.
2
FOR DIRECT BURNER IGNITION (DBI) THE MAIN VALVE IS WIRED TO J5 TERMINAL 2
Fig. 3. R7910A device pin out.
66-1171—03
14
.
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
ICP DEVICE PIN OUT
PLUG CONNECTORS
BLUE
FAN POWER (25 VDC)
FAN GND
PWM OUT
TACHOMETER
UV
WHITE
EGND
L2 FOR 120VAC OR
24VAC RETURN (OPTOS)
L1
P
P
P
{
PUMP B {
PUMP C {
PUMP A
BLOWER/HSI
EX. IGNITION
MAIN VALVE
2
PILOT VALVE
INTERLOCK
ALARM
PRE IGN INTLK
LCI
ANNUN 1/IAS
ANNUN 2
ANNUN 5
ANNUN 6
ANNUN 7 / HFS
ANNUN 8 / LFS
1
4
2
5
J1 3
J2
6
4
3
2
1
J4
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J5
J9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PIM
POWER
J6
FLAME
ALARM
RESET
J7
J3
MB1
A B C
MULTIPLE
APPLIANCE
CONTROLLER
J8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
STEAM
CONTROL
FLAME
STRENGTH
ANNUN 3
ANNUN 4
{
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
MB2
A B C
24 VAC
24 VAC RTN
+S1
–
+S2
–
S8
S8S9
S9
STAT
INLET PRESSURE
SENSOR
+ 4-20 mA
1
(STACK)
(STACK TEMP B)
REMOTE RESET
TOD
+
+
–
4 TO 20 MA
I
0 - 10 VDC
MA /VDC RTN
V
S7999B
ECOM
1 2 3
S7999C
BUILDING
AUTOMATION
SYSTEM
ECOM
MODBUS
MODBUS
1
EXTERNALLY POWERED PRESSURE SENSOR (0-15 PSI OR 0-150 PSI) 4-20 mA SOURCE.
2
FOR DIRECT BURNER IGNITION (DBI) THE MAIN VALVE IS WIRED TO J5 TERMINAL 2
M31119
Fig. 4. R7911 device pin out.
15
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 4. Recommended Grounding Practices.
Ground Type
Recommended Practice
Earth ground
1. Earth ground must be capable of conducting enough current to blow the 20A
fuse (or breaker) in the event of an internal short circuit.
2. Use wide straps or brackets to provide minimum length, maximum surface
area ground conductors. If a leadwire must be used, use 14 AWG copper wire.
3. Make sure that mechanically tightened joints along the ground path are free of
nonconductive coatings and protected against corrosion on mating surfaces.
Signal ground
Use the shield of the signal wire to ground the device to the signal ground terminals
[3(c)] of each device. Connect the shield at both ends of the chain to earth ground.
Table 5. R7910A/R7911 Contact.
Connector Term.
J1
Function
Description and Rating (All Models)
1
2
FLAME ROD INPUT
3
FLAME ROD COMMON
4
UV
5
J2
J3
6
UV COMMON
1
TACH
Tachometer Input (Tach) Tachometer input.
2
25V
Electronic Blower Motor Power (25 VDC)
3
PWM
Digital modulation (PWM) Output Digital modulation signal out.
4
GND
Ground pin for Fan interface and power
a
a
Modbus MB1 RS-485 +
b
b
Modbus MB1 RS-485 -
c
c
Modbus MB1 Ground (G)
a
a
Modbus MB2 RS-485 +
b
b
Modbus MB2 RS-485 -
c
c
Modbus MB2 RS-485 Ground (G)
1
1
ECOM Data (1)
2
2
ECOM Receive (2)
3
3
ECOM (3)
12
EARTH GROUND
Earth ground
10
L2
J4
8
L1
J4
7
PUMP A Input
120 VAC: 44.4 ALR, 7.4 Amps run
J4
6
PUMP A Output
120 VAC: 44.4 ALR, 7.4 Amps run
J4
5
PUMP B Input
120 VAC: 44.4 ALR, 7.4 Amps run
J4
4
PUMP B Output
120 VAC: 44.4 ALR, 7.4 Amps run
J4
Not Used
J4
Not Used
Not Used
Power Supply Neutral
Not Used
120 VAC (+ 10/15%, 50 or 60 HZ) to power UV
J4
3
PUMP C Input
120 VAC: 44.4 ALR, 7.4 Amps run
J4
2
PUMP C Output
120 VAC: 44.4 ALR, 7.4 Amps run
J4
1
Not Used
J5
7
BLOWER/HSI Input
24VAC, 120 VAC: 44.4 ALR, 7.4 Amps run
J5
6
BLOWER/HSI Output
24VAC, 120 VAC: 44.4 ALR, 7.4 Amps run
J5
5
Not Used
J5
4
EXT. IGNITION
See Table 6
J5
3
MAIN VALVE
See Table 6
J5
2
PILOT VALVE
See Table 6
66-1171—03
16
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 5. R7910A/R7911 Contact. (Continued)
Connector Term.
J5
1
Function
INTERLOCK
Description and Rating (All Models)
Per Model Input Rating
J6
8
ALARM Input
24VAC, 120 VAC: 6.3 ALR, 0.63 Amps full load
J6
7
ALARM Output
24VAC, 120 VAC: 6.3 ALR, 0.63 Amps full load
J6
6
Not Used
J6
5
Pre-Ignition Interlock (PII)
24VAC, 120 VAC: 2 mA maximum
J6
4
Not Used
J6
3
Load/Limit Control Input (LCI)
J6
2
Annunc1 / IAS
24VAC, 120 VAC: 2 mA maximum
J6
1
Annunc2
24VAC, 120 VAC: 2 mA maximum
24VAC, 120 VAC: 2 mA maximum
J7
7
Not Used
J7
6
Annunc3
24VAC, 120 VAC: 2 mA maximum
J7
5
Annunc4
24VAC, 120 VAC: 2 mA maximum
J7
4
Annunc5
24VAC, 120 VAC: 2 mA maximum
J7
3
Annunc6
24VAC, 120 VAC: 2 mA maximum
J7
2
Annunc7/HFS
24VAC, 120 VAC: 2 mA maximum
J7
1
Annunc8/ LFS
24VAC, 120 VAC: 2 mA maximum
J8
1
24 VAC
Device Power, 24 VAC, (20 VAC to 30 VAC)
J8
2
24 VAC
24VAC Return
J8
3
STAT
24 VAC, (20 VAC to 30 VAC)
J8
4
INLET TEMP (S1) (R7910)
Supply for, and signal input from 10K or 12K Ohm NTC
temperature sensor.
J8
5
INLET TEMP Common (R7910)
Ground reference for the Inlet Temp. Sensor
J8
4
+ INPUT (R7911)
+ Supply from 4-20 mA Steam Pressure Sensor
J8
5
- INPUT (R7911)
- Supply from 4-20 mA Steam Pressure Sensor
J8
6
+ INPUT Remote SP/Mod (S2)
+ Supply from 4-20mA
J8
7
- INPUT
- Supply from 4-20mA
J8
8
OUTLET TEMP A (S3) *a,b
Supply for, and signal input from 10K or 12K Ohm NTC
temperature sensor
J8
9
OUTLET TEMP Common (S3S4) *a,b
Ground reference for the Outlet Temp. Sensor
J8
10
OUTLET TEMP B (S4) *a
Supply for, and signal input from 10K Ohm NTC temperature
sensor
J8
11
OUTDOOR/HEADER TEMP (S5) *a
Supply for, and signal input from 10K or 12K Ohm NTC
temperature sensor
J8
12
OUTDOOR TEMP Common *a
Ground reference for the Outdoor Temp. Sensor
J9
1
DHW TEMP A (S6) *a,b
Supply for, and signal input from 10K or 12K Ohm NTC
temperature sensor
J9
2
DHW Common (S6S7) *a,b
Ground reference for the DHW Temp. Sensor
J9
3
DHW TEMP B (S7) *a
Supply for, and signal input from 10K Ohm NTC temperature
sensor
J9
4
STACK TEMP A (S8) *b
Supply for, and signal input from 10K or 12K Ohm NTC
temperature sensor
J9
5
STACK Common (S8S9) *b
Ground reference for the Stack Temp. Sensor
J9
6
STACK TEMP/Heat Exchanger Limit
(S9)
Supply for, and signal input from 10K Ohm NTC temperature
sensor
J9
7
Not Used
J10
1
REMOTE RESET
Open/Ground Input that has functionality corresponding to
pushing/releasing the local reset.
J10
2
TOD (Time of Day)
Open/Ground Input which switches operating set points.
17
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 5. R7910A/R7911 Contact. (Continued)
Connector Term.
Function
Description and Rating (All Models)
J10
3
TOD/REMOTE RESET COMMON
Ground reference for time of day and remote reset inputs
J10
4
MODULATION 4 - 20mA (+) (Out)
4 to 20 mA Current modulation signal out into a 600 Ohm
J10
5
MODULATION 0 - 10 VDC (+) (Out)
0 to 10 VDC Voltage modulation signal out, 10 mA max.
J10
6
MODULATION COMMON (-)
Ground reference for voltage and current modulation signals.
J10
7
Not Used
J10
8
Not Used
J11
1–7
Not Used
SPECIAL CONNECTIONS
E1
Spark
1
VCC
2
CSO
3
CS1
4
SDA
5
SCL
6
GND
8kV minimum open circuit voltage; 2.8mJ
at the igniter
Plug In Module (PM7910)
Flame +
FS +
Testpoint for Flame signal. 0 to 10 VDC
Flame -
FS -
Testpoint for Flame signal - Ground
reference.
a.
Not used by R7911SC b. For single sensor 10K or 12K connect to TEMP A Terminals.
Table 6. Valve Load Ratings.
Combination #
Pilot Valvea
Ignition
Main Valvea
1
No Load
180 VA Ignition + motorized valves with 660
VA inrush, 360 VA opening, 250 VA holding
65VA pilot duty + motorized valves with 3850
VA inrush, 700 VA opening, 250 VA holding
2
No Load
50VA Pilot Duty + 4.5A Ignition
65VA pilot duty + motorized valves with 3850
VA inrush, 700 VA opening, 250 VA holding
3
4.5A Ignition
65VA pilot duty + motorized valves with 3850
VA inrush, 700 VA opening, 250 VA holding
65VA pilot duty + motorized valves with 3850
VA inrush, 700 VA opening, 250 VA holding
4
4.5A Ignition
2A Pilot Duty
65VA pilot duty + motorized valves with 3850
VA inrush, 700 VA opening, 250 VA holding
5
4.5A Ignition
2A Pilot Duty
2A Pilot Duty
a
For Direct Burner Ignition (DBI) the main valve gets connected to J5 terminal 2.
66-1171—03
18
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
STARTUP
3.
OEM Range PCB—limits the range of any parameter.
A parameter control block can be downloaded using a filetransfer method that operates within the Modbus protocol. The
R7910A/R7911 Modbus (see form 65-0310) defines the format
of parameter control block data and the download procedure.
All of the OEM PCBs require the OEM password before they
can be downloaded.
The R7910A/R7911 is shipped in the unconfigured condition,
so when power is applied, all safety loads are off and the
burner status when viewed from the S7999 Display is shown
as “Safety data setup needed.”
Once the Safety Data is configured, the R7910A/R7911 is
ready to operate a boiler.
The Software Configuration Tool (part number 50031353-001)
allows all available parameters to be viewed, modified, and
downloaded. This tool allows for building a device working from
a spreadsheet. Customizing can be done on this, along with
choosing to have the parameter Hidden, Read Only, or Level of
Password protection. When complete this sheet can be saved
and/or directly downloaded into the R7910 or R7911 through
the ModBus port. An example is shown in Table 50, beginning
on page 102.
Commissioning
Passwords
A password level of protection may be assigned to any
parameter. Three levels are shown in decreasing order of
privilege:
1. OEM password required—allows access to all parameters
2. Installer password required—allows access to some
parameters
3. End User (no password)—allows access to non-password parameters
OEM PARAMETER PCB:
Providing the OEM password allows downloading of a
parameter control block for OEM protected data. This block
assigns the value of these attributes for each parameter:
• Range Limit—If provided the parameter's value will be
limited.
• Hidden—This attribute prevents the parameter from
showing in the display - it is hidden.
• Read-only—This attribute prevents the parameter from
being changed.
• Password—The password attribute defines the level of
password needed to alter the item: OEM, Installer, or none.
Whenever a valid password has been provided, the R7910A/
R7911 remains in the access level of that password until either
10 minutes of inactivity (no more edits) has occurred or the
command is received to exit to the normal no-password state.
The OEM and Installer passwords are given a default value
when the R7910/R7911 is shipped, but may be changed later
using the SOLA Configuration program or the S7999 system
display or using the electronic configuration tool.
The interaction and behavior of these settings is shown in
Table 7. (All parameters are readable via Modbus, however a
Modbus error response message is sent if an attempt is made
to write one that is marked read-only, or that requires a
password and the appropriate password level is not in-effect.)
Parameter Control Blocks (PCB)
The R7910/R7911 Parameters are managed using control
blocks. There are three parameter control blocks (PCB) that
may be installed into the memory of the R7910A/R7911:
1. OEM Parameter PCB—makes any parameter hidden
and/or unalterable and assigns the password level
2. OEM Alert PCB—determines which alerts are enabled
and, for those that are enabled, if the alert causes the
alarm contacts to close.
Table 7. Interaction of OEM Parameter Settings.
System Display
Hidden
Read-only
Password
Shown
Modbus register I/O
Write
Read
Yes
Write
0
0
0
Yes
Anytime
Yes
0
0
1
Yes
Need Password Yes
Need Password
0
1
x
Yes
No
Yes
No
1
0
0
No
No
Yes
Yes
1
0
1
No
No
Yes
Need Password
1
1
x
No
No
Yes
No
OEM ALERT PCB
Providing the OEM password allows downloading of a
parameter control block for alerts.
OEM RANGE PCB
Providing the OEM password allows downloading of a
parameter control block for range limits.
• Each item in this block enables/disables the alert - a
disabled alert is never shown.
• An enabled alert has the option of closing the alarm
contacts, whenever this alert occurs.
• This block specifies the minimum and maximum values for
any writable parameter that accepts a numeric range, and
for parameters that are enumerated lists, it can suppress
19
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
one or more of the items in the list. If a parameter is not
listed in this PCB, then it is restricted by the factory installed
limits.
3.
WARNING
Explosion Hazard.
Improper configuration can cause fuel buildup and
explosion.
Improper user operation may result in property loss,
physical injury, or death.
4.
The S7999B1026 System Operator Interface or
S7999C Local Operator Interface used to change
Safety Configuration Parameters is to be done only by
experienced and/or licensed burner/boiler
operators and mechanics.
5.
Programming Safety Parameters
All safety parameters require either the OEM or installer
password before they can be changed.
The password level assigned by the OEM Parameter PCB
controls the minimum password level of all safety items.
However if the parameter control block indicates that no
password is required for a safety item, the Installer password
will be enforced.
Functional Sub Systems
There are nine functional sub systems to the R7910A/R7911.
They are:
1. System Operational Settings (page 20)
2. General Configuration Settings (page 21)
3. Demand and Rate (page 23)
4. Rate Limits and Override (page 44)
5. Burner Control (page 65)
6. Modulation Output (page 51)
7. Pump Control (page 54)
8. Lead Lag (page 73)
9. Annunciation (page 62)
The R7910A/R7911 may be in one of two conditions,
configured, and unconfigured. It will run only in the configured
condition. In the unconfigured condition, the setup of safety
data is required following the procedure below before it will run.
In the unconfigured condition, all safety loads are off and the
burner is locked out, showing “Safety data setup needed.”
To modify and confirm the safety data requires the following
steps: When complete, the R7910/R7911 will transition to the
configured condition.
SYSTEM OPERATIONAL SETTINGS
System settings are those that enable or disable the R7910A/
R7911 functions in general or that alter the behavior or
availability of multiple configurable items. See Table 8.
To begin, the user needs to provide a valid password.
1.
2.
the modified section of safety data. However it is not yet
accepted and written into memory, nor does the R7910A/
R7911 leave the unconfigured state; instead it continues
with the confirmation process in the next step.
The R7910A/R7911 provides a parameter state and
expects the user has either confirmed the data or
rejected it. If the user rejects the data then the process
returns to step 2 and when editing again is done the confirmation process begins again. Once started, the confirmation process is successful only if each safety data
item has been confirmed, in the order provided by the
R7910A/R7911.
After all items are confirmed, the R7910A/R7911
requests the user to press and hold the Reset button on
the device for 3 seconds. The user must accomplish this
within 30 seconds.
If the reset button is pressed and held for 3 seconds (an
optional equivalent: a Reset is entered on the local display) to confirm that the programmed device is physically
the one that the operator intended to program then the
safety data and its confirmation is accepted and burned
into memory. When this is done, the R7910A/R7911 is in
the configured condition, unless some other parameter
section also needs setup. If some other section needs
setup, the R7910A/R7911 is again at step 1.
The user edits safety data in the enabled section. At any
time, if “exit” is chosen, the session is ended and the
R7910A/R7911 remains in an unconfigured state. In this
case the burner control status indicates “Safety data
setup needed.”
When the edits are complete and the user accepts
(rather than exit) the parameters the display will show
“edits done.” This causes the R7910A/R7911 to calculate
Table 8. System Operation Settings.
Parameter
Comment
CH enable
Enable, Disable (R9710 only)
This parameter determines whether the CH loop is enabled or disabled.
It may be disabled to turn it off temporarily, or because the application does not use this feature.
CH Priority vs. Lead Lag
CH > LL, CH < LL
Steam enable
Enable, Disable (R7911 only)
This parameter determines whether the Steam input is enabled.
DHW enable
Enable, Disable (R7910 only)
This parameter determines whether the DHW loop is enabled or disabled.
It may be disabled to turn it off temporarily, or because the application does not use this feature.
DHW Priority Source
Disabled, DHW heat demand
DHW Priority Method
Boost during priority time, drop after priority time
Warm Weather Shutdown Enable, Disable, Shutdown after demands have ended, Shutdown immediately
66-1171—03
20
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 8. System Operation Settings. (Continued)
Parameter
Comment
Warm Weather Shutdown Temperature, None
Setpoint
Lead Lag slave enable
Enable, Disable (R7910 only)
Lead Lag Master enable
Enable, Disable (R7910 only)
DHW priority vs LL
DHW priority vs CH
These parameters determine the priority of DHW versus other sources of calls-for-heat, when more
than one source is enabled. The LL source has a fixed priority versus the CH source: if an R7910/
R7911 is set up as a LL slave, and a LL master is controlling it, then the CH source is ignored.
DHW priority override time mm:ss
This parameter determines whether a DHW demand can temporarily override the priority defined by
the DHW priority parameters. If it is non zero, then a DHW demand will take priority over both the LL
demand and the CH demand, for the specified time. If the DHW demand persists for longer than the
specified time then this override priority will expire and control will revert to the normal priority. The
override timer is reset when demand from the DHW source turns off. If normal DHW priority is
already higher than the one or both of the competing priorities, then this parameter has no effect
versus the competing priority.
Annunciation enable
(Model Specific)
Enable, Disable
This parameter determines whether the Annunciator feature of the R7910 are active. When disabled,
the R7910 will ignore the Annunciator inputs.
It may be disabled to turn it off temporarily, but more typically this will be turned off because the
application does not use this feature.
Burner Switch
On, Off
This parameter enables or disables the burner control. When it is off, the burner will not fire.
Inlet Connector Type
For R7910 Hydronic Control
10K NTC single non-safety
12K NTC single non-safety
UNCONFIGURED
For R7911 Steam Control
15 PSI, 150 PSI, or UNCONFIGURED
Designates the type of analog sensor on connector J8 terminals 4 and 5.
Outlet Connector Type
For R7910 Hydronic Control and R7911 Steam Control
10K NTC dual safety-connector J8 terminals 8, 9, and 10
10K or 12K NTC single non-safety-connector J8 terminals 8 and 9
Designates the type of analog sensor used. NOTE: the 10K NTC is a dual sensor used for safety
limits and requires safety verification during setup.
DHW Connector Type
For R7910 Hydronic Control and R7911 Steam Control
10K NTC dual safety-connector J9 terminals 1, 2, and 3
10K or 12K NTC single non-safety-connector J9 terminals 1 and 2
Designates the type of analog sensor type used. NOTE: the 10K NTC is a dual sensor used for
safety limits and requires safety verification during setup.
Stack Connector Type
For R7910 Hydronic Control and R7911 Steam Control
10K NTC dual safety-connector J9 terminals 4, 5 and 6
10K or 12K NTC single non-safety-connector J9 terminals 4 and 5
Designates the type of analog sensor type used. NOTE: the 10K NTC is a dual sensor used for
safety limits and requires safety verification during setup.
Outdoor Connector Type
For R7910 Hydronic Control
10K NTC single non-safety
12K NTC single non-safety
For R7911 Steam Control - there is not an Outdoor Sensor Feature.
Designates the type of analog sensor type is on connector J8 terminals 11 and 12.
DHW Priority Time ODR
Enable
Disable, Enable
When enabled, the DHW priority override time parameter will be derated when the outdoor
temperature is below 32°F. When the outdoor temperature is 32°F and above, the programmed time
will be used as-is.
When the outdoor temperature is -40°F and below, the programmed override time will be derated to
zero (no override). Between 32°F and -40°F, a linear interpolation will be used. For example, at the
midway point of -4°F, the DHW priority override time is one half of the value provided by the
parameter.
GENERAL CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
Those that alter the behavior or availability of configurable
items that are not in any other category. Those that are not
defined in other sections are listed in Table 9:
21
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 9. General Configuration Settings.
Parameter
Comment
Temperature Units
F, C
This parameter determines whether the temperature is represented in units of Fahrenheit or Celsius
degrees.
Anti short cycle time
mm:ss
Whenever the burner is turned off due to no demand, the anti short cycle timer is started and the
burner remains in a Standby Delay condition waiting for this time to expire. The anti short cycle time
does not apply, however, to recycle events such as loss of airflow or flame, it applies only to loss of
demand.
The anti short cycle time always inhibits a CH or LL demand. However, if a DHW demand occurs
then its priority is checked. If it has the highest priority because of either:
• a non-zero value in the DHW priority timer (which is loaded using the DHW priority time
parameter)
• due to the setting in both: DHW priority vs LL (if Lead Lag Master enable is enabled) AND DHW
priority vs CH (if CH enable is enabled)
• then the anti short cycle delay is ignored and the DHW demand is served.
Burner name
text
The Burner Name is a text parameter stored in the R7910A/R7911 to identify the burner.
OEM ID
text
The OEM ID is a text parameter stored in the R7910/R7911 intended for use by an OEM to record
identification information related to the OEM's configuration and setup of the R7910/R7911.
Installation Data
text
The Installation Data is a text parameter stored in the R7910/R7911. It is intended for use by the
installer to record identification information about how the R7910/R7911 was setup at the installation
time.
66-1171—03
22
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Demand and Rate
speed. The chosen fan speed for calibrating these scalers is
5000 RPM, that is, when both the MCBA and the R7910A have
a maximum fan speed of 5000 RPM, the user-programmable
P, I, and D gains used by the MCBA can be directly copied to
the corresponding R7910A parameters, and the behavior of
the R7910A control will then be similar to the MCBA.
The Demand and Rate subsystem produces 3 outputs:
• Pump demand
• Burner demand, which tells the burner control it should fire,
and
• the modulation rate, which is the burner’s firing rate.
At other values of maximum fan speed, the parameters to
provide similar behavior can be calculated as:
There are three normal sources that share use of the burner:
GAINSOLA = GAINMCBA * Max_fan_speed / 5000
• Central Heating (CH) for R7910 or Steam for R7911
• Domestic Hot Water (DHW) R7910 only
• Lead Lag (LL)
Demand/Rate Selection and Limiting
(example using R7910 Hydronic Control)
These are all similar in that:
These sources of demand and modulation rate are processed
by a priority selector that determines which of the sources
(Central Heating [CH], Domestic Hot Water [DHW], or Lead
Lag Master [LL]) actually has control of the burner.
• Their inputs are a temperature sensor (pressure for R7911)
and a setpoint value.
• Their outputs are:
a. On/off pump demand
b. An on/off demand indication that is on if the subsystem wants the burner to fire.
c. A modulation rate which is a percentage value
between 0% and 100% that the subsystem wants as
the burners firing rate.
• They use a PID calculation to set the modulation rate.
The frost protection source has control only if none of the
others want the burner to fire.
Additionally, the modulation rate requested by the source can
be modified by rate limiting, which adjusts the burner firing rate
during special conditions and it can be overridden by manual
control or burner control (e.g. prepurge and lightoff).
The descriptions of the parameters shown in Fig. 5 occur
elsewhere in this document:
Each of these sources has its own separate parameters.
Additionally the R7910 has two sources that can call for burner
firing, but do not use a PID calculation or modulate to a
setpoint: CH Frost Protection and DHW frost protection, which
always fire at the minimum modulation rate.
• The enables and the DHW priority timeout are in “Burner
Control Operation” on page 65.
• Manual Rate control is in “Modulation Output” on page 51.
• Frost Protection is in “Frost Protection (Hydronic only)” on
page 41.
• Various Rate Limiting inputs are in “Rate Limits and
Override” on page 44.
PID Requirements As a replacement for
MCBA Control:
The internal gain scalers for P, I, and D can be calibrated so
that the gains for a legacy MCBA control can be copied to the
R7910A without conversion at one specific maximum fan
The Demand/Rate Selection subsystem is connected internally
in the R7910A as shown in Fig. 5:
23
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
CH ENABLE
DHW ENABLE
FUTURE
MIX ENABLE
LL SLAVE ENABLE
PRIORITY: CH <>DWH LL<>DHW
DHW PRIORITY OVERRIDE TIME
DHW ENABLE
DHW
STORAGE
TIMER
SLAVE COMMAND EXISTS
CH HEAT DEMAND
RELOAD
DHW HEAT DEMAND
RELOAD
DHW PRIORITY (EnviraCOM) T
DHW
DEMAND
PRIORITY
TIMER
DHW DEMAND (EnviraCOM)
SENSOR
T
CH FROST PROTECT BURNER DEMAND
DHW FROST PROTECT BURNER DEMAND
PARAMETER
“pRATE” = 0 TO 99.99% OF CAPACITY
DHW PRIORITY SOURCE
“mRATE” = ANALOG% OR RPM
DHW PRIORITY METHOD
CH FROST PROTECTION ENABLE
DHW FROST PROTECTION ENABLE
DEMAND
PRIORITY
CONTROL
(SEE PRS FOR DESC)
DMD PRIORITY
CH BURNER DEMAND
DHW BURNER DEMAND
DHW STORAGE DEMAND
LL SLAVE DEMAND
FROST BURNER DEMAND
OFF (NO DEMAND) = 0
CH
DHW
DHW-STORE
LL
FP
OFF
CH RATE
DHW RATE
CH
DHW
DHW-STORE
LL
FP
OFF
LL SLAVE RATE
FROST PROTECTION RATE
OFF (NO DEMAND) = 0%
INLET
BURNER DEMAND
BURNER STATUS
PUMP
CONTROL
MANUAL RATE ENABLE
- AUTO
- MANUAL IN RUN
- MANUAL IN RUN AND STANDBY
BURNER DEMAND
RATE LIMITS
MANUAL
RATE
pRATE TO mRATE
CONVERSION
RATE OVERRIDE
DELTA-T ...
4-20mA
ANALOG PERCENTAGE
OUTPUT
SELECT
MIN/MAX FAN
SPEED LIMIT
0-10V
TACH
MIN PWM
LIMIT
REDUCE:
STACK LIMIT ...
OVERRIDE
LIMITS
SLOW START ...
FAN SPEED
RAMP
PWM
FIRING RATE
0 = BC HAS COMMANDED FAN TO BE OFF & NOT BELOW; OR BC DISABLED/FAULT.
MIN. MOD. RATE = MANUAL RATE WHEN FIRING IS LESS THAN MINIMUM MODULATION,
OR ABNORMAL BC REQUEST (MANUAL MODES IGNORED).
MAX. MOD. RATE = MANUAL RATE WHEN FIRING IS GREATER THAN MAX MODULATION.
ABS. MIN. RATE = ABNORMAL BC REQUEST OR MANUAL IN STANDBY IS LESS THAN ABS. MIN.
ABS. MAX. RATE = ABNORMAL BC REQUEST OR MANUAL IN STANDBY IS LESS THAN ABS. MIN.
BOOST:
MIN. MOD. RATE
ANTI-CONDENS...
ANTI-CONDENSATION
PRIORITY
BURNER
CONTROL
COMMANDED RATE
MODULATION
OUTPUT
FORCED RATE...
STACK
OUTLET
TERMINALS
OUTPUT
INPUT
TOP: FIRING & BC HAS NO COMMANDED RATE & ONE OF THE MANUAL MODES IS ENABLED.
OR
NOT FIRING & BC IS IN STANDBY & “MANUAL IN RUN & STANDBY” IS ENABLED.
MIDDLE: NOT ABOVE AND BC HAS A COMMANDED RATE (E.G. IN STANDBY, PURGE, IDNITION, ETC.)
BOTTOM: FIRING & BC HAS NO COMMANDED RATE & AUTO MODE SELECTED (NORMAL MODULATION)
M24973A
Fig. 5. Demand and rate selection diagram.
The demand priority control block shown in Fig. 5 determines
which source of demand has control of the R7910A burner,
according to parameters and the logic described below.
The DHW priority timer within this block operates according to
the logic:
IF “DHW pump demand” is true
Set DHW_storage_timer to DHW storage time
ELSE
Decrement DHW_storage_timer (count down to zero, then stop)
IF “DHW pump demand” is false
Set DHW_priority_timer to DHW priority override time
ELSE
Decrement DHW_priority_timer (count down to zero, then stop)
M24971A
Fig. 6. DHW priority timer logic.
66-1171—03
24
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
The burner demand priority control block implements a priority scheme according to the descriptions of the parameters shown as
providing input to this block. The implementation is:
DETERMINE IF DHW DEMAND SHOULD IGNORE AN ANTI SHORT CYCLE (ASC) DELAY...
M24972A
Fig. 7. Burner demand priority control.
CH Hydronic Loop Demand and Rate
is above the setpoint plus a hysteresis value, or until the other
selected demand source input (e.g., Stat, Remote Stat) if any,
turns off.
The CH (Central Heating) Hydronic Demand and Rate source
compares a selected input sensor to a setpoint.
Pump demand may be driven by the selected demand source
input (Stat input, a remote stat, or by the sensor alone).
Burner demand will exist if the sensor temperature falls below
the setpoint minus a hysteresis value. Once the burner
demand signal is on, it remains on until the sensor temperature
A Proportional-Integral-Differential (PID) controller operates to
generate the demand source’s requested modulation rate.
25
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
The Hydronic Central Heating function is implemented as
shown in Fig. 8.
INPUT
SENSOR
CH DEMAND SWITCH
CENTRAL HEATING
( CH)
“pRATE” = 0 TO 99.99%
OF CAPACITY
STAT
EnviraCOM REMOTE STAT
LCI
CH ENABLE
OUTPUT
PARAMETER
T
STAT2
T
CH MODBUS STAT
NO DATA TIMEOUT
REVERT TO OFF
T
J7-3
120 VAC
FUTURE
INLET (S1)
OUTLET (S3S4)
CH HEAT
DEMAND
SENSOR ONLY
CH MODULATION SENSOR
S5
MODBUS
DS HEADER
CH BURNER
DEMAND
HYSTERESIS
FUTURE
S2 4-20 mA
20 mA WATER TEMPERATURE
OFF HYST.
4-20 mA
TO SETPOINT
4 mA WATER TEMPERATURE
SETPOINT
4-20 mA
TO
pRATE
P-GAIN
2
MODBUS
SETPOINT
FUTURE
TIME SINCE:
BURNER TURN-ON
BURNER TURN-OFF
PID
1 T
TOD
SETPOINT
CH FIRING RATE
1 T
2
I-GAIN
3 T
4
D-GAIN
EnviraCOM TOD
3T
FUTURE
MODBUS
RATE
T
NO DATA TIMEOUT
REVERT TO PID
T
TOD
LOW WATER
MAX OUTDOOR
MIN OUTDOOR
1 = S2 4-20mA
2 = LOCAL
3 = MODBUS 0-FF FUTURE
4 = MODBUS 0-200 FUTURE
CH SETPOINT SOURCE
1 = S2 4-20mA REMOTE
2.4 = LOCAL (4 IF ODR)
3 = MODBUS FUTURE
RESTART (RESTART
INTEGRATOR WHENEVER
A LIMIT OR OVERRIDE
ENDS, OR TURN-ON
OCCURS.)
ODR SETPOINT
SENSOR IS OK
CH MODULATION RATE SOURCE
NO DATA TIMEOUT
REVERT TO SETPOINT
}
OUTDOOR
SETPOINT DEMAND
BURNER
STATE: ON/OFF
ON HYST.
ODR
ENABLE
M31136A
Fig. 8. Central heating hydronic diagram.
The function of each parameter and feature is given below.
Table 10. Central Heating Hydronic Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
CH demand switch
STAT, LCI, Sensor Only, EnviraCOM Remote STAT J7-3 120 Vac
The CH demand switch may be selected from four options. In all cases, for burner demand to
exist, the sensor must be generating a demand as determined by values.
• When “Sensor Only” is chosen, no other input is considered and pump demand is derived
from burner demand.
• When “STAT” is chosen, the STAT input (J8 Terminal 3) in the On condition creates pump
demand and it also must be on for burner demand to exist; if it is off there is no demand.
• When “LCI” is chosen, the LCI input (J6 Terminal 3) in the On condition creates pump
demand and it also must be on for burner demand to exist; if it is off there is no demand.
CH sensor
Outlet, Inlet
The sensor used for modulation and demand may be the Outlet sensor, the 4-20 mA Header
or inlet sensor.
66-1171—03
26
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 10. Central Heating Hydronic Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
Comment
CH setpoint
Degrees or None
This setpoint is used when the time-of-day input is off. If the ODR function is inactive, the
setpoint is used as-is.
If the ODR function is active (input on J10-2), this setpoint provides one coordinate for the
outdoor reset curve, as described in “Outdoor Reset and Boost” on page 27.
Modulation sensor
Inlet (S1), Outlet (S3, S4), S5
The selected input provides the temperature for modulation control.
As a startup check, if the CH Loop is enabled for a hydronic system, then if the select sensor
is not a temperature input (i.e. S1 is a 4-20 ma input for Steam), then this causes an alert and
causes the CH loop to suspend.
CH Demand source
Local, Modbus, 4-20 mA
4 mA water temperature
Degrees
Establishes temperature for 4 mA input
20 mA water temperature
Degrees
Establishes temperature for 20 mA input
CH time-of-day setpoint
Degrees or None
This setpoint is used when the time-of-day input (J10-2) is on.
If the ODR function is inactive then the setpoint is used as-is.
If the ODR function is active then this setpoint provides one coordinate for the shifted
(because TOD is on) outdoor reset curve, as described in “Outdoor Reset and Boost” on
page 27.
CH off hysteresis
CH on hysteresis
Degrees or None
The off hysteresis is added to the setpoint temperature to determine the temperature at which
the demand turns off.
Similarly, the on hysteresis is subtracted from the setpoint to determine the temperature at
which demand turns on.
These may be set to None to indicate that no hysteresis has been defined.
The On and Off hysteresis are adjusted at the time the burner changes from off to on, and
from on to off, as shown in Fig. 12. This gives the PID algorithm some room to be more
aggressive in tracking the load, which can result in overshoot (or undershoot). (see the
Setpoint and Hysteresis section, page 32)
CH hysteresis step time
seconds
Time of each step. A step time of zero - disables this feature. (see the Setpoint and
Hysteresis section, page 32)
CH P-gain
CH I-gain
CH D-gain
0-400
These parameters are the gains applied to the proportional, integral, and differential terms of
the PID equation for the CH loop.
CH setpoint source
Local, S2 4-20mA
If the setpoint source is Local, then the control’s local setpoint system is used. This setting
enables the normal use of the CH setpoint, CH TOD setpoint, and the CH outdoor reset
parameters and functions.
If the setpoint source is S2 4-20mA, then the setpoint is determined by the 4-20mA setpoint
routine. If this sensor is invalid then the control behaves as if Local were selected.
Modulation rate source
Local, S2 4-20mA
• If the modulation rate source is Local, then the control’s PID algorithm determines the
modulation rate.
If the modulation rate source is S2 4-20mA, then the modulation rate is determined by the S2
4-20mA modulation routine that exists in prior controls. If this sensor is invalid then the
control behaves as if Local were selected.
CH ODR low water temperature
CH ODR maximum outdoor
temperature
Degrees or None
These two parameters determine the lower-right point on the graph.
Outdoor Reset and Boost
If the outdoor reset feature is enabled and the sensor is
functioning, the current outdoor temperature is used to
determine the setpoint by interpolation. The lookup function
uses two X, Y points to determine a line on the graph, as
shown in Fig. 9. The Y coordinate of the top-right point
depends on the time-of-day input; if TOD is off, then CH
The outdoor reset function is symmetrical for each of the
control loops that use it, although they each have their own
parameters.
27
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
setpoint is used. If TOD is on, the CH TOD setpoint provides
the Y coordinate and the and the lower-left point is recalculated
to shift the graph in a parallel way.
• For outdoor temperatures higher than the maximum, the
minimum water temperature is used.
• For outdoor temperatures between the minimum and the
maximum, a linear interpolation is used to find the setpoint.
• For outdoor temperatures lower than the minimum, the
water temperature provided by the appropriate setpoint is
used.
SETPOINT TEMPERATURE
180
(min outdoor, Setpoint)
Should be higher than setpoint
160
Boost max setpoint
140
step °F
120
Pa
TO
D
100
80
TO
D
ra
=
lle
ls
on
st
ep
=
hi
°F
on
ft
60
40
(min outdoor, TOD Setpoint)
0
20
(max outdoor, min water)
40
60
80
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE
M31113
Fig. 9. Outdoor reset with TOD and boost.
Table 11. Outdoor Reset and Boost Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
CH ODR low outdoor
temperature
Degrees or None
This parameter determines the X coordinate of one point on the ODR graph. At that outdoor
temperature, the setpoint will be the CH setpoint (or the CH TOD setpoint, if TOD Is on).
CH ODR boost time
CH ODR boost max burner off
point
mm:ss
Degrees or None
If CH outdoor reset is not active or if the CH ODR boost time parameter is zero, then the
boost function is inactive.
Otherwise, the boost time provides a time interval. Each time this interval elapses and
demand is not satisfied, the setpoint is increased by 18°F, up to the maximum provided by the
CH ODR boost max burner off point. However, if the latter is not valid, then the boost function
is inactive and an alert is issued.
CH ODR low water temperature
CH ODR maximum outdoor
temperature
Degrees or None
These two parameters determine one point on the ODR graph. At the maximum outdoor
temperature, the setpoint will be the low water temperature.
CH ODR boost step
Degrees or None
CH ODR boost recovery step
time
mm:ss
Minimum boiler water
temperature
Degrees or None
Defines the minimum outdoor reset setpoint for the stand-alone CH loop if this is invalid or
none, then outdoor reset is inhibited and will not run. If enabled an alert is issued.
If CH outdoor reset is not active or if the CH ODR boost time
parameter is zero, then the boost function is inactive.
Otherwise, the boost time provides a time interval and the
other parameters must be valid—if they are not, the boost
function is inactive and an alert is issued.
Once the demand is satisfied the boosted setpoint remains
active and slowly returns to its non-boosted level according to
the CH ODR boost recovery step time. Whenever this interval
elapses, the setpoint is adjusted back toward its normal value
by 0.5°C (0.9°F).
Each time the boost time interval elapses and CH demand is
not satisfied, the effective CH setpoint is increased by the
amount specified in CH ODR boost step. However, CH ODR
boost max setpoint limits this action: it is never exceeded.
If the TOD switch changes state after at least one boost event
has occurred, the new effective setpoint is the higher of:
• the old boosted setpoint and
• the new unboosted setpoint.
66-1171—03
28
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
However, if the first boost event has not yet occurred, then the
new setpoint is adopted immediately. In either case, the boost
timer—which began when the demand started and continues
to measure the boost time interval—is not reset when TOD
changes state.
CH ODR Parameters
LL ODR Parameters
Setpoint
Setpoint
TOD Setpoint
TOD Setpoint
Minimum Outdoor Temp
Minimum Outdoor Temp
Maximum Outdoor Temp
Maximum Outdoor Temp
Minimum Water Temp
Minimum Water Temp
Boost Time
Boost Time
Boost Max Setpoint
Boost Max Setpoint
Boost step
Boost step
Boost recovery step time
Boost recovery step time
M31114
Fig. 10. Outdoor reset parameters.
Steam Loop Demand and Rate
Pump (or output) demand may be driven by the selected
demand source input (Stat input, a remote stat, or by the
sensor alone).
The CH (Central Heating) Steam Demand and Rate source
compares a selected input sensor to a setpoint.
A Proportional-Integral-Differential (PID) controller operates to
generate the demand source’s requested modulation rate.
Burner demand will exist if the sensor pressure falls below the
setpoint minus a hysteresis value. Once the burner demand
signal is on, it remains on until the sensor pressure is above
the setpoint plus a hysteresis value, or until the other selected
demand source input (e.g., Stat, Remote Stat) if any, turns off.
The Steam Central Heating function is implemented as shown
in Fig. 11.
29
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
STEAM ONLY
PARAMETER
CH DEMAND SWITCH
STEAM HEATING
(CH)
PARAMETER
STAT
EnviraCOM REMOTE STAT
INPUT
OUTPUT
“pRATE” = 0 TO 99.99%
OF CAPACITY
T
LCI
CH ENABLE
T
NO DATA TIMEOUT
REVERT TO OFF
CH MODULATION SENSOR
STAT2
IGNORED: S1 IS ALWAYS USED AS
THE CH SENSOR FOR STEAM
T
MODULUS STAT
CH HEAT
DEMAND
J7-3 120 VAC
FUTURE
SENSOR ONLY
CONVERSION
PRESSURE SENSOR TYPE:
0-15PSI OR 0-150PSI
S1 INLET
4-20 mA
S2 4-20 mA
CH BURNER
DEMAND
HYSTERESIS
SETPOINT DEMAND
A
CH PRESSURE ON HYSTERESIS
CH
MINIMUM
PRESSURE
CH PRESSURE OFF HYSTERESIS
TIME SINCE:
BURNER TURN-ON
BURNER TURN-OFF
EnviraCOM TOD
A
4-20 mA
TO SETPOINT
ERROR SCALING:
PRESSURE ERROR IS
NORMALIZED:
1.0 PSI ERROR = 1.0˚C ERROR
FOR A 150 PSI SENSOR.
0.1 PSI ERROR = 1.0˚C ERROR
FOR A 15 PSI SENSOR.
WHERE = MEANS
“IS EQUIVALENT TO”
TOD
CH
PRESSURE
SETPOINT
CH TOD
PRESSURE
SETPOINT
BURNER
STATE: ON/OFF
1 T
2
3 T
PID
P-GAIN
2
3
D-GAIN
T
FUTURE
T
T
NO DATA TIMEOUT
REVERT TO PID
MODBUS
RATE
CH MODULATION RATE SOURCE
NO DATA TIMEOUT
REVERT TO SETPOINT
MODBUS
STEAM SETPOINT
FUTURE
1
I-GAIN
T
TOD
4-20 mA
TO
pRATE
RESTART (RESTART
INTEGRATOR WHENEVER
A LIMIT OR OVERRIDE
ENDS, OR TURN-ON
OCCURS.)
CH SETPOINT SOURCE
1 = S2 4-20mA REMOTE
2 = LOCAL
3 = MODBUS FUTURE
1 = S2 4-20mA
2 = LOCAL
3 = MODBUS 0-FF FUTURE
4 = MODBUS 0-200 FUTURE
M31140A
Fig. 11. Central heating steam diagram.
The function of each parameter and feature is given below.
.
Table 12. Central Heating Steam Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
Steam enable
Disable, Enable
Disable/enable steam feature.
Steam demand source
STAT and Sensor, Remote Stat and Sensor, LCI and Sensor, Sensor Only
The CH demand source may be selected from four options. In all cases, for burner demand
to exist, the sensor must be generating a demand as determined by setpoint and hysteresis
values.
• When “Sensor Only” is chosen, no other input is considered and pump demand is derived
from burner demand.
• When “STAT and Sensor” is chosen, the STAT input in the On condition creates pump
demand and it also must be on for burner demand to exist; if it is off there is no demand.
• When “Remote Stat and Sensor” is chosen, a message indicating the remote stat is on
creates pump demand and it also must be on for burner demand to exist; if the message
indicates this stat is off or if no message has been received within the message timeout
time (3–4 minutes), there is no demand.
• When “LCI and Sensor” is chosen, the LCI input in the On condition creates pump
demand and it also must be on for burner demand to exist; if it is off there is no demand.
Steam sensor
Inlet
The sensor used for modulation and demand may be either the Outlet sensor, the 4-20mA
Inlet sensor.
66-1171—03
30
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 12. Central Heating Steam Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
Comment
Steam pressure setpoint
PSI or None
This setpoint is used when the time-of-day input is off.
Steam time-of-day pressure
setpoint
PSI or None
This setpoint is used when the time-of-day input (J10 terminal 2) is on.
Steam Pressure off hysteresis
Steam Pressure on hysteresis
PSI or None
The off hysteresis is added to the setpoint pressure to determine the pressure at which the
demand turns off.
Similarly, the on hysteresis is subtracted from the setpoint to determine the pressure at which
demand turns on.
These may be set to None to indicate that no hysteresis has been defined.
The On and Off hysteresis are adjusted at the time the burner changes from off to on, and
from on to off, as shown in Fig. 12. This gives the PID algorithm some room to be more
aggressive in tracking the load, which can result in overshoot (or undershoot). (see the
Setpoint and Hysteresis section, page 32)
Steam hysteresis step time
seconds
Time of each step. A step time of zero - disables this feature. (see the Setpoint and
Hysteresis section, page 32)
Steam P-gain
Steam I-gain
Steam D-gain
0-100
These parameters are the gains applied to the proportional, integral, and differential terms of
the PID equation for the Steam loop.
Steam 4-20mA remote control
Disable, Setpoint, Modulation
Disable: When the value is “Disable,” the 4-20mA input via the Header is ignored and both of
the remote control functions are disabled.
Modulation: When the burner is free to modulate during the Run state, the 4-20mA input
from the Header input becomes the modulation source, where 4mA corresponds to the
Minimum modulation rate and 20mA corresponds to the Maximum modulation rate. All other
behavior remains as it was; the setpoint and the on/off hysteresis values are still used to
determine the burner-on and burner-off thresholds, and the TOD will still affect the burner-on
and burner-off thresholds, if this is enabled.
When the 4-20mA input is faulty (open, shorted, out of range, etc.) the control issues an alert
and reverts to using PID output for modulation, as if the 4-20mA function were disabled.
Setpoint: This parameter disables the CH outdoor reset function and the setpoint is provided
using a linear interpolation of the 4-20mA input value within a range:
• Either the CH pressure setpoint or the CH TOD pressure setpoint provides the setpoint for
the 20mA, depending on the state of the TOD input, and the CH minimum pressure
provides the setpoint for 4mA.
When the 4-20mA input is faulty (open, shorted, out of range, etc.) the control issues an alert
and reverts to using:
• For steam either the CH pressure setpoint or the CH TOD pressure setpoint, depending
on the state of the TOD input.
Steam 4-20mA remote control
hysteresis
n.n mA
Provides a hysteresis filter for the 4-20ma remote control input.
CH minimum pressure
PSI
This parameter provides the minimum steam pressure used to calculate the 4-20mA control
setpoint for 4mA.
20 mA CH pressure
PSI or None
Establishes the pressures for the end points of the 4-20 mA inputs
Setpoint and Hysteresis (Hydronic)
The CH, DHW and LL master each have similar setpoint and
hysteresis functions. The parameters for each are separate
and independent.
Step
Whenever the burner turns on, the turn-off threshold is raised
by 18°F,and then it is decreased in steps. The time of each
step is provided by the hysteresis step time parameter. If the
time (T) is not-zero, then the following schedule is followed
until the off threshold reaches its original value:
31
Time since turnon
Hydronic Turn-off threshold
1
0 <= time <1T
Setpoint + Off hysteresis + 18°F
2
1T <=time <2T
Setpoint + Off hysteresis + 8°F
3
2T <= time <3T Setpoint + Off hysteresis + 6°F
4
3T <=time <4T
Setpoint + Off hysteresis + 4°F
5
4T <=time <5T
Setpoint + Off hysteresis + 2°F
6
5 <= time
Setpoint
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Setpoint and Hysteresis (Steam
Control)
Whenever the burner turns off, the turn-on threshold is lowered
by doubling the on hysteresis, and then increasing it by 2
degrees F per step until it reaches its original value.
The Steam and LL master each have similar setpoint and
hysteresis functions. The parameters for each are separate
and independent.
The time of each step is provided by the hysteresis step time
parameter. The number of steps required to reach the original
on hysteresis is the on hysteresis value divided by
2 degrees F.
Step
Whenever the burner turns on, the turn-off threshold is raised
by 10psi (1.0 for 0-15 psi), and then it is decreased in steps.
The time of each step is provided by the hysteresis step time
parameter. If the time (T) is not-zero, then the following
schedule is followed until the off threshold reaches its original
value:
Time since turn-on Hydronic Turn-on threshold
1
0<=timer <1T
Setpoint - 2 * On hysteresis
2
1T<=time <2T
Setpoint - 2 * On hysteresis +
1*2°F
3
2T<=time <3T
Setpoint - 2 * On hysteresis +
2* 2°F
4
nT<=time <(n+1)T
Setpoint -2 * On hysteresis + n
* 2°F
5
(on hysteresis/
2F*T<=time
Setpoint
CH PARAMETERS
DHW PARAMETERS
Step
LL MASTER PARAMETERS
OFF HYST.
OFF HYST.
OFF HYST.
SETPOINT
SETPOINT
SETPOINT
TOD SETPOINT
TOD SETPOINT
TOD SETPOINT
ON HYST.
ON HYST.
ON HYST.
HYSTERESIS STEP TIME
Steam Turn-off Threshold
HYSTERESIS STEP TIME
150psi Sensor
10
1.0
2
8
0.8
3
6
0.6
4
4
0.4
5
2
0.2
6
Setpoint
Setpoint
Whenever the burner turns off, the turn-on threshold is lowered
by doubling the on hysteresis, and then increasing it by 2 psi
(.2 psi for 0-15 psi) per step until it reaches its original value.
The time of each step is provided by the hysteresis step time
parameter. The number of steps required to reach the original
on hysteresis is the on hysteresis value divided by 2 psi per
step for (0–150 PSI .2 psi per step for; 0–15 PSI).
HYSTERESIS STEP TIME
SETPOINT AND HYSTERESIS
HST = HISTERESIS STEP TIME
(0 = DISABLE)
+18°F
+8°F
+6°F
+4°F
+2°F
Steam Turn-on Threshold
Step
SETPOINT + OFF HYSTERESIS
1 MINUTE
15psi Sensor
1
SETPOINT
150psi Sensor
1
0<=timer<1T
Setpoint - 2* On
hysteresis
2
1T<=time<2T
Setpoint - 2 * On
hysteresis + .2psi
3
2T<=time<3T
Setpoint - 2 * On
hysteresis + .2psi
4
nT<=time<(n+1)T
Setpoint - 2 * On
hysteresis + .2psi
5
(on hysteresis/
2psi<=time)
Setpoint
SETPOINT - ON HYSTERESIS
1 MINUTE
2°F
SETPOINT - 2 * ON HYSTERESIS
ON
BURNER
OFF
ANTI-SHORT-CYCLE DELAY
SYSTEM PARAMETER
ANTI SHORT CYCLE DELAY TIME
(DOES NOT APPLY FOR DHW)
M31118
Fig. 12. Hydronic Setpoint and hysteresis.
66-1171—03
32
15psi Sensor
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
STEAM PARAMETERS
OFF HYST.
SETPOINT
TOD SETPOINT
ON HYST.
SETPOINT AND HYSTERESIS
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
SETPOINT + OFF HYSTERESIS
1 MINUTE
SETPOINT
SETPOINT - ON HYSTERESIS
1 MINUTE
2 PSI (.2 PSI FOR 0-15 PSI)
SETPOINT - 2 * ON HYSTERESIS
BURNER
ON
OFF
ANTI-SHORT-CYCLE DELAY
SYSTEM PARAMETER
ANTI SHORT CYCLE DELAY TIME
M27611A
Fig. 13. Steam Setpoint and hysteresis.
33
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
DHW Loop Demand and Rate
(Hydronic only)
is above the setpoint plus a hysteresis value, or until the other
selected demand source input (i.e. Remote Stat or DHW
Switch), if any, turns off.
The Domestic Hot Water (DHW) Demand and Rate source
compares a sensor to a setpoint.
Pump demand may be driven by the a remote stat, or by the
sensor alone.
A Burner demand will exist if the sensor temperature falls
below the setpoint minus a hysteresis value. Once the burner
demand signal is on, it remains on until the sensor temperature
A Proportional-Integral-Differential controller operates to
generate the source's requested modulation rate.
The DHW function is implemented as shown in Fig. 14.
FUTURE
DOMESTIC HOT WATER
(DHW )
DATA SERVER DHW OUTPUT ENABLE
DHW DEMAND SWITCH
FUTURE
S6 (DHW TOP)
DHW ENABLE
INLET (S1)
J7-3 120 VAC
SENSOR IS SHORTED
STAT
DATA SERVER “DSS DHW DEMAND”
STAT2
DATA SERVER “DSS DHW TEMPERATURE”
EnviraCOM REMOTE STAT
FUTURE
DATA SERVER “DSD DHW DEMAND”
DHW
MODULATION
SENSOR
OUTLET (S3S4)
SAVE DHW TEMP AND DHW
DEMAND IF THIS IS ENABLED AND
THEY ARE NOT ALREADY COMING
FROM THE DATA SERVER
T
T
NO DATA
TIMEOUT:
REVERT
TO OFF
DHW PLATE DEMAND
DHW HEAT
DEMAND
DHW (S6 ONLY)
PREHEAT
ACTIVE
TOD
SENSOR ONLY
DHW (S6S7)
T
DATA SERVER “DSD DHW TEMP”
FUTURE
DHW BURNER
DEMAND
HYSTERESIS
SETPOINT DEMAND
BURNER
STATE: ON/OFF
TIME SINCE:
BURNER TURN-ON
BURNER TURN-OFF
NORMAL
PREHEAT
ON HYST.
ON HYST.
OFF HYST.
OFF HYST.
IF PREHEAT IS ACTIVE,
USE PREHEAT HYSTERESEIS
EnviraCOM TOD
TOD
T=x P=1
SETPOINT
T=0 P=0
TOD
SETPOINT
T=1 P=0
TERMINALS
INPUT OUTPUT
0%
DHW STORAGE
PARAMETER
P-GAIN
I-GAIN
TO/FROM
DHW STORAGE
D-GAIN
“pRATE” =
0 TO 99.99% OF CAPACITY
RESTART (RESTART
INTEGRATOR WHENEVER
A LIMIT OR OVERRIDE
ENDS, OR TURN-ON
OCCURS.)
PASS-THROUGH IF PRIORITY<>
DHW STORAGE
Fig. 14. Domestic hot water function.
The DHW loop’s ability to override the normal demand priority
is described in the System Operation Settings section.
Otherwise the behavior of each parameter and feature is given
below.
66-1171—03
DHW FIRING RATE
SENSOR
PID
P
PLATE PREHEAT
SETPOINT
(USE MIN MODERATION AND ALSO
RESTART THE PID INTEGRATOR AT
THE END OF PREHEATING)
PREHEAT
ACTIVE
PREHEAT
ACTIVE
T
DHW HIGH
LIMIT ACTIVE
(SUSPEND DHW DURING
DHW HIGH LIMIT CONDITION)
34
M31141A
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 13. Domestic Hot Water Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
DHW demand switch
DHW Sensor Only, DHW Switch, Auto-Sensor Only, EnviraCOM DHW Request, STAT, Auto
and EnviraCOM DHW, Plate Heat Exchanger, J7-3 120 Vac
This parameter selects the source of demand for the DHW system.
• If Sensor Only is selected, the burner on/off hysteresis levels also provide “pump
demand” or heat demand; there is no other switch-like input.
• If DHW Switch is selected, the S6 sensor (one half of the DHW sensor, which is S6S7)
acts as a switch. If it is shorted then there is DHW heat demand; if it is open then there is
no DHW heat demand.
• If either Auto DHW (S6) and EnviraCOM DHW Remote Stat or Auto: Sensor Only is
selected, the S6 sensor (one half of the DHW sensor, which is S6S7) is used for automatic
detection. In this case:
• DHW high limit enable must be set to Disable (because it is not being used as a
safety sensor).
• DHW connector type must be set to either “10K single nonsafety NTC” or “12K single
non-safety NTC”
• DHW modulation sensor must be set to either “Auto DHW (S6) or Inlet,” or “Auto
DHW (S6) or Outlet.”
• If these are not as specified then a lockout occurs.
The behavior of the auto-detection is:
• If DHW (S6) is shorted or open then:
• DHW (S6) provides heat demand input and modulation is controlled by the input (Inlet or
Outlet) specified by the DHW modulation sensor parameter.
• ELSE (when DHW (S6) is providing a valid temperature) Modulation is controlled by the
DHW (S6) sensor, and if this DHW demand switch parameter selects:
• Auto: DHW(S6) or Sensor Only then: The DHW sensor provides heat demand, as if
the “Sensor Only” option had been chosen.
• Plate Heat Exchanger then the DHW heat demand operates as specified in the Plate
Heat Exchanger section.
• STAT then the J8 terminal 3 input is the DHW heat demand signal.
• J7 terminal 3 120 Vac
DHW setpoint
Degrees or None
This setpoint is used whenever the time-of-day switch is off or not connected (unused).
DHW TOD setpoint
Degrees or None
This setpoint is used when the time-of-day switch (J10 terminal 2) is on.
DHW off hysteresis
DHW on hysteresis
Degrees or None
The off hysteresis is added to the setpoint temperature to determine the temperature at which
the demand turns off. Similarly, the on hysteresis is subtracted from the setpoint to determine
the temperature at which demand turns on.
However, these are adjusted at the time the burner changes from on to off, and from off to on
to give the PID algorithm some room to be more aggressive in tracking the load, which can
result in overshoot (undershoot). This adjustment is identical to that described for the CH
demand and rate source, except it is controlled by the DHW hysteresis step time. (see the
Setpoint and Hysteresis section, page 32)
DHW hysteresis step time
seconds
The time for each step. A step time of zero disables this feature. (see the Setpoint and
Hysteresis section, page 32)
DHW P-gain
DHW I-gain
DHW D-gain
0-400
These parameters are the gains applied to the proportional, integral, and differential terms of
the PID equation for the DHW loop.
DHW priority time ODR enable
Disable, Enable
When enabled, the DHW priority override time parameter will be derated when the outdoor
temperature is below 32°F. When the outdoor temperature is 32°F and above, the
programmed time will be used as-is.
When the outdoor temperature is -40°F and below, the programmed override time will be
derated to zero (no override). Between 32°F and -40°F, a linear interpolation will be used. For
example, at the midway point of -4°F, the DHW priority override time is one half of the value
provided by the parameter.
35
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 13. Domestic Hot Water Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
DHW modulation sensor
Comment
Inlet (S1), Outlet (S3S4), DHW (S6S7), Auto DHW (S6) or Inlet(S1), Auto DHW (S6) or Outlet
This parameter selects the source of modulation control for the DHW system. If the selected
input is not a temperature (e.g. S1 is steam pressure for a steam control) then an alert occurs
and the DHW control subsystem is suspended.
• If Inlet is selected then the sensor on J8 terminal 4 provides DHW temperature.
• If Outlet is selected then this sensor controls DHW modulation.
• If DHW (S6S7) is selected then this sensor controls DHW modulation.
• If one of the two Auto: DHW(S6) or Inlet(S1) or DHW(S6) or Outlet options is selected,
then the modulation sensor is determined by the automatic detection function described
for the DHW demand switch parameter.
• If Auto DHW (S6) or Inlet is selected then the Inlet sensor is used if DHW (S6) is a
heat demand switch input.
• If Auto: DHW (S6) or Outlet is selected then the Outlet sensor is used if DHW (S6) is
a heat demand switch input.
Plate Heat Exchanger
Tap Demand
Plate heat exchanger demand for DHW comes from one of two
sources:
• Tap Demand - detected primarily as a temperature
decrease rate when hot water is “tapped”, e.g. when a tap is
turned on.
• Preheat demand - used to keep a plate exchanger
preheated so it is warm enough to be ready to provide hot
water, and also so that Tap demand can be detected (it has
to be warm if a temperature drop rate is to be detected).
For a plate-type heat exchanger, a set of parameters is used to
detect demand when the DHW system is tapped (as in turning
on a tap). This tapping is detected either as a drop in DHW
temperature that exceeds a certain rate, or as a temperature
threshold that is exceeded (on the low side) for a period of
time. When either of these events occurs, tap demand
becomes True. Once tap demand is True, it remains on for a
minimum time. At the end of this time tap demand will end
when one of two criteria occurs, based upon comparing the
Inlet temperature to the DHW and Outlet temperatures.
One of the selections for the DHW demand switch parameter is
“Plate Heat Exchanger”. This selection acts as an enable for
the Tap Demand and Preheat Demand subsystems. If this
choice is selected then the logic described in Fig. 15 and Table
14 is used to generate DHW demand; however if this is not
selected, then the logic is inactive and does not apply.
Because tap demand has two criteria for starting, and two
other criteria for stopping, it is modeled as a Set/Clr block
driven by two OR gates, which in turn are connected to the four
criteria sources. The tap demand is also modeled to have a
“force” input, which forces it to recognize a “Set” event: this is
used when Preheat has had control and is now relinquishing
this control to Tap demand.
The plate heat exchanger subsystem will operate as shown in
Fig. 15
66-1171—03
36
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
DHW MODULATION SENSOR
WHENEVER SET CHANGES FROM OFF TO ON,
TAP OUTPUT IS TRUE FOR AT LEAST THE
TAP
DHW
TAP DETECT MINIMUM ON TIME
TRUE WHILE DHW IS
DROPPING FASTER THAN
TIMER
TAP DETECT DEGREES PER SECOND
DHW
SELECT
TOD
SET
LOAD
TAP DEMAND ENDS WHEN:
•TIME IS EXPIRED, AND
•SET IS FALSE, AND
•CLR IS TRUE
IF FORCE IS ON, TREAT AS
IF SET HAD JUST CHANGED
FROM OFF TO ON.
SETPOINT
TOD SETPOINT
TRUE IF DHW <= SETPOINT-
IF BOTH SET AND
CLR ARE TRUE,
IGNORE CLR
FORCE TAP
CLR
TAP
TAP DETECT ON HYSTERESIS
PREHEAT
AND THIS PERSISTS FOR LONGER THAN:
TIMER
TAP DETECT RECOGNITION TIME
DHW
PLATE
DEMAND
PREHEAT
PREHEAT
IF TAP IS FALSE, ALLOW THE TIMER TO RUN.
IF PREHEAT IS FALSE, IT BECOMES TRUE WHEN:
•TAP IS FALSE
•THE PREHEAT DELAY-AFTER-TAP TIME HAS ELAPSED
• DHW <= PREHEAT (SETPOINT-ON HYSTERESIS)
•THE ABOVE HAVE PERSISTED FOR THE ON RECOGNITION TIME
TAP STOP INLET -DHW DEGREES
INLETTEMP
OUTLETTEMP
WHEN PREHEAT TURNS ON, ITS MINIMUM ON TIME IS STARTED
TRUE IF OUTLETTEMP-INLETTEMP<=
TAP STOP OUTLET -INLET DEGREES
INLET
TIMER
AND
AND
AND
TIMER
TIMER
IF PREHEAT IS TRUE, IT BECOMES FALSE WHEN:
OR
•TAP DURING PREHEAT IS RECOGNIZED (SEE BELOW)
•BOTH: • DHW <= PREHEAT (SETPOINT+OFF HYSTERESIS)
AND
• PREHEAT MINIMUM ON TIME HAS EXPIRED
FLAG
•TAP DURING PREHEAT IS RECOGNIZED AS:
• TAP HAS BEEN TRUE WHILE PREHEAT WAS TRUE AND
• EITHER • INLET TEMPERATURE DECREASES BELOW THE LEVEL
IT HAD WHEN PREHEAT STARTED
OR
• DHW >= INLET
TIMER
WHEN THESE HAVE OCCURRED, THEN A 1 MINUTE TIMER STARTS.
WHEN THIS TIME ELAPSES, THEN PREHEAT ENDS. THE FORCE OUTPUT IS PULSED
TO FORCE TAP DETECTION TO START (AND PREHEAT IS INHIBITED). THIS ALSO
OCCURS IMMEDIATELY IF THE 1 MINUTE TIMEOUT IS PENDING BUT PREHEAT
ENDS DUE TO ABOVE.
PLATE PREHEAT ON HYSTERESIS
DHW PLATE DEMAND
OTHERS CONTINUE TO
OPERATE.
WHENEVER PREHEAT IS FALSE:
IF TAP IS TRUE, INHIBIT THIS PREHEAT BLOCK, RESET THE
ITEMS, AND RESET THE PREHEAT DELAY-AFTER-TAP TIMER.
DHW
INLETTEMP
TRUE IF INLETTEMP-DHW =>-
OUTLET(S3S4)
IF DHW PLATE
DEMAND LOSES
CONTROL DUE TO
PRIORITY, RESET AND
RESTART THE
ITEMS.
PREHEAT IS ACTIVE
DHW FORCE TAP
INLET (S1)
PRIORITY
IS
DHW
PLATE PREHEAT SETPOINT
PLATE PREHEAT OFF HYSTERESIS
PLATE PREHEAT ON RECOGNITION TIME
PLATE PREHEAT DELAY AFTER TAP
PLATE PREHEAT MINIMUM ON TIME
M31116
Fig. 15. Plate heat exchanger subsystem.
Table 14. Plate Heat Exchanger Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
Tap detect degrees per second
Degrees or None
This tap demand “set” criteria depends on rate of change of the DHW sensor. The rate of
change of this temperature is monitored. If it falls at a rate faster than specified degrees per
second then the Tap demand block is “Set” (Tap demand becomes true and the minimum on
timer is started).
Tap detect on hysteresis
Degrees or None
The second tap demand “set” criteria depends on the value of the DHW sensor. If the
temperature is less than or equal to the threshold given by subtracting this parameter from
the normal DHW setpoint, and if this condition has persisted for the time specified by the Tap
detect recognition time parameter, the Tap demand block is “Set” (Tap demand becomes true
and the minimum on timer is started).
The timer that measures the Tap detect recognition time resets if the temperature rises above
the threshold and a new Tap detect event will not occur again until the threshold has again
been met or exceeded (on the low side) for the recognition time.
Tap detect on recognition time
hr:mm:ss or None
This provides the time for a Tap detect event due to the Tap detect on hysteresis, as
described just above.
Tap detect on threshold
-17 °C to 82 °C (-0 °F to 180 °F)
37
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 14. Plate Heat Exchanger Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
Comment
Tap detect minimum on time
hr:mm:ss or None
Once a tap detect event has occurred, and the Tap demand block is Set, it remains true for at
least the time provided by this parameter. If DHW loses control due to priority, the timer is
restarted, so that when Tap demand again gains control of the burner it remains in this
condition for the full minimum on time.
After the minimum on time has elapsed, tap demand may will end due to either of the “Clr”
criteria described below, for the Tap stop Inlet-DHW degrees parameter or the Tap stop
Outlet-Inlet degrees parameter. The “Clr” input to the tap demand block will be effective,
however, only if the minimum on time has elapsed AND the “Set” condition is false; otherwise
the Clr input may persist but it will be ignored until those two requirements are also met.
Tap stop Inlet-DHW degrees
Degrees or None
One criteria for asserting “Clr” is based on the difference between the DHW and the Inlet
temperature, calculated as: Inlet - DHW. When this value is positive and is greater than or
equal to the degrees given by this parameter, tap demand’s “Clr” input is asserted.
Tap stop Outlet-Inlet degrees
Degrees or None
The other criteria for asserting “Clr” is based on the difference between the Outlet and the
Inlet temperature, calculated as: Outlet - Inlet. When this value is negative or is less than or
equal to the degrees given by this parameter, tap demand’s “Clr” input is asserted.
Plate preheat off hysteresis
Degrees or None
The preheat off threshold is calculated as:
TOFF = Plate preheat setpoint + Plate preheat off hysteresis
If the preheat block is True, then it becomes False when:
• Tap during Preheat is recognized (see below) OR
• Both
• DHW sensor temperature >= TOFF, AND
• The preheat minimum on time has elapsed.
Preheat Demand
more complex because is has its own minimum on time and
because tap demand may occur while preheat is in-progress.
Therefore various rules specify when Preheat lets go and turns
control over to Tap Demand.
To ensure that the plate heat exchanger is ready, it maintains a
preheat temperature. This temperature is determined by a
setpoint, hysteresis on, and hysteresis off parameters. Thus at
its core it also is a Set/Clr block. Preheat is made somewhat
Table 15. Preheat Demand Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
Plate preheat delay after tap
mm:ss or None
Whenever the Preheat block is false, it monitors the Tap demand block's output and operates
a timer that ensures preheat will not begin too soon after a tap demand has recently ended.
Whenever the preheat block is false:
• If Tap demand is true:
Reset the timer that measures the preheat delay after tap to measure the time specified by
this parameter, but do not allow the timer to run.
• Else, when Tap demand is false:
Allow the timer to run.
In either case, if the preheat delay time has not elapsed then inhibit the Preheat demand
block so that it cannot become true.
Plate preheat setpoint
Temperature or None
This parameter provides the DHW setpoint used when firing for preheat. It also is used as the
basis for detecting the need to preheat.
Plate preheat on recognition time mm:ss or None
This parameter provides the time duration for recognizing that preheat demand exists.
66-1171—03
38
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 15. Preheat Demand Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
Comment
Plate preheat on hysteresis
Degrees or None
The preheat on threshold is calculated as:
TON = Plate preheat setpoint - Plate preheat on hysteresis
If the preheat block is False, then it is Set (becomes True) when:
1. Tap demand is false, AND
2. The preheat delay-after-tap time has elapsed, AND
3. DHW sensor temperature <= TON, AND
4. The above have remained true for the time specified by:
Plate preheat on recognition time
That is, whenever conditions 1, 2, or 3 are not true, a preheat recognition timer is reset.
Whenever they are all true then the timer is allowed to run. If the time elapses then the
preheat block becomes true (preheat is active, and this causes the plate demand to be true).
Whenever preheat first becomes active, the Inlet temperature is sampled and saved, a Tap
during Preheat flag is cleared, and a 1 minute timer is marked as inactive. (All of these are
used by the Tap during Preheat logic.)
Whenever preheat demand becomes true, a minimum on timer is started to measure the time
specified by the Plate preheat minimum on time parameter. Preheat demand will remain true
until this time elapses (except that it may convert to Tap demand under the conditions
described for “Tap during Preheat”). If preheat loses control of the burner due to priority, the
minimum on timer will be restarted so that it provides the full minimum on time, when priority
returns to preheat.
Plate preheat minimum on time
mm:ss or None
This parameter provides the minimum on time for preheating.
Plate preheat off hysteresis
Degrees or None
The preheat off threshold is calculated as:
TOFF = Plate preheat setpoint + Plate preheat off hysteresis
If the preheat block is True, then it becomes False when:
• Tap during Preheat is recognized (see below) OR
• Both
• DHW sensor temperature >= TOFF, AND
• The preheat minimum on time has elapsed.
Tap During Preheat
Table 16. Preheat Modulation Values.
Although preheat cannot become True while Tap demand is
true, it is possible that Tap demand may occur after Preheat
has started. If the conditions for Tap demand are met, that is, if
tap demand does become true during preheat, this is noted by
setting the Tap during Preheat flag (which was cleared initially
when preheat began).
Preheat Inactive
Setpoint
DHW setpoint
Preheat is active
Plate preheat setpoint
Hysteresis On DHW off hysteresis Plate preheat on
hysteresis
If this flag is set:
• If the Inlet temperature is less than the temperature it had
when preheat started, and the 1 minute timer is not already
running, then, a 1 minute timer is started.
• If any of these occur:
• The 1 minute timer is running, and it elapses, OR
Hysteresis Off DHW off hysteresis Plate preheat on
hysteresis
However, the preheat function does not modulate and does not
use the PID function. Whenever preheat is active, the
minimum modulation rate is used. (As usual, a modulation rate
of 0% may be used as an output because this value always will
be clipped to the minimum modulation rate by the rate limit
section.)
• The DHW temperature equals or exceeds the Inlet
temperature, OR
• Both:
DHW sensor temperature >= TOFF, AND
The preheat minimum on time has expired
When preheat ends the DHW PID integrator will be restarted
since it may have accumulated a value during the preheat time
which is not relevant because it was not in control. (This is
done in the same way as for the end of an override: preheat is
essentially a rate override.)
• Then:
• Tap demand is forced on, that is, a “Set” event is
generated for it, which starts its minimum on timer.
DHW Storage
• Preheat becomes false (inactive).
DHW Storage provides a source of demand for the DHW
system that will keep the DHW pump on and maintain the
water temperature for a programmable period of time after the
normal DHW demand has been satisfied. The DHW storage
feature has its own setpoint and hysteresis values, so they can
differ from the values used during normal DHW demand.
Preheat Modulation control
Preheat provides its own setpoint and hysteresis values.
These are used by the burner on/off hysteresis logic in place of
the normal DHW values, as shown in Table 16.
39
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
DHW STORAGE
DHW STORAGE ENABLE
DHW STORAGE
PRIORITY=DHW STORAGE
PUMP DEMAND
STORAGE ON HIST.
STORAGE OFF HIST.
DHW STORAGE
HYSTERESIS
BURNER DEMAND
SETPOINT DEMAND
TIME SINCE:
BURNER
STATE: ON/OFF
BURNER TURN-ON
BURNER TURN-OFF
DHW HIGH
LIMIT ACTIVE
(SUSPEND DHW DURING
DHW HIGH LIMIT CONDITION)
FROM
DHW
SENSOR
SELECT
SENSOR
SETPOINT
DHW PID
STORAGE SETPOINT
TERMINALS
INPUT
OUTPUT
DHW STORAGE
PARAMETER
TO/FROM
DHW
“PRATE” = 0 TO 99.99% OF CAPACITY
PASS-THROUGH IF PRIORITY=
DHW STORAGE
M31117
Fig. 16. DHW storage.
Table 17. DHW Storage Demand Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
DHW storage enable
Enable, Disable
This parameter enables or disables the DHW storage feature. If it is disabled then the other
parameters below are ignored.
DHW storage time
mm:ss
The time DHW storage temperature is maintained.
DHW storage setpoint
degrees or None
The temperature setpoint that the boiler maintains during the DHW storage time.
DHW storage on hysteresis
degrees or None
This provides the on hysteresis as an offset that is applied to the DHW storage setpoint, used
during DHW storage demand.
DHW storage off hysteresis
degrees or None
This provides the off hysteresis as an offset that is applied to the DHW storage setpoint, used
during DHW storage demand.
66-1171—03
40
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
DHW Storage Operation
storage time has expired then DHW storage demand ends and
does not recur until a normal DHW demand has recurred and
ends. The DHW setpoint and hysteresis are used in the same
way as existing setpoints and hysteresis values. This includes
use of the DHW hysteresis step time behavior, which modifies
the burner on/off thresholds over time.
When the DHW storage feature is enabled, whenever any
normal DHW call-for-heat is satisfied (i.e. pump demand turns
off) the DHW storage demand begins and persists for the time
given by the DHW storage time parameter. During this time the
DHW pump is turned on, and the burner fires as needed to
maintain the DHW storage setpoint. DHW storage demand is
lower in priority than:
• CH demand,
• DHW normal demand, and
• LL slave demand.
The gains used by DHW storage are the normal DHW PID
gains. This occurs because the DHW PID block is shared by
the two demand sources.
• The DHW storage feature, when active, uses the demand
source selected by the normal DHW demand source.
• The DHW storage feature, when active, provides setpoint
information to the normal DHW PID block, which is used to
provide the firing rate when DHW storage is active (i.e. it is
shared).
DHW Storage uses the same pump as DHW demand.
DHW storage demand is higher in priority than:
• CH frost protection demand, and
• DHW frost protection demand
If another DHW normal demand occurs during the DHW
storage time, the storage timer is reset and DHW storage
demand begins anew when the DHW normal demand is
satisfied. If a CH or LL demand occurs during the DHW storage
demand, these take control of the burner; however, the DHW
storage timer continues to run. When the higher priority
demand is satisfied, then if the DHW storage demand is still
active (the time has not yet elapsed) then the boiler again
serves the remainder of the DHW storage demand. When the
The DHW storage feature is shown in Fig. 16.
Frost Protection (Hydronic only)
Frost protection, like other sources, generates pump demand
and rate.
SLAVE STATUS
OUTDOOR SENSOR IS OK (OTHERWISE IGNORE IT)
MODULATION SENSOR IS OK (OTHERWISE IGNORE IT)
FROM DHW
FROST PROTECTION
BURNER DEMAND
INLET SENSOR IS OK (OTHERWISE IGNORE IT)
OVERRUN TIME
CH FROST PROTECTION
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE
CH FROST
PROTECTION
ENABLE
LOAD
CH FROST
PROTECTION
PUMP DEMAND
T
OUTDOOR
SET: < T°F
FROST PROTECTION PUMP
DEMAND ALWAYS TURNS
THE PUMP ON; THIS IS NEVER
BLOCKED BY OTHER FUNCTIONS.
CLR: > T+4°F
SET: < 45°F
SELECTED CH
MODULATION
SENSOR
CLR: > 50°F
SET: < 38°F
SET
CLR: > 50°F
CLEAR
D
(CLEAR > SET)
INLET (S1)
CH FROST
PROTECTION
BURNER DEMAND
ON: > 41°F
FROST PROTECTION BURNER
DEMAND IS LOW PRIORITY, BUT
IT WILL FIRE THE BURNER IF NO
OTHER SOURCE IS DOING THAT.
THE FROST PROTECTION FIRING
RATE IS ALWAYS THE MINIMUM
MODULATION RATE.
CH FROST
PROTECTION
FIRING RATE
M31159
Fig. 17. CH Frost protection.
The behavior of each parameter and feature is given below.
41
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 18. CH Frost Protection Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
CH Frost protection enable
Enable, Disable
When enabled, regardless of whether the boiler is firing or not or whether CH is in control or
not:
• The CH pump is turned on if the CH control temperature is below 45ºF, using the active
CH sensor: Header or Outlet
OR
• The CH pump is turned on if the outdoor sensor is valid and the temperature is below a
programmed frost protection level provided by the CH frost protection outdoor setpoint
parameter.
Once turned on, the CH pump remains on until:
1) the outdoor temperature is above the programmed frost protection level + 4ºF, and
2) the outlet temperature exceeds 50ºF. When both of these have occurred, then a CH frost
protection overrun timer is started. After the timer expires, the pump reverts to normal
operation.
This source of pump control has the highest priority and cannot be overridden by any
subsystem (e.g. anticondensation) that wants to turn off the CH pump.
Additionally, if the burner has no demand from any other source, then the frost protection
source generates a burner demand if the outlet temperature is below 38ºF and it requests a
minimum modulation firing rate.
It maintains this demand until some other source of demand takes over—frost protection is
the lowest priority burner demand source—or CH Frost protection burner demand ends.
CH Frost protection burner demand ends when both of these occur:
1) the outlet temperature exceeds 50ºF.
2) the inlet temperature is greater than 41ºF.
If the CH control sensor (Outlet or Header) is invalid (e.g. disconnected) then it is ignored by
CH frost protection.
If the Inlet sensor is invalid (e.g. disconnected) then frost protection ignores that sensor and
operates only on the CH control sensor.
If the Outdoor sensor is invalid it is ignored without issuing an alert.
CH Frost Protection outdoor
setpoint
Degrees or None
CH Pump is turned on when the temperature is below the programmed frost protection level.
CH frost overrun time
hr:mm:ss
This time indicates how long the CH pump demand should continue to run after CH frost
protection pump demand ends.
SLAVE STATUS
DHW FROST PROTECTION
FROM CH
FROST PROTECTION
BURNER DEMAND
OVERRUN TIME
DHW SENSOR IS OK
(OTHERWISE IGNORE IT)
DHW FROST
PROTECTION
ENABLE
LOAD
DHW FROST
PROTECTION
PUMP DEMAND
SET: < 45°F
SELECTED DHW
MODULATION
SENSOR
CLR: > 50°F
FROST PROTECTION PUMP
DEMAND ALWAYS TURNS
THE PUMP ON; THIS IS NEVER
BLOCKED BY OTHER FUNCTIONS.
DHW FROST
PROTECTION
BURNER DEMAND
SET: < 38°F
CLR : > 50°F
FROST PROTECTION BURNER
DEMAND IS LOW PRIORITY, BUT
IT WILL FIRE THE BURNER IF NO
OTHER SOURCE IS DOING THAT.
THE FROST PROTECTION FIRING
RATE IS ALWAYS THE MINIMUM
MODULATION RATE.
CH FROST
PROTECTION
FIRING RATE
M31189
Fig. 18. DHW frost protection.
66-1171—03
42
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 19. DHW Frost Protection Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
DHW frost protection enable
Enable, Disable
The DHW frost protection feature is enabled or disabled by this parameter. See Fig. 18.
DHW frost protection will use the DHW sensor, if the DHW demand source parameter selects
a switch instead of a sensor.
When enabled, regardless of whether the boiler is firing or not or whether DHW is in control
or not:
• The DHW pump is turned on if the DHW temperature is below 45ºF
• Once turned on, the DHW pump remains on until the DHW temperature exceeds 50ºF.
When this occurs then the DHW overrun timer is started. After the timer expires, the DHW
pump reverts to normal operation.
This source of pump control has the highest priority and cannot be overridden by any
subsystem (e.g. anticondensation) that wants to turn off the DHW pump.
Additionally, if the burner has no demand from any other source, then the frost protection
source generates a burner demand if the DHW temperature is below 38ºF and it requests a
minimum modulation firing rate. It maintains this demand until some other source of demand
takes over—frost protection is the lowest priority burner demand source—or DHW Frost
protection ends. DHW Frost protection ends when the DHW temperature exceeds 50ºF. If the
DHW sensor is invalid (e.g. disconnected) then it is ignored by DHW frost protection.
DHW frost overrun time
hr:mm:ss
This time indicates how long the DHW pump demand should continue to run after DHW frost
protection pump demand ends.
Frost protection method
Min modulation continuous, Mid modulation at 5 min/hour
Determines what happens when Frost Protection (from any source) becomes active.
• Min modulation continuous
Burner demand, if/when it occurs as part of frost protection, is continuous until the Frost
Protection condition no longer exists.
• Mid modulation at 5 min/hour
Burner demand occurs for 5 minutes when Frost Protection burner demand first becomes
active, then thereafter it remains off for 55 minutes, then of for 5, off for 55, etc.
43
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Rate Limits and Override
So the rate limit priority scheme uses the following steps,
where “active” means that the rate override is both enabled
and requesting its rate:
The Limit and Override subsystem consists of three separate
concepts:
1.
• Safety limit functions that cause a burner control to lockout
or recycle if safety-critical limits are reached.
• Rate limit functions that limit the range of modulation due to
special or abnormal operating conditions. It is common for a
rate limit to become effective whenever conditions approach
a safety limit, to try to prevent the consequence of reaching
the safety limit.
• Rate override functions set the firing rate to a specific value
without regard to firing rate due to modulation requests or
rate limits.
2.
3.
Rate Limit Priorities
There are two kinds of rate limit:
—
—
If Anticondensation is active and all rate reducers are
inactive, then Anticondensation determines the rate.
If Anticondensation is active and one or more rate reducers are also active, then the priority of Anticondensation
is compared to each active rate reducer. Of those active
rate reducers that have higher priority than Anticondensation, the lowest rate requested by any of these determines the rate. However, if Anticondensation has higher
priority than any active rate reducers, then Anticondensation determines the rate.
If Anticondensation is inactive, then the lowest rate
requested by any active rate reducer determines the firing rate.
When an “abnormal” rate limit occurs an alert is issued. The
rate limits that are abnormal are: Delta-T, Stack, Outlet, and
Anticondensation. The other two limits, Slow Start and Forced
Rate, are considered to be normal in that they always occur if
they are enabled.
Rate reducers, those that act to limit the maximum firing rate:
• Delta-T limit - Hydronic
• Stack limit
• Slow start
• Outlet limit - Hydronic
• Forced rate (Forced rate might actually specify any
rate, but for priority purposes it is considered to be a
reducer.)
Delta-T Limit (Rate Limit Only/Hydronic
only)
The Delta-T limit is designed to reduce the firing rate in case
the difference between the following is excessive:
• The Inlet and the Outlet temperature
• The Inlet and the exchanger temperature
• The exchanger and the Outlet temperature
Rate increasers, that act to increase the firing rate.
There is only one of these:
• Anticondensation - Hydronic
Anticondensation has a programmable priority vs. the other
rate limits (Hydronic only):
Each will operate identically and will use either similar
parameters or shared parameters. The left name is typically at
a lower temperature than the one on the right (except when the
temperature is inverted due to a reversed flow, or some other
abnormal condition).
Anticondensation versus Delta-T
Anticondensation versus Stack limit
Anticondensation versus Slow start
Anticondensation versus Forced Rate
Anticondensation versus Outlet limit
The “inlet temperature” is provided by S1 (J8 terminal 4), the
“exch” exchanger temperature is provided by S9 (J9 terminal
6), and the “outlet” temperature is S3S4 (J8 terminal 8, 9 and
10) dual sensor.
Table 20. Delta-T Limit Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
Delta-T inlet/outlet enable
Disable, Enable Delta-T, Enable Inversion Detection, Enable Delta-T and Inversion Detection.
Delta-T inlet/exch enable
Disable, Enable Delta-T, Enable Inversion Detection, Enable Delta-T and Inversion Detection.
Delta-T exch/outlet enable
Disable, Enable Delta-T, Enable Inversion Detection, Enable Delta-T and Inversion Detection.
If either of the heat exchanger delta-Ts is enabled, the Stack Connector Type must be either
“10K single non-safety NTC” or “12K single non-safety NTC.” If this condition is not met then
a lockout occurs because the exchanger input requires using the Stack sensor as two
separate sensors. Stack being S8 (J9 terminal 4) and heat exchanger being S9 (J9 terminal
6).
If this value is “disable” then all behavior associated with the Delta-T function is disabled.
If the Enable Delta-T, or Enable Delta-T and Inversion Detection options are chosen to enable
the Delta-T behavior, then the temperature gap between the temperature of “lo” and “hi” is
limited by the number of degrees given by the Delta-T degrees parameter.
If the Enable Inversion Detection or Enable Delta-T and Inversion Detection options are
chosen, the Inversion detection is active. This is implemented as a time limit on how long the
inverse of the normal temperature relationship will be tolerated.
Temperature inversion is the condition where the “lo” temperature is higher than the “hi”
temperature. If the inversion persists for longer that Delta-T inverse limit timer, then the
response given by Delta-T inverse limit response occurs.
Delta-T inlet/outlet degrees
Degrees, none
66-1171—03
44
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 20. Delta-T Limit Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
Comment
Delta-T inlet/exch degrees
Degrees, none
Delta-T exch/outlet degrees
Degrees, none
This is the temperature at which a Delta-T response occurs, measured as the signed value
(hi-lo) if the result is negative then it is treated as zero (inversion detection may be enabled to
handle this, but that is a different function which does not use this parameter).
All of the Delta-T functions will share the following parameters:
Delta-T response
Lockout, Recycle & Delay, Recycle & delay with retry limit
This specifies the type of response that occurs when the Delta-T degrees threshold is met.
The Recycle & delay with retry limit will limit the number of retries as specified by the Delta-T
retry limit.
Delta-T delay
mm:ss, none
Specifies the delay time that occurs whenever a recycle occurs due to a Delta-T or Delta-T
inverse event occurs and the specified response includes “Recycle...” The burner will remain
in the Standby Hold condition until the delay expires.
Delta-T retry limit
number of tries
If either the Delta-T response or the Delta-T inverse limit response specify a retry limit, then
any recycles due to reaching the corresponding response threshold are counted. If this count
ever exceeds the “n” value, then a lockout occurs.
A single counter is used for Delta-T and Inversion Detections, so it could be that different
causes occurred to make the counter exceed its final retry limit count of “n” Only the final
event that causes the count to exceed the retry limit is annunciated as the cause of the
lockout, although each of the reasons for recycling abnormally always generates an alert, as
usual, so the presence of other events will be visible in that log.
The retry counter is cleared when a normal recycle (burner turn-off) occurs due to satisfying
all of the demands.
A limit of zero is equivalent to selecting “lockout.”
Delta-T rate limit enable
Disable, Enable
Disable then no modulation limiting occurs as the delta-T threshold is approached.
Enable, then the Stepped Modulation Limiting feature is active for Delta-T.
Delta-T inverse limit time
mm:ss or None
This provides the time limit during which inverted temperature is tolerated when one of the
two inverse detection option is enabled.
Delta-T inverse limit response
Lockout, Recycle & Delay, Recycle & delay with retry limit
If temperature inversion detection is enabled and it persists for the time given by the Delta-T
inverse limit time, then the response described by this parameter occurs.
The delay time used is the time specified by the Delta-T delay and the retry limit is the count
specified by the Delta-T retry limit.
T-Rise
A limit may be imposed on the rate of temperature rise for
either the outlet or exchanger temperature, or both.
Table 21. T-Rise Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
Outlet T-Rise enable
Disable, Enable
This enables/disables temperature rise detection for the outlet sensor S3 (J8 terminal 8).
Exchanger T-Rise enable
Disable, Enable
This enables/disables temperature rise detection for the heat exchanger sensor S9 (J9
terminal 6).
If this selection is “Enable” then the Stack Connector Type must be either “10K single nonsafety NTC” or “12K single non-safety NTC.” If this condition is not met then a lockout occurs
because the exchanger input requires using the Stack sensor as two separate sensors. Stack
being S8 (J9 terminal 4) and heat exchanger being S9 (J9 terminal 6).
45
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 21. T-Rise Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
Comment
T-Rise degrees per second limit
Degrees or None
For any input that has T-rise detection enabled, this parameter provides the maximum rate of
temperature increase that will be allowed. If the temperature increases at a rate greater than
this, and this rate of increase persists for 4 seconds then the response specified by T-rise
response occurs.
T-Rise response
Lockout, recycle & delay, Recycle & delay with retry limit
Specifies response should “T-Rise degrees per second limit” is exceeded.
T-rise delay
mm:ss or None
Specifies the delay time that occurs whenever a recycle occurs due to a T-rise event and the
specified response includes “Recycle...” The burner will remain in the Standby Hold condition
until the delay expires.
T-rise retry limit
n
If the “T-rise response” specifies a retry limit, then any recycles due to reaching the
corresponding response threshold are counted. If this count ever exceeds the “n” value, then
a lockout occurs.
Heat Exchanger High Limit
A temperature limit may be imposed on the exchanger
temperature.
Table 22. Heat Exchanger High Limit Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
Heat exchanger high limit
Disable, Enable
This enables/disables temperature rise detection for the heat exchanger sensor S9 (J9
terminal 6).
If this selection is “Enable” then the Stack Connector Type must be either “10K single nonsafety NTC” or “12K single non-safety NTC.” If this condition is not met then a lockout occurs
because the exchanger input requires using the Stack sensor as two separate sensors. Stack
being S8 (J9 terminal 4) and heat exchanger being S9 (J9 terminal 6).
Heat exchanger high limit
setpoint
Temperature or none
Provides the setpoint at which a response occurs if “Heat exchanger high limit” function is
enabled.
Heat exchanger high limit
response
Lockout, recycle & delay, Recycle & delay with retry limit
Specifies response should “Heat exchanger high limit setpoint” threshold is reached.
Heat exchanger high limit delay
mm:ss or None
Specifies the delay time that occurs whenever a recycle occurs due to a Heat exchanger high
limit event and the specified response includes “Recycle...” The burner will remain in the
Standby Hold condition until the delay expires.
Heat exchanger retry limit
n
If the “Heat exchanger high limit response” specifies a retry limit, then any recycles due to
reaching the heat exchanger high limit threshold are counted. If this count ever exceeds the
“n” value, then a lockout occurs.
Heat exchanger T-rise enable
Enabled, Disabled
66-1171—03
46
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Stack limit (Safety limit and Rate limit)
Table 23. Limits and Rate Override: Stack Limit Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
Stack limit enable
Disable, Enable, Enable single-non-safety
This parameter enables or disables the entire stack temperature limit function.
Disable turns off the Limit function.
Enable turns on the Limit function and requires a 10k dual safety NTC sensor.
Enable single-non-safety allows for 10kohm or 12kohm NTC sensor to provide limit (nonsafety) function.
Stack limit setpoint
Degrees or None
If the stack temperature reaches or exceeds the safety limit temperature given by this
parameter then the response defined below will occur.
Stack limit response
Lockout, Recycle & delay
If the stack temperature exceeds the stack setpoint, then a response will occur. If the
selected response is a lockout, then the burner control locks out.
However, if the selected response is Recycle & Delay, the burner control recycles and holds
while waiting for a delay (see below) to expire, and after the delay it tries again (assuming
that demand is still present).
Stack limit delay
MM:SS
This parameter provides the delay time for the Stack limit.
STACK RATE LIMIT
If the stack limit is enabled, as the temperature approaches the
stack limit temperature, the Stepped Modulation rate limit
function (see “Stepped modulation rate limit” on page 47) is
active.
Outlet high limit (Safety limit and Rate Limit/Hydronic only)
Table 24. Limits and Rate Override: Outlet High Limit Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
Outlet high limit enable
Enable, Disable
Enable function requires the outlet high limit sensor to be a safety check dual redundant type.
Disable allows for single sensor input to allow steam to use outlet as non-safety.
Outlet high limit setpoint
degrees or None
If the outlet temperature reaches the value given by this parameter then a response will occur
Outlet high limit response
Lockout, Recycle & hold
This parameter selects the response. If lockout is selected, the burner control locks out. If
Recycle & hold is selected, the burner control recycles and waits for the outlet temperature to
fall. It will remain in this holding condition until the outlet temperature is lower than the outlet
high limit setpoint minus 5°F.
OUTLET HIGH LIMIT CH PUMP CONTROL (HYDRONIC
ONLY)
Whenever the outlet high limit has been reached the CH pump
will be turned on. It will remain on until the outlet temperature is
lower than the outlet high limit setpoint minus 5°F.
Stepped modulation rate limit
OUTLET RATE LIMIT (HYDRONIC ONLY)
Whenever the outlet sensor is not used as the modulation
sensor, the outlet rate limit function is active. (This will occur
when modulating via the DHW sensor, the Header sensor, or
as a LL slave.) In these cases, as the outlet temperature
approaches the outlet high limit setpoint, the Stepped
Modulation rate limit function (see “Stepped modulation rate
limit” on page 47) is active.
The limiting performs as follows:
The Delta-T, Stack, and Outlet limit functions all use the same
stepped modulation limiting, which reduces the maximum
allowed modulation rate in five steps as the monitored
temperature approaches the limit.
A range is determined by calculating:
range= Maximum modulation rate
- Minimum modulation rate
NOTE: The DHW maximum modulation rate is used when firing for DHW, and for other sources the CH maximum
modulation rate is used.
A step size is determined by dividing this range by 5:
stepsize=range/5
47
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Thus there are 5 steps in the modulation limiting:
step 0: unlimited (max is 100%)
step 1: max is 80% of range
step 2: max is 60% of range
step 3: max is 40% of range
step 4: max is 20% of range
step 5: limited to minimum modulation rate
STEPPED MODULATION RATE LIMITING
LIMITED MODULATION STEP
MAXIMUM
MODULATION 0
RATE (NO LIMIT)
If the monitored temperature is not within 12°F of the limit, then
no rate limiting occurs. The stepped rate limit behaves as
illustrated below:
Assuming that rate limiting has not been in effect, when the
monitored temperature crosses a threshold that is 10°F away
from the limit, then the maximum allowed firing rate is reduced
by one stepsize (to 80%) and thereafter it is reduced by one
stepsize every two °F until it is reduced to the minimum
modulation rate when the 2°F threshold is crossed. Assuming
that rate limiting has been in-effect then the thresholds for
returning to a less restrictive step are shifted by 2°F to provide
hysteresis. I.e. to go from step 4 to step 5 the threshold occurs
at 2°F, but to go the other way, from step 5 to step 4, the
threshold is 4°F.
1
2
3
4
5
MINIMUM
MODULATION
RATE
...>12
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
DEGREES F FROM THRESHOLD
AT THIS POINT A RESPONSE OCCURS DUE TO REACHING A
SAFETY LIMIT.
M28038
Fig. 19. Stepped modulation rate limiting.
66-1171—03
48
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Slow Start and Forced Rate limits (Hydronic Control)
The Forced Rate limit causes the burner to stay at a fixed firing rate immediately after lightoff, just after the end of the Run
Stabilization time (if any). This is optionally followed by a slow start function that limits the ramp-up speed of the firing rate when the
water is colder than a threshold, as shown in the following diagram.
IGNITION
PFEP/MFEP/DBI
RUN
RUN STAB.
FORCED RATE
SLOW START
MODULATION
CH ENABLE
DHW ENABLE
LIGHTOFF RATE
CH FORCED RATE
P
RAM
DHW FORCED RATE
CH TIME
DHW TIME
TIME
(0 = DISABLE)
(0 = DISABLE)
ENDS WHEN OUTLET
TEMP EXCEEDS
OPERATING
SETPOINT
MINUS DEGREES
TURN-OFF ADJUSTMENT
STARTS WHEN FREE
MODULATION BEGINS.
SETPOINT = OFF HYST.
SETPOINT
SLOW START DEGREES
SETPOINT - OFF HYST.
SETPOINT - SLOWSTART DEGREES
(THIS THRESHOLD ALSO COULD BE HIGHER
THAN THE BURNER-ON THRESHOLD, IF THE
SLOWSTART DEGREES VALUE WAS SMALLER
THAN THE ON HYSTERESIS VALUE.)
FORCED RATE AND SLOW START
NAME = A PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER
OUTLET
NAME = A PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER THAT IS NOT
PART OF FORCED RATE OR SLOW START
TEMPERATURE
M28039
Fig. 20. Slow Start and Forced Rate limits.
Table 25. Limits and Rate Override: Slow Start Limit Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
CH forced rate time
MM:SS
This parameter determines the duration of the forced rate period, when firing for CH or LL
demand. If it is set to zero then this forced rate period is disabled.
CH forced rate
RPM or %
This parameter provides the firing rate during the CH forced rate time. It is also the initial rate
for the CH slow start period (even if the forced rate time is zero).
DHW forced rate time
MM:SS
This parameter determines the duration of the forced rate period, when firing for DHW
demand. If it is set to zero then this forced rate period is disabled.
DHW forced rate
RPM or %
This parameter provides the firing rate during the DHW forced rate time. It is also the initial
rate for the DHW slow start period (even if the DHW forced rate time is zero).
49
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 25. Limits and Rate Override: Slow Start Limit Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
Comment
CH slow start enable
Enable, Disable
This parameter enables or disables the slow start limit function for CH and LL demand
sources. It uses the CH forced rate parameter as the starting point for the slow start. If the
forced rate parameter is invalid or zero and slow start is enabled, then the slow start function
does not occur and an alert is issued.
DHW slow start enable
Enable, Disable
This parameter enables or disables the slow start limit function for DHW demand source. It
uses the DHW forced rate parameter as the starting point for the slow start. If this forced rate
parameter is invalid or zero and slow start is enabled, then the slow start function does not
occur and an alert is issued.
Slow start setpoint
Degrees or None
If slow start limiting is enabled and the outlet temperature is less than the temperature
provided by subtracting this number of degrees from the setpoint, then slow start rate limiting
is effective. Whenever the outlet temperature is above this value, slow start limiting has no
effect.
Slow start ramp
RPM or % Per Minute
When slow start limiting is effective, the modulation rate will increase no more than the
amount per minute given by this parameter.
Although provided as a per-minute value, the R7910A will calculate and apply this as a
stepped function using a step duration of 10 seconds.
DHW High Limit (Hydronic Control)
If DHW high limit enable is enabled then whenever the DHW high limit has been reached the DHW pump will be forced off. It will
remain off until the DHW input temperature is lower than the DHW high limit temperature minus 5°F. The DHW high limit pump
inhibit function is not a safety function.
Table 26. Limits and Rate Override: Outlet High Limit.
Parameter
Comment
DHW high limit enable
Enable, Disable
This parameter enables or disables the DHW high limit function. It must be disabled when the
DHW input is used as a switch to indicate DHW demand.
If set to “Enable,” the DHW connector type must be 10K dual safety NTC.
DHW high limit setpoint
Degrees or None
If DHW high limit enable is enabled and the DHW temperature reaches the value given by
this parameter, then a response will occur.
DHW high limit response
Lockout, Recycle & Hold
This parameter selects the response.
If lockout is selected then the burner control locks out.
If Recycle & Hold is selected then the burner control recycles and holds until the DHW
temperature falls below the DHW high limit temperature minus 5°F.
66-1171—03
50
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Anticondensation (Hydronic Control)
The pump corresponding to that source will usually be on;
however, to warm the heat exchanger more quickly, that pump
may be forced off when anticondensation is active.
The anticondensation function reduces condensation effects
when the temperature is below a threshold by increasing the
firing rate and optionally shutting off the pump.
The anticondensation parameters are as follows:
Anticondensation operates only when the burner is firing, and
is active only if enabled for the demand source (i.e. CH, DHW)
currently controlling the burner.
Table 27. Anticondensation Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
CH anticondensation enable
Enable, Disable
This parameter enables or disables anticondensation for CH and LL demand.
CH anticondensation setpoint
Degrees or None
If CH demand anticondensation is enabled, and if CH demand or LL slave demand is in
control of the burner, and the burner is firing, and if the temperature of the outlet sensor is
below the temperature given by this parameter:
then the anticondensation subsystem requests the burner’s firing rate to be set to the rate
given by the CH maximum modulation rate. Whether this succeeds or not depends on the
priority of anticondensation compared to other rate-reducing limits (as described at the
beginning of “Rate Limits and Override” on page 44).
When the CH source sensor temperature reaches or exceeds the temperature given by this
parameter plus a fixed hysteresis value or 4°F then this rate limit ends.
DHW anticondensation enable
Enable, Disable
This parameter enables or disables anticondensation for the outlet sensor when the DHW
loop is in control.
DHW anticondensation setpoint
Degrees or None
If DHW demand anticondensation is enabled, and if DHW demand is in control of the burner,
and the burner is firing, and if the temperature of the outlet sensor is below the temperature
given by this parameter:
• Then the anticondensation subsystem requests the burner’s firing rate to be set to the rate
given by DHW maximum modulation rate. Whether this succeeds or not depends on the
priority of anticondensation compared to other rate-reducing limits (as described at the
beginning of “Rate Limits and Override” on page 44).
• When the outlet sensor temperature reaches or exceeds the temperature given by this
parameter plus a fixed hysteresis value or 4°F then this rate limit ends.
Frost protection anticondensation Enabled, Disabled
enable
When Frost Protection is in control, either the CH or DWH anticondensation function is
enabled.
Anticondensation Priority
Anticondensation is more important than (check those that apply):
Stack limit
Delta T limit
Slow start
Forced rate
Outlet high limit
Modulation Output
When the installer selects a fan speed system, rate parameters
will be specified in RPM without regard to the burner capacity
represented by a particular RPM. When one of the analog
outputs is chosen, rate parameters will be specified as
percentages, and in this case, the installer typically is thinking
of this as a percent of burner capacity.
The modulation output subsystem uses as its input either the
modulation rate provided by the Internal Demand/Rate
Selector, which possibly is limited by a Rate Limit function, or it
uses a fixed modulation rate indicated by the burner control,
such as during prepurge or lightoff, or it uses a manual rate.
Common Modulation Parameters
Fig. 5 in “Demand and Rate” on page 23 shows these sources.
The modulation output subsystem sends a rate to one of three
outputs: a fan speed control that uses a PWM output and
tachometer feedback, a 4-20 mA analog signal, or a 0-10 V
analog signal.
These parameters are needed whenever any type of
modulation is used.
51
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 28. Modulation Output Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
Modulation output
Fan Speed, 4-20mA, 0-10V
This parameter selects the type of modulation output. The R7910A software responds by
driving the appropriate circuit to provide modulation of firing rate.
This parameter also affects the interpretation or the type of all parameters which specify
rates. These may be provided either as motor RPM or as percentage values, depending on
the type of modulation output selected.
A programmed value is valid only as a fan speed, or as a percent, but not both. Thus if a
system is set up using fan speed values, and then the modulation output parameter is
changed to select one of the analog outputs, then all of the fan speeds become “Invalid”.
Similarly, parameters that were set up as percentages are invalid when interpreted as fan
speeds.
Standby rate
RPM or %
This parameter specifies the analog output or fan speed used during Standby. If the control is
receiving commands via the LL slave module to operate at a given rate, that parameter has
higher priority and this parameter is ignored.
For a PWM fan system: This rate command will not run the motor.
For an analog rate output system:
• the output rate is 4mA or 0V
Else when Standby rate is non-zero then:
• the output rate is determined by the analog output mapping and the mA or V rate analog is
applied to the motor.
Prepurge rate
RPM or %
This parameter specifies the analog output or fan speed used during prepurge.
Lightoff rate
RPM or %
This parameter specifies the analog output or fan speed used during ignition.
Firing rate control
Auto, Manual in Run, Manual in Run and Standby
If this parameter is set to either of the manual options, then the burner’s firing rate during
modulation in the Run state is the rate given by the Manual firing rate parameter. If the
Manual in Run and Standby option is chosen, the firing rate output is also controlled by the
manual firing rate parameter during the Standby condition; however this applies only to the
normal, idle Standby condition and not to a Standby Hold condition, wherein the burner is
preparing to fire but cannot leave standby because of something abnormal. In the latter case
the rate is driven by the burner control sequencer. A manual rate does not generate
demand—to fire at this rate demand must be present from another source. When set to
“Auto” the manual firing rate parameter is ignored.
Manual firing rate
RPM or %
This parameter specifies the analog output or fan speed during burner modulation or standby,
when firing rate control specifies manual mode.
CH Maximum modulation rate
DHW Maximum modulation rate
Minimum modulation rate
RPM or %
These parameters provide the limits of analog output or fan speed during modulation. The
minimum modulation rate is the same for both CH and DHW.
Postpurge rate
RPM or %
This parameter specifies the analog output or fan speed used during postpurge.
Fan Speed Modulation Parameters
These parameters are used only when fan speed is selected
as the modulation output.
Table 29. Fan Speed Modulation Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
Absolute maximum fan speed
RPM
The fan will never operate above the RPM provided by this parameter, regardless of the rate
request. The maximum speed is 12000 RPM.
Absolute minimum fan speed
RPM
The fan will never operate below the RPM provided by this parameter, regardless of the rate
request, except by commanding it to turn off. The minimum speed is 500 RPM.
66-1171—03
52
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 29. Fan Speed Modulation Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
Comment
PWM frequency
1000Hz, 2000Hz, 3000Hz, 4000Hz,
This parameter provides the frequency used by the PWM output to control the fan.
Pulses per revolution
0-10
Typically is the number of sensors that the fan contains.
Fan gain up
0-100
This is the gain for speeding up the fan.
Fan gain down
0-100
This is the gain for slowing down the fan.
Speed up ramp
RPM per second
Whenever the burner is firing, the fan will be commanded to increase its RPM no faster than
the rate provided by this parameter.
Slow down ramp
RPM per second
Whenever the burner is firing, the fan will be commanded to decrease its RPM no faster than
the rate provided by this parameter.
Fan min duty cycle
duty%
The fan modulation output will never send a duty cycle lower than this threshold, except for a
0% duty cycle to turn the fan off.
This can be used to limit the minimum PWM to a level that prevents stalling of the fan.
Analog Modulation Parameters
These parameters are used only when 4-20mA or 0-10V is selected for modulation output.
Table 30. Fan Speed Modulation Parameters.
Parameter
Analog output hysteresis
Comment
n
This parameter adjusts the amount of hysteresis applied to the PID output when a non-PWM
modulation is selected. The “n” value determines how much the PID is required to change in
a new direction before the output will change.
This is somewhat experimental, although simulation shows this technique provides better
response and also better control of motor reversals than a deadband.
A typical range is 0 (disabled) to 10, although higher values are allowed. The amount of PID
change required to change direction is computed as:
n/10 * Pgain * P scaler
Background: The granularity of temperature measurement in the R7910 is 0.1C, which is
represented internally as an integer (e.g. C * 10). Thus if the temperature changes by the
smallest measurable amount (e.g. 1 count), the P term of the PID output will contribute a
change of 1*Pgain * P scaler, to the total PID output. The parameter thus allows some
fraction of this change to be the threshold for changing direction, e.g. “n” = 5 means0.5 or half
of this amount of change would be needed to change direction. If the Igain is zero then using
any value of “n” less than 10 makes no difference; however when Igain is non-zero it also
contributes to the PID output, so smaller amounts of hysteresis make sense. Experimentally,
values of between 5 to 10 seem to work well.
53
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
PUMP CONTROL
The pump names are:
• Boiler
• CH
• DHW
• Aux1
• Aux2
• System
There are six identical pump control blocks. Each has a
different name but are entirely equal in features and
capabilities. For example, if the block named CH Pump were
configured to control the DHW pump and vice versa, and the
pumps were hooked up that way, both pumps would work
normally. Each can be configured for any purpose without
regard to the pump name. See Fig. 21.
Pump control blocks can operate for a Local SOLA, a SOLA LL
Master, or both. Some pump demands are always from the
local SOLA, some from the LL SOLA Master and some may
come from either source.
The pump overrun timers for frost protection are part of the
frost protection block, instead of the pump control block.
THERE ARE 6 PUMP CONTROL BLOCKS THAT ARE FUNCTIONALLY IDENTICAL EACH HAS
7 PARAMETERS THAT WORK THE SAME WAY IN EACH BLOCK. SEE PumpControlBlock.evx
DRAWING FOR DETAILS.
CH PUMP
CH PUMP OPTIONS 2
CH PUMP START DELAY
CH PUMP CYCLE COUNT
CH PUMP OVERUN TIME
CH PUMP CONTROL ON, AUTO
PUMP B
PUMP C
DHW PUMP OUTPUT CONNECTION, A, B, C
DHW PUMP CYCLE COUNT
DHW PUMP OVERUN TIME
DHW PUMP CONTROL ON, AUTO
RESET
BOILER PUMP OUTPUT CONNECTION, A, B, C
BOILER PUMP OPTIONS 1
BOILER PUMP OPTIONS 2
BOILER PUMP START DELAY
BOILER PUMP CYCLE COUNT
BOILER PUMP OVERUN TIME
BOILER PUMP CONTROL ON, AUTO
SYSTEM PUMP
COUNT
IDLE DAYS
CYCLE
COUNT
COUNTER COUNTER
IDLE DAYS
CYCLE
RESET
COUNT
COUNTER COUNTER
IDLE DAYS
CYCLE
COUNTER COUNTER
RESET
PUMP C
DHW PUMP OPTIONS 2
DHW PUMP START DELAY
PUMP B
DHW PUMP OPTIONS 1
BOILER PUMP
PUMP A
PUMP A
SEE PumpControlBlock.cvx FOR DETAILS ABOUT EACH PUMP CONRTOL BLOCK
CH PUMP OPTIONS 1
DHW PUMP
PUMP CONTROL AND OPTIONS
CH PUMP OUTPUT CONNECTION, A, B, C
PUMP EXERCISE
SYSTEM PUMP OUTPUT CONNECTION, A, B, C
IF A PUMP IS IN USE, I.E., IF IT
IS CONNECTED TO ANY
FUNCTION, AND IF IT HAS NOT
BEEN RUN FOR D DAYS, THEN
TURN IT ON FOR M MINUTES.
PARAMETERS
(COMMON TO ALL 4):
SYSTEM PUMP OPTIONS 1
SYSTEM PUMP OPTIONS 2
SYSTEM PUMP START DELAY
SYSTEM PUMP CYCLE COUNT
SYSTEM PUMP OVERUN TIME
SYSTEM PUMP CONTROL ON, AUTO
PUMP EXERCISE INTERVAL (DAYS)
AUX1 PUMP OUTPUT CONNECTION, A, B, C
PUMP EXERCISE TIME (MINUTES)
(EITHER OF THESE AS 0 DISABLES)
AUX1 PUMP
AUX1 PUMP OPTIONS 1
AUX1 PUMP OPTIONS 2
AUX1 PUMP START DELAY
AUX1 PUMP CYCLE COUNT
AUX1 PUMP OVERUN TIME
AUX1 PUMP CONTROL ON, AUTO
AUX2 PUMP
AUX2 PUMP OUTPUT CONNECTION, A, B, C
AUX2 PUMP OPTIONS 1
AUX2 PUMP OPTIONS 2
AUX2 PUMP START DELAY
AUX2 PUMP CYCLE COUNT
AUX2 PUMP OVERUN TIME
AUX2 PUMP CONTROL ON, AUTO
EXERCISE COMMANDS TO THE CONNECTED
FUNCTION(S). CYCLE COUNTS ARE VISIBLE
AS FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS AND IDLE
DAYS COUNTS ARE VISIBLE AS
FUNCTION STATUS.
A FUNCTION (ON THE LEFT) MAY
EITHER BE CONNECTED TO ONE
PUMP OR NOT CONNECTED AT ALL.
IF NOT CONNECTED, IT HAS
NO EFFECT.
IF MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS ARE
CONNECTED TO THE SAME PUMP,
THEN IF EITHER FUNCTION WANTS
THE PUMP TO BE ON, IT WILL BE ON.
(I.E. A LOGICAL OR).
OUTPUT
PARAMETER
M31183
Fig. 21. Pump control blocks.
Pump Control Block Parameters
• Frost pump demand: These bits enable or disable frost
protection pump behavior, and these also flow to the “On
connection and thus may be inhibited by Force Off.
Each pump control block implements the parameters
described in Table 31, where “XX” is a placeholder for any of
the six pump names (CH, DHW, Boiler, System, Aux1, or
Aux2).
• Force Off conditions: These bits enable or disable
reasons why the pump may be forced off. The force Off
conditions flow to the “Force Off” connection to the pump
output block, and this signal inhibits the normal pump
demand and frost pump demand, but not the Force On
conditions.
• Normal pump demand: These bits are in the lower left of
Fig. 22, and each of them enable or disable pump demand
that flows through the start delay and overrun time, to the
“On” connection of the physical device as shown in Fig. 22.
This form of pump demand may be inhibited by Force Off.
66-1171—03
54
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
• Force On conditions: These bits enable or disable
reasons why the pump may be forced on. A force on
condition flows to the “Force On” connection to the pump
output block, and is not inhibited by Force Off.
Fig. 22 shows how a pump control block works when
connected to a pump output. The Pump On Options determine
the sources that normally turn the pump on. These may be
modified by an optional Start Delay and an optional Overrun
Time. However, this normal pump on demand may be inhibited
by the Force Off options. No matter what the normal Pump On
Demand, or the Force Off conditions are requesting, there are
Force On options that always turn the pump on.
• General controls: Two of the bits enable or disable general
behavior that is not connected to the pump output block.
PUMP CONTROL BLOCK
PUMP A, B, OR C
6 IDENTICAL BLOCKS: CH, DHW, BOILER, SYSTEM, AUX1 & AUX2
NOTE: THE PUMP CONTROL: AUTO, ON
PARAMETER IS ALSO A FORCE ON WHEN SET
TO “ON”
USE THIS PUMP FOR LEAD-LAG MASTER DEMANDS
CONNECTION
USE THIS PUMP FOR STAND-ALONE DEMANDS
A B C
(BOTH MAY BE CHECKED)
PUMP
DEMAND
OPTIONS
FORCE ON
IF TRUE, THE PUMP WILL BE ON
FORCE ON
OPTIONS
FORCE OFF
OPTIONS
FORCE OFF
EXERCISE RUNS THE PUMP IF
IT HAS BEEN IDLE TOO LONG AS
DEFINED BY PARAMETERS
COMMON TO ALL PUMPS.
EXERCISE WILL NOT RUN IF IT
IS FORCED OFF.
ON
OFF
INHIBITS
PUMP
DEMAND
START DELAY
DMD
OVERRUN
TIMER
MM:SS
IDLE DAYS
MM:SS
EXPIRED
START DELAY TIME 0=DISABLE
TIMER STARTS WHEN THE INPUT
TURNS ON TO KEEP THE PUMP OFF
FOR AWHILE AT FIRST (BUT ONLY IF
BURNER IS JUST STARTING UP)
IF TWO (OR MORE) PUMP CONTROL BLOCKS ARE
CONNECTED TO THE SAME PUMP OUTPUT,
THEN THEIR THREE OUTPUT SIGNALS
ON, OFF AND DMD ARE OR’D TOGETHER.
THIS PROVIDES THE FOLLOWING BEHAVIOR:
IF EITHER IS FORCE ON, THE PUMP IS ON
EITHER CAN INHABIT NORMAL PUMP
DEMAND WITH A FORCE OFF
NORMAL PUMP DEMAND CAN COME FROM
EITHER BLOCK
CYCLE
COUNTER
EXERCISE
TIMER
OVERRUN TIME 0=DISABLE
TIMER STARTS WHEN THE INPUT TURNS OFF
TO KEEP THE PUMP OFF FOR AWHILE AT FIRST
(BUT ONLY IF NO OTHER SOURCE
CALLS FOR HEAT)
B
ON
PUMP B
OFF
ON
DMD
OFF
B
ON
DMD
OFF
DMD
CYCLE COUNT
EDITABLE IN THE FIELD
IN CASE A PUMP IS REPLACED
CYCLE COUNT AND IDLE DAYS BOTH
APPEAR TO BE ATTRIBUTES OF THE
PUMP CONTROL BLOCK THAT IS THE PUMP
OUTPUT CONNECTED TO, BUT EACH IS
ACTUALLY PART OF THE PUMP A, B, OR C
OUTPUT. FOR EXAMPLE, IF TWO PUMP
CONTROL BLOCKS ARE CONNECTED TO THE
SAME PUMP, THEIR CYCLE COUNTS AND
IDLE DAYS VALUES WILL BE THE SAME
IN THE TWO PUMP CONTROL BLOCKS.
M31185
Fig. 22. Pump control block.
Table 31. Pump Control Block Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
XX pump output
None, Pump A, Pump B, Pump C
This allows the XX pump function to be disconnected or to be attached to any of the pump
outputs.
If two pump blocks are connected to the same pump output then their signals are effectively
OR'd together as shown in Fig. 22.
XX pump control
On, Auto
The XX pump can be turned on manually, or it can be set to operate automatically. If it is
turned on then it remains on until changed back to Auto.
55
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 31. Pump Control Block Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
Comment
XX pump start delay
mm:ss
When the pump demand changes from off to on, this delay time is used to delay the start of
the pump. The pump then starts after the delay expires, assuming that the demand is still
present.
A delay time of zero disables the delay.
For a stand-alone (non-slave) SOLA, this delay is skipped and does not occur if it is already
firing when the pump demand off-to-on event occurs.
For a SOLA in slave mode, this delay is skipped and does not occur if the “Master Service
Status” (defined in the LL specification and noted in the drawing) informs the slave SOLA that
some slave burner in the system is already firing, when the pump demand off-to-on event
occurs.
XX pump overrun time
mm:ss
This time indicates how long the pump should remain on after pump demand ends.
A time of zero disables the overrun.
However, a pump should overrun to use up the last of the heat only if it is the last pump
running.
Therefore: For a stand-alone SOLA if any local service is active then this status cancels any
overrun that is in-progress.
For a slave SOLA if any master service is active at this time this status cancels any overrun
that is in-progress.
XX pump cycles
0–999,999
The XX pump cycle counters are mapped to the physical cycle counters; there is one counter
for each of the three physical pump outputs and this counter is visible via this parameter, for
whichever pump block (or blocks) are connected to it via the block's XX pump output
parameter. It is possible for two (or more) pump functions to be assigned to the same
physical pump. In this case, that physical pump's cycle counter is visible in each pump
control block. A pump cycle counter has the range 0 through 999,999 and it can be restarted
if a pump is replaced.
Pump Exercising
For pumps that are attached, whenever the pump is off, a timer
will measure the pump-off time. When the day counter reaches
the value provided by the Pump Exercise Interval (Days)
parameter, then the pump will be turned on for the time given
by the Pump Exercise Time parameter.
Each of the pumps (A, B, and C) will have an exercise timer
that helps to ensure that pumps do not “freeze up” due to long
periods of no use. However, this is active only if the pump is
attached to some function: a pump output that is not attached
is not exercised.
Whenever the pump is on, for any reason, the counter is set to
zero to begin a new measurement.
Table 32. Pump Exercising Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
Pump Exercise Interval (Days)
0, or N
If set to zero, the exercise function is disabled. Otherwise this parameter provides the interval
time between exercising the pumps. It is common to all three pump outputs (A, B, and C).
Pump Exercise Time
MM:SS
If the time is zero then the exercise function is disabled. Otherwise this parameter provides
the time that a pump should be on when it is exercised. It is common to all three pump
outputs (A, B, and C).
Frost Protection Requests
The frost protection requests are set or cleared to match the
status generated by the frost protection detection functions for
each SOLA.
protection is controlling the SOLA per the priority scheme
(which occurs only if frost protection is enabled), and 2) burner
demand is true and the burner is currently firing or preparing to
fire to serve that demand. Otherwise it will be clear.
Firing For Local Frost Protection
Pump X, Y, and Z
The pumps of the Slave can be used by the Master control.
The pump X, Y, and Z utilize the pump connections A, B, C of a
specified slave.
This tells the LL master that although the burner is firing
independently, it is doing so for frost protection and thus is still
available as a lead/lag slave. This will be when 1) frost
66-1171—03
56
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
The Burner Control Uses:
monitoring temperature. If burner demand exists, then the
burner control will attempt to light the burner and if this
succeeds, release control to the modulation source. However if
a hold condition exists, then the burner control will remain in
the hold condition until that condition reverts to normal. The
equipment setup will define the response to demand signals.
Inputs
All digital inputs are conditioned to eliminate response to
spurious noise and transient events while preserving the
required response.
Outputs
FLAME
The flame signal includes signal conditioning, flame-on timing,
and flame-off (FFRT) timing. The control responds to loss of
flame and the abnormal presence of flame as defined by the
equipment setup.
MODULATION OVERRIDE
The burner control will control the modulation output when the
burner is off and during burner startup and shutdown by driving
the modulation rate directly, overriding the normal source for
modulation control, according to this table:
LOAD (OR LIMIT) CONTROL INPUT (LCI) (J6 TERMINAL 3)
The LCI typically includes all of the limits that cause a burner to
hold or recycle. For burner control sequences that use it, a
burner will not fire if the LCI input is off. If the LCI turns off
during a burner run cycle, the system will return to standby.
During
INTERLOCK (ILK) (J5 TERMINAL 1)
The ILK input typically includes all of the limits that cause a
burner to lock out if it turns off during a run cycle, must turn on
within some seconds after demand is present during purge. An
example is an airflow switch. The equipment setup will define
the response to this signal.
INTERRUPTED AIR SWITCH (IAS) (J6 TERMINAL 2)
The IAS input can be used to connect an airflow switch that
normally opens during the Run state at low modulation rates,
and thus cannot be in the interlock circuit. The equipment
setup will define the response to this signal.
The firing rate will be set to
Standby
Lightoff rate
Prepurge
Prepurge rate
Ignition (PFEP, MFEP,
DSI)
Lightoff rate
Run stabilization
Lightoff rate
Postpurge
Postpurge rate
Lockout
Lightoff rate
BLOWER MOTOR (J5 TERMINAL 6,7)
The blower output will be operated to control a blower motor:
the terminal will be energized at the start of prepurge and
remain on through the end of postpurge, to establish airflow for
those systems that require this function.
PRE-IGNITION INTERLOCK (PII) (J6 TERMINAL 5)
The Pre-ignition interlock typically includes a proof of closure
switch from the main valve. If it is on, then the valve is closed.
The equipment setup will define the response to this signal.
However, when the Hot Surface Ignitor function is enabled, the
terminal will be operated as an Ignition Output.
EXTERNAL IGNITION TRANSFORMER (J5 TERMINAL 4)
PILOT VALVE (J5 TERMINAL 2) /MAIN VALVE (J5
TERMINAL 3) AND INTERNAL SAFETY RELAY (EXT. IGN/
PV / MV/ SR)
The burner control operates these relays and monitors their
feedback to ensure that they are in the correct state. These
relays provide the electrical power to energize the External
Ignition Transformer, Pilot Valve and Main Valve terminals. If
an output is not in its proper state, the system will respond with
a lockout or recycle.
HIGH FIRE PROVING SWITCH (HFS) (J7 TERMINAL 2)
(DEVICE SPECIFIC)
A control may use an HFS, such as during Prepurge to prove
that a damper is in the proper position or that airflow is
sufficient. The equipment setup will define the response to the
HFS signal.
LOW FIRE PROVING SWITCH (LFS) (J7 TERMINAL 1)
(DEVICE SPECIFIC)
A control may use an LFS, such as during ignition to prove that
a damper is in the proper position. The equipment setup will
define the response to the LFS signal.
FLAME VOLTAGE (TEST JACKS)
This voltage will represent the flame strength using a 0 to 15V
range, where 0.8 volts indicates the presence of flame.
STAT (J8 TERMINAL 3), REMOTE STAT, AND LCI AS
DEMAND INPUTS (J6 TERMINAL 3)
The presence of demand may be configured to be:
Burner Control Safety Parameters
(Established by the OEM)
• the on condition of the Stat input
• a message from a Remote Stat
• the on condition of the LCI input
• or may be driven by the sensor status alone
The presence of demand causes pump turn-on as a primary
effect, and will cause the burner control to fire only if a setpoint
demand signal is also received from the subsystem, which is
The following parameters may be modified only by using the
process for safety data described in “Commissioning” on
page 19.
The parameters occur here in their order of use in a typical
burner sequence.
57
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 33. Burner Control Safety Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
NTC sensor type
10K dual safety, 12K single non-safety, 10K single non-safety
This parameter determines whether 10K or 12K sensors are used for the Inlet, Outlet, DHW
header, Stack, and Outdoor analog sensor inputs. R7911 Steam Control has Stack sensor
option only.
This parameter also determines whether dual sensors are used with a cross-check for the
Outlet, Stack, and DHW sensors. If “10K dual safety” is chosen, these three sensors are each
dual 10K sensors, and if they do not track within 6°F then recycle and hold occurs, until the
sensors are tracking again.
LCI enable
Enable, Disable
If the LCI input is enabled, then the control will check the LCI as a recycle limit. It must be on
before the burner control will exit the Standby condition and LCI will cause a recycle if it turns
off at other times. If this input is off and demand is present, the burner control will indicate that
it is waiting for LCI so the Annunciator can provide a corresponding value in the Annunciator
Hold parameter, for use by a display.
PII enable
Enable, Disable
If the PII input is enabled, then the control will check the PII as a preignition interlock limit. (As
defined by the equipment setup, it typically must be on before the burner control will exit the
Standby condition.) If this input is off and the burner control is in a hold condition waiting for it
to turn on, then the burner control will indicate that it is waiting for PII so that the Annunciator
can provide a corresponding value in the Annunciator Hold parameter, for use by a display.
Interlock start check
Enable, Disable
If the Interlock start check is enabled and the fan is off (in some cases it can be on during
Standby), then the control will check the ILK input as it exits the Standby condition, in
response to demand. If this input is on then the burner control will hold for 120 seconds
waiting for it to turn off. If this hold time expires and the ILK is still on, then a lockout occurs.
IAS start check enable
Enable, Disable
If the Interrupted Air Switch Enable parameter is set to “Disable” then this parameter is
ignored. Otherwise, if the IAS start check is enabled and the fan is off (in some cases it can
be on during Standby), then the control will check the IAS input as it exits the Standby
condition, in response to demand. If this input is on then the burner control will hold for 120
seconds waiting for it to turn off. If this hold time expires and the IAS is still on, then a lockout
occurs.
ILK/IAS open response
Lockout, Recycle
During prepurge after a delay to establish airflow, and during Ignition, MFEP, and Run, the
burner control requires the ILK to remain on. If it opens during Ignition, MFEP, or Run then
this parameter determines the response: either a lockout or a recycle back to the Safe Start
check.
If recycle is selected and ILK is open during prepurge: the purge timer is set to zero and the
prepurge state holds at time zero, waiting for the ILK to reclose which will resume purge
timing. If this hold persists for 30 seconds then the control will go to a Standby Delay
condition for 5 minutes, then try again.
If the burner control is in a hold condition (but not a Standby Delay) waiting for ILK to turn on,
then the burner control will indicate that it is waiting for ILK so that the Annunciator can
provide a corresponding value in the Annunciator Hold parameter, for use by a display.
ILK bounce detection enable
Enable, Disable
Interrupted air switch (IAS)
enable
Disable, Purge Only, Purge & Ignition
This parameter determines when the IAS input is tested. If set to “Disable” then the IAS input
is ignored by the burner control, and may be used as an Annunciator input. If set to “Purge
Only” then IAS is monitored in the same way as the ILK input, with the same responses,
during the Prepurge state. If set to “Purge & Ignition” then IAS is monitored in the same way
as the ILK input, with the same responses, during the Prepurge and Ignition states. The IAS
in not monitored during Run.
Prepurge time
MM:SS
This parameter sets the burner control’s prepurge time. Setting this parameter to zero
disables prepurge.
66-1171—03
58
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 33. Burner Control Safety Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
Comment
Purge rate proving
None, High Fire Switch, Fan Speed
This parameter determines the input used to confirm the purge rate has been reached. It is
unused and ignored if the Prepurge time is set to zero.
If set to None, the purge rate is commanded during prepurge but purge timing begins
immediately without waiting for any feedback.
If set to High Fire Switch then the HFS input must be on to prove the purge rate. Additionally,
if this is selected and HFS is already on upon exit from Standby then an additional 30 second
prepurge delay (indicating HFS jumpered) is enforced before the measured Prepurge time
begins. If the HFS opens during purge, the burner control will react as specified by the
equipment setup (typically by restarting or holding Prepurge).
If set to Fan Speed then the measured fan speed must be within the specified prepurge rate,
+/- 3% for 3 seconds before the rate is proven and the measured prepurge time begins. If the
fan speed later goes outside of the prepurge rate +/- 10% during purge, the burner control will
react as specified by the equipment setup (typically by restarting or holding Prepurge).
Lightoff rate proving
None, Low Fire Switch, Fan Speed
This parameter determines the input used to confirm the rate has been reached for lighting
the burner.
If set to None, the lightoff rate is commanded during ignition but is not checked.
If set to Low Fire Switch then the LFS input must be on to prove the lightoff rate. Additionally,
if this is selected and LFS is already on upon exit from prepurge then an additional 30 second
delay (indicating LFS jumpered) is enforced before the Ignition time begins. If the LFS opens
during ignition, the burner control will react as specified by the equipment setup (typically by
locking out).
If set to Fan Speed then the measured fan speed must be within the specified lightoff rate, +/
- 3% for 3 seconds before the rate is proven and Ignition begins. If the fan speed later goes
outside of the prepurge rate +/- 10% during ignition or MFEP, the burner control will react as
specified by the equipment setup (typically by locking out).
Pilot type
Interrupted, Intermittent, DBI, Direct Burner Ignition Pulsed
An interrupted pilot turns off at the end of the main flame establishing period (MFEP),
whereas an intermittent pilot remains on during the run period and thus there is no MFEP.
The third choice, DBI (direct burner ignition) indicates that there is no pilot and that the main
flame is lit directly using the igniter. The ignition time is fixed at 4 seconds whenever direct
burner ignition is selected.
DBI time
None, 4 sec, 10 sec, 15 sec
Flame sensor type
Flame Rod, UV, UV with Spark Interference
Forced recycle interval time
Time, None
After scheduled time of continuous run, system is recycled, specifically if UV detector is used
to provide Safe Start.
IGNITER MAY BE ON THROUGHOUT PFEP, OR ONLY DURING FIRST HALF.
IGNITER
STANDBY
PREPURGE
PREIGNITION
(MAY BE ZERO)
PILOT
FLAME REQUIRED.
FAILURE TO IGNITE OPTIONS:
• LOCKOUT
• COUNT RECYCLES, THEN LOCKOUT
• COUNT RECYCLES, THEN DELAY MM:SS
• RECYCLE (NO LIMIT)
PFEP
4, 10, OR 15S
MFEP
MAIN
RUN STABILIZATION
(MAY BE ZERO)
5, 10, OR 15S
RUN
POSTPURGE
FLAME REQUIRED: LOCKOUT OR RECYCLE
RECYCLE DUE TO
FAILURE TO IGNITE
= CLEAR THE FAILURE-TO-IGNITE
RETRY COUNTER
RECYCLE DUE TO FLAME
FAILURE IN MFEP
RECYCLE DUE TO FLAME
FAILURE IN RUN
M28035
Fig. 23. Interrupted pilot.
59
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
IGNITER MAY BE ON THROUGHOUT PFEP, OR ONLY DURING FIRST HALF.
IGNITER
PILOT
FLAME REQUIRED.
FAILURE TO IGNITE OPTIONS:
• LOCKOUT
• COUNT RECYCLES, THEN LOCKOUT
• COUNT RECYCLES, THEN DELAY MM:SS
• RECYCLE (NO LIMIT)
PREPURGE
PREIGNITION
(MAY BE ZERO)
STANDBY
MAIN
PFEP
4, 10, OR 15S
RUN STABILIZATION
(MAY BE ZERO)
RUN
POSTPURGE
FLAME REQUIRED: LOCKOUT OR RECYCLE
RECYCLE DUE TO
FAILURE TO IGNITE
RECYCLE DUE TO FLAME
FAILURE IN RUN
= CLEAR THE FAILURE-TO-IGNITE
RETRY COUNTER
M28036
Fig. 24. Intermittent pilot.
IGNITER
STANDBY
PREPURGE
PREIGNITION
(MAY BE ZERO)
MAIN
FLAME REQUIRED.
FAILURE TO IGNITE OPTIONS:
• LOCKOUT
• COUNT RECYCLES, THEN LOCKOUT
• COUNT RECYCLES, THEN DELAY MM:SS
• RECYCLE (NO LIMIT)
DBI
FIXED AT 4S
RUN STABILIZATION
(MAY BE ZERO)
RUN
POSTPURGE
FLAME REQUIRED: LOCKOUT OR RECYCLE
RECYCLE DUE TO
FAILURE TO IGNITE
= CLEAR THE FAILURE-TO-IGNITE
RETRY COUNTER
RECYCLE DUE TO FLAME
FAILURE IN RUN
M28037
Fig. 25. Direct burner ignition
Table 33. Burner Control Safety Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
Comment
Igniter on during
Pilot Flame Establishing Period or First half of PFEP
This parameter is not needed and ignored if DBI (Direct Burner Ignition) is selected.
Otherwise the igniter may be on throughout the PFEP, or only during the first half of it:
• 2 seconds for a 4 second PFEP time,
• 5 seconds for a 10 second PFEP time,
• 7 seconds for a 15 second PFEP time.
When the igniter is external, it is on continuously during the defined period. However when
the igniter is selected as the internal spark generator then, during its on time as defined by
this parameter, it actually is intermittently on, then off, then on, then off, with each state
lasting 1/4 second. (This is done because flame cannot be sensed while the igniter is on, due
to hardware limitations, so flame sense and igniter spark are done alternatetly at a 1/4
second rate.)
Pilot type
Interrupted, Intermittent, DBI, Direct Burner Ignition Pulsed
Preignition time
hr:mm:ss
Pilot flame establishing period
(PFEP)
4, 10, or 15 seconds
This parameter is ignored if DBI is selected. Otherwise there are three choices for the
duration of PFEP: 4, 10, or 15 seconds.
Flame must be on at the end of this period or a response occurs (see “Ignite failure response”
on page 61).
66-1171—03
60
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 33. Burner Control Safety Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
Comment
Main flame establishing period
(MFEP)
5, 10, or 15 Seconds
This parameter only appears if Pilot type is Interrupted. Three choices of the MFEP time are
provided: 5, 10, or 15 seconds.
Flame must remain on throughout the MFEP, otherwise a response occurs (see “MFEP flame
failure response” on page 61).
Ignite failure response
Lockout, Recycle & Hold After Retries, Recycle & Lockout After Retries, Continuous Recycle
If a failure to ignite is detected at the end of the Ignition period, then there are four possible
responses:
• Lockout
• Recycle & hold after retries—the burner control recycles to the beginning of purge and
counts how many times this has occurred. If the retry count has been reached, a hold
occurs with the system purging. After the hold, the retry count is cleared and the burner
tries (and retries) again.
• Recycle & lockout after retries—the burner control recycles to the beginning of purge and
counts how many times this has occurred. If the retry count has been reached, a lockout
occurs.
• Continuous recycle—the burner control recycles without limit.
The retry counter is cleared during Standby (no demand), during the hold imposed by the
retry counter, or if flame is achieved.
Ignite failure retries
3, 5
This parameter provides the number of retries, either 3 or 5.
Ignite failure delay
MM:SS
When Recycle & hold after retries is selected, this parameter provides the delay time for the
hold.
MFEP flame failure response
Lockout, Recycle
During the MFEP state, if the flame fails there is a choice for the response. If lockout is
selected, a flame failure during MFEP causes a lockout. However, if recycle is selected, the
burner control shuts off the fuel and recycles back to the beginning of prepurge, then
continues with the normal burner startup process (prepurge, ignition, then run) to attempt to
light the burner again.
Run flame failure response
Lockout, Recycle
During the Run state if flame fails then there is a choice for the response. If lockout is
selected for flame failure during Run. However, if recycle is selected, the burner control shuts
off the fuel and recycles back to the beginning of prepurge, then continues with the normal
burner startup process (prepurge, ignition, then run) to light the burner again.
Fan speed error response
Lockout, Recycle
If fan fails in Run and recycle is selected then the burner control recycles back to the
beginning of Prepurge, then continues with the normal burner startup process to attempt to
bring the fan up to speed again.
Pilot test hold
Enable, Disable
This parameter is provided to support the pilot turndown test required by burner standards for
Intermittent and Interrupted pilots. It is ignored if Pilot Type is DBI.
If the Pilot type is Interrupted or Intermittent and this parameter is enabled, the burner control
sequence will hold (forever) at 1 second into the Ignition state.
During Pilot Test Hold, a flame-out timer always starts at zero when the Ignition state is
entered, then counts up toward 15 seconds while flame is off and down toward zero when
flame is on. This timer has a possible effect only during the pilot test: if it ever reaches 15
seconds of accumulated flame out time then a lockout occurs.
The pilot test hold should be enabled prior to entering Ignition, since changes to parameters
may require some seconds to take effect. Similarly, when the hold is disabled the burner
control may remain in the hold condition for a short time.
Ignition source
Internal, External, Hot Surface Ignitor
The R7910A can use either an internal spark generator, an external ignition source driven via
relay contacts that are interlocked with the main valve and powered through the ILK input
terminal or Hot Surface Ignitor using connector J5 (terminal 6 and 7).
Run stabilization time
MM:SS
During run stabilization the modulation rate is held at the light-off rate and is released for
modulation only after the hold time given by this parameter has expired. If this parameter is
zero then there is no stabilization time.
61
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 33. Burner Control Safety Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
Postpurge time
Comment
0 seconds to 5 minutes (MM:SS)
This parameter sets the burner control’s postpurge time. Setting this parameter to zero
disables postpurge.
ANNUNCIATOR
The input terminal names (Interlock [ILK], Load [Limit] Control
Input [LCI], Pre Ignition Interlock [PII]) can be renamed with a
long (20 character) and short (3 character) name that better
describes their purpose.
The Annunciator section monitors the status of a series string
of limits, control, and interlock contacts to enhance fault and
status messages.
Three Annunciator terminals may already be assigned
functions based on the system parameter setup:
The Annunciator’s 8 inputs (A1–A8) along with the Interlock
(ILK), Load (Limit) Control Input (LCI), and Pre Ignition
Interlock (PII) inputs, provide a total of 11 monitored contact
components.
• A1: Will be Interrupted Air Switch (IAS) if the parameter is
enabled.
• A7: Will be High Fire Switch (HFS) if the parameter for
Purge Rate Proving parameter is enabled
• A8: Will be Low Fire Switch (LFS) if Lightoff Rate Proving
parameter is enabled.
The Annunciator function is defined by a specific model
number.
Each Annunciator input has three parameters:
CHECKOUT
• Long Name: 20 characters long; name is displayed when
viewing the Annunciator status from a system display like
the S7999B.
• Short Name: 3 characters long; used for status viewing by
more limited local displays, like the S7910. The short name
can also be used as part of a lockout or hold message.
• Location: Each Annunciator terminal location may be
designated:
• LCI: Monitors a series of wired devices for load/limit
control.
Open equipment Control, Limits, and/or Interlock inputs. Check
that the R7910 reacts as programmed and annunciates the
point status properly.
Important: Restore ALL Controls, Limits, and Interlock
inputs altered above to proper operation.
DO NOT place jumpers wires across the installation controls,
limits and interlocks.
Annunciator Example
• ILK: Monitors a series of wired devices in the
interlock string.
Fig. 26 is an example of wiring to the Annunciator terminals
and names that have been assigned for this example.
• PII: Typically a closed indicator switch (pre-ignition
interlock or also called a proof of closure switch)
located on a gas valve (but may include other
devices).
Note that the assigned terminals (LCI, ILK, and PII) are the last
interlocks in their category.
• Unused: not used
• Other: Used to Monitor a circuit, not related to any
of the above.
66-1171—03
62
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
TERMINAL TABLE
A1
A2
LCI
A3
A4
A5
ILK
A6
PII
A7
A8
ICP
J6 TERMINAL 2
J6 TERMINAL 1
J6 TERMINAL 3
J7 TERMINAL 6
J7 TERMINAL 5
J7 TERMINAL 4
J5 TERMINAL 1
J7 TERMINAL 3
J6 TERMINAL 5
J7 TERMINAL 2
J7 TERMINAL 1
ANNUNCIATOR NAMES
L1
MASTER
SWITCH
STACK
VENT
WATER
LEVEL
HIGH GAS
PRESSURE
A1
MASTER SWITCH
A2
WATER LEVEL
LCI
LIMIT CONTROL
A3
STACK VENT FAN
A4
HIGH GAS PRESSURE
A5
LOW GAS PRESSURE
ILK
AIRFLOW SWITCH
A6
UPSTREAM VALVE
PII
DOWNSTREAM VALVE
A7
SECURITY DOOR
A8
AIR COMPRESSOR
LIMIT CONTROL
LOW GAS
PRESSURE
AIRFLOW
PII
V2
PII
V1
DOOR
COMPRESSOR
M28040A
Fig. 26. Example of annunciator inputs and terminal names.
Sorting
Annunciator items are sorted first by their category
assignment. The category order is:
LCI, ILK, PII, Other (Unused items appearing in the Other
category)
Within the category, inputs are sorted by the input identifier
(A1–A8), with the additional rule that LCI (if enabled) is last in
the LCI category, ILK last in the ILK category, and PII (if
enabled) is last in the PII category.
Viewing the S7999B System Display using the “programmable”
annunciator display in this case would resemble Fig. 27.
Fig. 27. Annunciator display.
If A7 is defined as a HFS input, then the parameter that calls it
a “Security door” would be ignored and the automatic value
(High Fire Switch) is used instead (the same would be true for
the A8 LFS and A1 IAS).
63
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
FAULT HANDLING
• Alerts never require manual intervention to reset them; that
is, if the alert clears up, then normal operation will continue.
An alert is not a condition, it is an event. The cause of the
alert may be a condition, e.g. something that is causing an
abnormal hold, but the alert itself in this case is a
momentary event generated upon entry to that condition.
• Whether the alarm contact closes or not is programmable
for each alert by the OEM.
• Alerts are logged in a 15-item volatile alert history sorted in
chronological order. Only one instance of each alert code
occurs in the history, corresponding to the most recent
occurrence of that alert.
Lockouts and Alerts
The R7910A implements two kinds of faults: lockouts and
alerts.
A list of fault codes with possible troubleshooting tips is
provided in Table 51 on page 107.
A list of alerts is provided in Table 52 on page 115.
LOCKOUT
• A lockout causes the boiler control to shutdown and
requires manual or remote reset to clear the lockout.
• Always causes alarm contacts to close.
• Logged in lockout history.
Alarms for Alerts
The Alarm Parameter Control Block (see the section above)
determines which alerts will cause an alarm (by closing the
alarm contacts) and which will be reported silently.
ALERT
• Every other kind of problem that isn't a lockout is an alert.
Examples include boiler control abnormal holds, LL master
problems, faults from non-safety functions, etc.
66-1171—03
Thus an alarm might be on because of a lockout or an alert. If
the cause is a lockout then the alarm contacts remain close
until the lockout is cleared. However, for alarms due to alerts
(which may recur) the alarm may be silenced for a period of
time (0–600 minutes) by specifying it in the Alarm Silence Time
parameter.
64
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
BURNER CONTROL
OPERATION
Safety Shutdown of Burner Control
Functions
Safety Shutdown (Lockout) occurs if any of the following occur
during the indicated period:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
INITIATE Period:
a. A/C line power errors occurred.
b. Four minute INITIATE period has been exceeded.
STANDBY Period:
a. Flame signal is present after 240 seconds.
b. Preignition Interlock is open an accumulative time of
30 seconds.
c. Interlock Start check feature is enabled and the Interlock String (including Airflow Switch) is closed for 120
seconds with the controller closed. (jumpered or
welded Interlock).
d. Pilot Valve Terminal is energized.
e. Main Valve Terminal is energized.
f. Internal system fault occurred.
PREPURGE Period:
a. Preignition Interlock opens anytime during
PREPURGE period.
b. Flame signal is detected for 10 seconds accumulated time during PREPURGE.
c. Purge Rate Fan RPM or High Fire Switch fails to
close within four minutes and fifteen seconds after
the firing rate motor is commanded to drive to the
high fire position at the start of PREPURGE.
d. Light off Rate Fan RPM or Low Fire Switch fails to
close within four minutes and fifteen seconds after
the firing rate motor is commanded to drive to the low
fire position at the end of PREPURGE.
e. Lockout Interlock (if programmed) does not close
within 10 seconds.
f. Lockout Interlock opens during PREPURGE.
g. Pilot Valve terminal is energized.
h. Main Valve terminal is energized.
i. Internal system fault occurred.
PRE-IGNITION TIME
a. Lockout Interlock opens.
b. IAS Purge and Ignition enabled and the Interlock
opens.
c. Preignition Interlock opens.
d. Pilot Valve terminal is energized.
e. Main Valve terminal is energized.
PILOT FLAME ESTABLISHING PERIOD (PFEP)
a. Low Fire Switch opens (if enabled).
b. Lockout Interlock opens (if enabled).
c. Pilot Valve terminal is not energized.
d. No flame is present at the end of the PFEP, or after
programmed number of retry attempts.
e. Main valve terminal is energized.
f. Internal system fault occurred.
MAIN FLAME ESTABLISHING PERIOD (MFEP).
a. Low Fire Switch opens (if enabled).
b. Lockout Interlock opens (if enabled).
c. Pilot valve terminal is not energized.
d. Main valve terminal is not energized.
e. No flame present at the end of MFEP.
f. Internal system fault occurred.
RUN Period:
a. No flame is present, or flame is lost (if enabled-lockout).
b. Lockout Interlock opens) if enabled).
c. IAS Purge and Ignition enabled and the Interlock
opens.
d. Pilot terminal energized (if programmed as Interrupted Pilot).
e. Main valve terminal is not energized.
f. Internal system fault occurred.
POSTPURGE Period.
a. Preignition Interlock does not close in five seconds.
b. Pilot Valve terminal is energized.
c. Main Valve terminal is energized.
d. Internal system fault occurred.
e. Flame sensed 240 seconds accumulated time after
the RUN period.
Safety Shutdown
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If the lockout interlocks open or a sensor designated as a
safety limit are read as defective, SOLA will lockout and
the blower motor will be de-energized.
If these open during the firing period, all fuel valves will
be de-energized, the system will complete postpurge,
and will lockout indicated by an alarm.
If the pilot flame is not detected by the end of the last (X
number recycle attempt), pilot trial for ignition period, the
pilot valve, and ignition transformer will be de-energized,
the system will complete post purge and will lockout indicated by an alarm.
If the main flame is not detected at the end of the last
recycle attempt of the main flame establishing period, all
fuel valves will be de-energized, the device will complete
postpurge, and will lockout indicated by an alarm.
If the flame sensing signal is lost during the run period (if
lockout is selected), all fuel valves will be de-energized
within 4 seconds after the loss of the flame signal, the
device will complete postpurge, and will lockout indicate
by an alarm.
Manual reset is required following any safety shutdown.
Manual reset may be accomplished by pressing the push
button on the device, pressing the remote reset wired
into connector J10, or through an attached display.
Interrupting power to SOLA will cause electrical resets,
but does not reset a lockout condition.
Operational Sequence
Initiate
The R7910 enters the Initiate sequence on Initial Power up or:
• Voltage fluctuations vary less than 20Vac or greater than
30Vac.
• Frequency fluctuations vary +/-5% (57 to 63 Hz).
• If Demand, LCI, or Stat interrupt (open) during the Prepurge
Period.
• After the reset button is pressed or fault is cleared at the
displays.
The Initiate sequence also delays the burner motor from being
energized and de-energized from an intermittent AC line input
or control input.
If an AC problem exists for more than 240 seconds a lockout
will occur.
65
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Central Heating
8.
Start-up sequence central heating request (system in standby):
1. Heat request detected (On Setpoint - On Hysteresis).
2. The CH pump is switched on.
3. After a system Safe Start Check, the Blower (fan) is
switched on after a dynamic ILK switch test (if enabled).
4. After the ILK switch is closed and the purge rate proving
fan RPM is achieved (or High Fire Switch is closed) prepurge time is started.
5. When the purge time is complete, the purge fan RPM is
changed to the Lightoff Rate or if used, the damper
motor is driven to the Low Fire Position.
6. As soon as the fan-rpm is equal to the light-off rpm (or
the Low Fire Switch closes), the Trial for Ignition or PreIgnition Time is started (depending on configuration).
7. Pre-Ignition Time will energize the ignitor and check for
flame.
8. Trial for Ignition. Fig. 23–25 on page 60 shows three ignition options. Specifics for timings and device actions are
defined by the OEM or installer.
9. The ignition and the gas valve are switched on.
10. The ignition is turned off at the end of the direct burner
ignition period, or for a system that does use a pilot, at
the end (or optionally at the middle) of the Pilot Flame
Establishing Period (PFEP). For an interrupted pilot system this is followed by a Main Flame Establishing Period
(MFEP) where the pilot ignites the main burner. For an
intermittent pilot there is no MFEP.
11. The fan is kept at the lightoff rate during the stabilization
timer, if any.
12. Before the release to modulation, the fan is switched to
minimum RPM for the CH Forced Rate and Slow Start
Enable, if the water is colder than the threshold.
13. At the end of the CH-heat request the burner is switched
off and the fan stays on until post purge is complete.
14. A new CH-request is blocked for the forced off time set
by the Anti Short Cycle (if enabled).
15. The pump stays on during the pump overrun time (if
enabled).
16. At the end of the pump overrun time the pump will be
switched off.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
SYSTEM CHECKOUT
This section provides general checkout and troubleshooting
procedures for the Primary Safety function of R7910 and
R7911 SOLA devices.
WARNING
Explosion Hazard.
Can cause serious injury or death.
Do not allow fuel to accumulate in the combustion
chamber for longer than a few seconds without igniting,
to prevent danger of forming explosive mixture. Close
manual fuel shutoff valve(s) if flame is not burning at
end of specified time.
Domestic Hot Water
Start-up sequence DHW-request (system in standby):
1. Heat request detected (either DHW Sensor Only, DHW
Sensor and Remote Command or DHW Switch and Inlet
Sensor, whichever applies).
2. The pump is switched on (after the DHW Pump Start
Delay).
3. After a system Safe Start Check, the Blower (fan) is
switched on after a dynamic ILK switch test (if enabled).
4. After the ILK switch is closed and the purge rate proving
fan RPM is achieved (or High Fire Switch is closed) prepurge time is started.
5. When the purge time is complete, the purge fan RPM is
changed to the Lightoff Rate or if used, the damper
motor is driven to the Low Fire Position.
6. As soon as the fan-rpm is equal to the light-off rpm (or
the Low Fire Switch closes), the Trial for Ignition or PreIgnition Time is started (depending on configuration).
7. Pre-Ignition Time will energize the ignitor and check for
flame.
66-1171—03
Trial for Ignition. Fig. 23–25 on page 60 shows three ignition options. Specifics for timings and device actions are
defined by the OEM or installer.
The ignition and the gas valve are switched on.
The ignition is turned off at the end of the direct burner
ignition period, or for a system that does use a pilot, at
the end (or optionally at the middle) of the Pilot Flame
Establishing Period (PFEP). For an interrupted pilot system this is followed by a Main Flame Establishing Period
(MFEP) where the pilot ignites the main burner. For an
intermittent pilot there is no MFEP.
The fan is kept at the lightoff rate during the stabilization
timer, if any.
Before the release to modulation, the fan is switched to
minimum RPM for the DHW Forced Rate and Slow Start
Enable, if the water is colder than the threshold.
At the end of the DHW-heat request the burner is
switched off and the fan stays on until post purge is complete.
A new DHW-request is blocked for the forced off time set
by the Anti Short Cycle (if enabled).
The pump stays on during the pump overrun time (if
enabled).
At the end of the pump overrun time the pump will be
switched off.
WARNING
Electric Shock Hazard.
Can cause serious injury or death.
Use extreme care while testing system. Line voltage is
present on most terminal connections when power is
on.
Open master switch before removing or installing the R7910 or
R7911 SOLA device or Display Module connector.
Make sure all manual fuel shutoff valves are closed before
starting initial lightoff check and Pilot Turndown tests.
Do not put the system in service until you have satisfactorily
completed all applicable tests in this section and any others
recommended by the original equipment manufacturer.
Limit trial for pilot to 10 seconds. Limit the attempt to light main
burner to 2 seconds after the fuel reaches burner nozzle. Do
not exceed manufacturer’s nominal lightoff time.
66
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Preliminary Inspection
CAUTION
Perform the following inspections to avoid common problems.
Make certain that:
1. Wiring connections are correct and all screws are tight.
2. Flame detector(s) is clean, installed and positioned properly. Consult the applicable Instructions.
3. Combination connector J1 wiring and flame detector(s)
are correctly used. See product data sheet for wiring.
4. Burner is completely installed and ready to fire; consult
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Fuel lines are
purged of air.
5. Combustion chamber and flues are clear of fuel and fuel
vapor.
6. Power is connected to the system disconnect switch
(master switch).
7. Lockout is reset (reset button) only if the R7910 or
R7911 SOLA Module is powered.
8. System is in STANDBY condition. STANDBY message is
displayed in the S7999 Operator Interface Module.
9. All limits and interlocks are reset.
Equipment Malfunction or Damage Hazard.
Each device type is unique. Using existing wiring on a
module change can cause equipment damage. Make
wiring changes when a module is replaced with a
different R7910 or R7911 SOLA device to sequence
burner.
IMPORTANT
1. If the system fails to perform properly, note the fault code,
fault message, equipment status, and sequence time on
the display. Then refer to the Fault Code section in the
R7910 and R7911 Product Data Sheet form 66-1171.
2. Repeat all required Checkout tests after all adjustments are made. All tests must be satisfied with the
flame detector(s) in their final position.
Equipment Recommended
• S7999 Operator Interface Module.
• Volt-ohmmeter (1M ohm/volt minimum sensitivity) with:
0-300 Vac capability. 0-6000 ohm capability. 0-10 Vdc
capability.
Flame Signal Measurement
Install a DC voltmeter in the SOLA test jacks. Observe polarity
when connecting meter leads.
Checkout Summary
Table 1 provides an overview of checkout steps performed for
each applicable system.
INITIAL LIGHTOFF CHECKS
See the product data sheet for location of component parts
terminal locations.
Proved Pilot Systems
Perform this check on all installations that use a pilot. It should
immediately follow the preliminary inspection.
Table 34. Checkout steps and applicable systems.
Checkout Step
Flame Ultraviolet
Piloted
DSI
Rod
Flame
Systems Systems Systems Detectors
Preliminary Inspection
X
X
X
X
Flame Signal
Measurement
X
X
X
X
Initial Lightoff Check for
Proved Pilot
X
Initial Lightoff Check for
Direct Spark Ignition
Pilot Turndown Test
NOTE: Low fuel pressure limits, if used, could be open. If so,
bypass them with jumpers during this check.
1.
2.
X
3.
X
Ignition Interference
Test
X
Hot Refractory Hold-in
Test
X
Ignition Spark Pickup
X
Response to Other
Ultraviolet Sources
X
Flame Signal with Hot
Combustion Chamber
X
X
X
X
Safety Shutdown Tests
X
X
X
X
4.
5.
6.
67
Open the master switch.
Make sure that the manual main fuel shutoff valve(s) is
closed. Open the manual pilot shutoff valve. If the pilot
takeoff is downstream from the manual main fuel shutoff
valve(s), slightly open the manual main valve to supply
pilot gas flow. Make sure the main fuel is shut off just
upstream from the burner inlet, or disconnect power from
the automatic main fuel valve(s).
Close the master switch and start the system with a call
for heat by raising the setpoint of the operating controller;
see the R7910 and R7911 SOLA Module sequence. The
R7910 or R7911 SOLA Module should start the INITIATE
sequence.
Let the sequence advance to PILOT IGN (status is
displayed on the S7999 Operator Interface Module, if
used). The PILOT valve energizes, ignition spark should
occur, and the pilot flame should light. If the pilot ignites,
the FLAME LED is energized. Go to step 7.
If the pilot flame is not established during the PFEP (pilot
flame establishing period), safety shutdown occurs. Let
the sequence complete its cycle.
Push the reset pushbutton and let the system recycle
once. If the pilot flame still does not ignite, make the following ignition/pilot adjustments:
EXTERNAL IGNITION SOURCE
a. Open the master switch and remove the R7910 and
R7911 SOLA Module connector J5.
b. Ensure that both the manual pilot shutoff valve and
the manual main shutoff valves are closed.
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
8.
9.
c. On connector J5, jumper power to the ignition terminal J5 terminal 4. Disconnect the leadwire to the pilot
valve if it is connected to the same terminal.
d. Close the master switch to energize only the ignition
transformer.
e. If the ignition spark is not strong and continuous,
open the master switch and adjust the ignition
electrode spark gap setting to the manufacturer’s
recommendation.
f. Make sure the ignition electrodes are clean.
g. Close the master switch and observe the spark.
h. After a continuous spark is obtained, open the
master switch and add a jumper on the Connector J5
terminal 2 or reconnect the pilot valve lead wire if it
was disconnected in step b.
i. Open the manual pilot shutoff valve.
j. Close the master switch to energize both the ignition
transformer and the pilot valve.
k. If the pilot flame does not ignite and if the ignition
spark is still continuous, adjust the pilot gas pressure
regulator until a pilot flame is established.
l. When the pilot flame ignites properly and stays
ignited, open the master switch and remove the
jumper(s) from the J5 terminals.
m. Check for adequate bleeding of the fuel line.
n. Reinstall the J5 connector onto the R7910 or R7911
SOLA Module, close the master switch and return to
step 4.
INTERNAL IGNITION SOURCE
To check the internal ignition, the R7910 or R7911
controller will need to be cycled:
a. Open the master switch and remove connector J5.
b. Ensure both the manual pilot shutoff valve and the
manual main fuel shutoff valves are closed.
c. Cycle the R7910 or R7911 controller and observe the
ignition spark. (To provide a longer ignition period,
additional time can be added to the pre-ignition time
parameter.)
d. If the ignition spark is not strong and continuous,
open the master switch and adjust the ignition electrodes spark gap setting to the manufacturer’s recommendation
e. Make sure that the ignition electrodes are clean.
f. Close the master switch and cycle the R7910 or
R7911 controller and observe the spark.
g. After obtaining a strong spark, open the master
switch, remove the main valve wire from connector
J5 terminal 3 and re-install connector J5 to the R7910
or R7911 controller.
h. Open the manual pilot shutoff valve.
i. Close the master switch and change the pre-ignition
time parameter back to the original value if you
changed it in step C.
j. Cycle the R7910 or R7911 controller to energize both
the ignition transformer and the pilot valve.
k. If the pilot flame does not ignite and if the ignition
spark is still continuous, adjust the pilot gas pressure
regulator until a pilot flame is established.
l. When the pilot flame ignites properly and stays
ignited, open the master switch and reconnect the
main valve to the connector J5 terminal 3 (if removed
in step g).
m. Close the master switch and return to Step 4.
7. When the pilot flame ignites, measure the flame signal. If
the pilot flame signal is unsteady or approaching the
flame threshold value (see flame threshold
parameter), adjust the pilot flame size or detector sighting to provide a maximum and steady flame signal.
66-1171—03
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Recycle the system to recheck lightoff and pilot flame signal.
When the MAIN Valve energizes, make sure the automatic main fuel valve is open; then smoothly open the
manual main fuel shutoff valve(s) and watch for main
burner flame ignition. When the main burner flame is
established, go to step 16.
If the main burner flame is not established within 5
seconds or the normal lightoff time specified by the
equipment manufacturer, close the manual main fuel
shutoff valve(s).
Recycle the system to recheck the lightoff and pilot flame
signal.
Smoothly open the manual fuel shutoff valve(s) and try lightoff again. (The first attempt may have been required to
purge the lines and bring sufficient fuel to the burner.)
If the main burner flame is not established within 5
seconds or the normal lightoff time specified by the
equipment manufacturer, close the manual main fuel
shutoff valve(s). Check all burner adjustments.
If the main burner flame is not established after two attempts:
a. Check for improper pilot flame size.
b. Check for excess combustion air at low fire.
c. Check for adequate low fire fuel flow.
d. Check for proper gas supply pressure.
e. Check for proper valve operation.
f. Check for proper pilot flame positioning.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 to establish the main burner flame;
then go to step 16.
With the sequence in RUN, make burner adjustments for
flame stability and Btu input rating.
Shut down the system by opening the burner switch or
by lowering the setpoint of the operating controller. Make
sure the main flame goes out. There may be a delay due
to gas trapped between the valve(s) and burner. Make
sure all automatic fuel valve(s) close.
Restart the system by closing the burner switch and/or
raising the setpoint of the operating controller. Observe
that the pilot flame is established during PILOT IGN and
the main burner flame is established during MAIN IGN
within the normal lightoff time.
Measure the flame signal. Continue to check for the
proper flame signal through the RUN period. Check the
flame signal at both High and Low Firing Rate positions
and while modulating, if applicable.
Run the burner through another sequence, observing the
flame signal for:
a. Pilot flame alone.
b. Pilot and main flame together.
c. Main flame alone (unless monitoring an intermittent
pilot). Also observe the time it takes to light the main
flame. Ignition of main flame should be smooth.
Make sure all readings are in the required ranges
before proceeding.
Return the system to normal operation.
NOTE: After completing these tests, open the master switch
and remove all test jumpers from the connector terminals, limits/controls or switches.
Direct Burner Ignition (DBI) Systems
This check applies to gas and oil burners not using a pilot. It
should immediately follow the preliminary inspection. Refer to
the appropriate sample block diagram of field wiring for the
ignition transformer and fuel valve(s) hookup.
NOTE: Low fuel pressure limits, if used, could be open. If so,
bypass them with jumpers during this check.
68
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Open the master switch.
Complete the normal ready-to-fire checkout of the fuel
supply and equipment as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
Close all manual main fuel shutoff valve(s). Check that
the automatic fuel valve(s) is closed. Make sure fuel is
not entering the combustion chamber.
Close the master switch and start the system with a call
for heat by raising the setpoint of the operating controller; see R7910 and R7911 SOLA Module sequencing.
The program sequence should start the INITIATE
sequence.
Let the sequence advance through PREPURGE (if applicable). Ignition spark should turn on during the ignition trial
period. Listen for the click of the fuel solenoid valve(s). The
R7910 or R7911 SOLA Module locks out and the ALARM
LED turns on.
Let the R7910 or R7911Sola Module complete its cycle.
Open the manual fuel shutoff valve(s).
Push the reset button and the module recycles the
program sequence through PREPURGE (if applicable).
When the fuel valve turns on during the ignition period,
make sure that the main burner flame is established. If it
is, go to step 14.
If the main burner flame is not established within 4 seconds or within the normal lightoff time specified by the
equipment manufacturer, close the manual fuel shutoff
valve(s), and open the master switch.
Wait about three minutes. Close the master switch, open
the manual fuel shutoff valve(s), and try to lightoff the
burner again. The first attempt may be required to purge
the lines and bring sufficient fuel to the burner. If it is not
established on the second attempt, proceed to step 13.
Check all burner adjustments.
Make the following ignition and main burner adjustments:
INTERNAL IGNITION SOURCE
To check the internal ignition, the R7910 or R7911 controller will need to be cycled:
a. Open the master switch and remove connector J5.
b. Ensure both the manual main valve shutoff valve and
the manual main fuel shutoff valves are closed.
c. Cycle the R7910 or R7911 controller and observe the
ignition spark. (To provide a longer ignition period,
additional time can be added to the pre-ignition time
parameter.)
d. If the ignition spark is not strong and continuous,
open the master switch and adjust the ignition electrodes spark gap setting to the manufacturer’s recommendation.
e. Make sure the ignition electrodes are clean.
f. Close the master switch and cycle the R7910 or
R7911 controller and observe the spark.
g. After obtaining a strong spark, open the master
switch, re-install connector J5 to the R7910 or R7911
controller.
h. Open the manual main valve shutoff valve.
i. Close the master switch and change the pre-ignition
time parameter back to the original value if you
changed it in step C.
j. Cycle the R7910 or R7911 controller to energize both
the ignition transformer and the main fuel valve.
k. If the main flame does not ignite and if the ignition
spark is still continuous, adjust the main burner gas
pressure regulator until a main flame is established.
l. Check the main flame signal and ensure it is above
the threshold level and within the manufacturer’s recommendation.
m. Return to Step 8.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
EXTERNAL IGNITION SOURCE
a. Open the master switch and remove the R7910 or
R7911 SOLA module connector J5.
b. Ensure that the manual main burner fuel shutoff
valve is closed.
c. On connector J5, jumper power to the ignition terminal, J5 terminal 4.
d. Close the master switch to energize only the ignition
source.
e. If the ignition spark is not strong and continuous,
open the master switch and adjust the ignition
electrode spark gap to the manufacturer’s
recommendation.
f. Make sure electrodes are clean.
g. Close the master switch and observe the spark.
h. After obtaining a strong and continuous spark, open
the master switch; remove the jumper between
power and J5 terminal 4. Re-install the connector J5
to the R7910 or R7911 controller.
i. Open the manual main burner fuel shutoff valve.
j. Close the master switch.
k. Cycle the R7910 or R7911 controller to energize both
the ignition source and the main fuel valve.
l. If the main flame does not ignite and if the ignition
spark is still continuous, adjust the main burner gas
pressure regulator until a main flame is established.
m. Check the main flame signal and insure it is above
the threshold level and within the manufacture’s
recommendations.
n. Return to step 8.
When the main burner flame is established, the
sequence advances to RUN. Make burner adjustments
for flame stability and input rating.
Shut down the system by opening the burner switch or
by lowering the setpoint of the operating controller. Make
sure the burner flame goes out and all automatic fuel
valves close.
If used, remove the bypass jumpers from the low fuel
pressure limit.
Restart the system by closing the burner switch and/or
raising the setpoint of the operating controller. Observe
that the main burner flame is established during Main
Ignition, within the normal lightoff time specified by the
equipment manufacturer.
Measure the flame signal. Continue to check for the proper
signal through the RUN period. Check the signal at both
high and low firing rate positions and while modulating. Any
pulsating or unsteady readings require further attention.
Make sure all readings are in the required ranges
before proceeding.
NOTE: On completing these tests, open the master switch
and remove all test jumpers, limits/controls or
switches.
20.
Return the system to normal operation.
PILOT TURNDOWN TEST (ALL
INSTALLATIONS USING A
PILOT)
Perform this check on all installations that use a pilot. The
purpose of this test is to verify that the main burner can be lit by
the smallest pilot flame that can hold in the flame amplifier and
energize the FLAME LED. Clean the flame detector(s) to make
sure that it detects the smallest acceptable pilot flame.
69
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
15.
NOTE: Low fuel pressure limits, if used, could be open. If so,
bypass them with jumpers during this test.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
—
—
—
—
—
6.
Open the master switch.
Close the manual main fuel shutoff valve(s).
Connect a manometer (or pressure gauge) to measure
pilot gas pressure during the turndown test.
Open the manual pilot shutoff valve(s).
Close the master switch
Go to the S7999 Operator Interface Module.
Select Diagnostics Test button at the bottom of the
display.
Select Diagnostics test button at the bottom of this new
screen.
Select Pilot Test at the bottom of this new screen.
Select Start Test at the bottom of this screen.
Start the system with a call for heat. Raise the setpoint of
the operating controller. The R7910 or R7911 SOLA
sequence should start, and PREPURGE (if applicable)
should begin. The sequence will hold in the pilot flame
establishing period and the FLAME LED comes on when
the pilot flame ignites.
16.
17.
18.
IGNITION INTERFERENCE TEST
(FLAME RODS)
Ignition interference can subtract from (decrease) or add to
(increase) the flame signal. If it decreases the flame signal
enough, it causes a safety shutdown. If it increases the flame
signal, it could cause the FLAME LED to come on when the
true flame signal is below the minimum acceptable value.
Start the burner and measure the flame signal with both
ignition and pilot (or main burner) on, and then with only the
pilot (or main burner) on. Any significant difference (greater
than 0.5 Vdc) indicates ignition interference.
NOTE: If the sequence does not stop, reset the system and
make sure that you selected the Pilot Test.
7.
To Eliminate Ignition Interference
Turn down the pilot gas pressure very slowly, reading the
manometer (or pressure gauge) as it drops. Stop
instantly when the FLAME LED goes out. Note the
pressure reading. The pilot flame is at the minimum
turndown position. Immediately turn up the pilot pressure
until the FLAME LED comes on again or the flame signal
increases to above the flame threshold value. (See flame
threshold parameter).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
NOTE: If there is no flame for 15 seconds in the TEST position, the R7910 or R7911 SOLA Module locks out.
8.
9.
10.
HOT REFRACTORY HOLD-IN
TEST (ULTRAVIOLET
DETECTORS)
Turn the pilot hold test OFF and allow the R7910 or
R7911 controller to start a burner cycle. During the
This condition can delay response to flame failure and also can
prevent a system restart if hot refractory is detected.
The ultraviolet detector can respond to hot refractory above
2300 F (1371 C).
1. When the maximum refractory temperature is reached,
close all manual fuel shutoff valves, or open the electrical
circuits of all automatic fuel valves.
2. Visually observe when the burner flame or FLAME LED
goes out. If this takes more than 3 seconds, the detector
is sensing hot refractory.
3. Immediately terminate the firing cycle. Lower the setpoint to the operating controller, or set the Fuel Selector
Switch to OFF. Do not open the master switch.
NOTE: This step requires two people, one to open the
manual valve(s) and one to watch for ignition.
12.
13.
14.
Make sure there is enough ground area.
Be sure the ignition electrode and the flame rod are on
opposite sides of the ground area.
Check for correct spacing on the ignition electrode. (See
manufacturer's recommendation.)
Make sure the leadwires from the flame rod and ignition
electrode are not too close together.
Replace any deteriorated leadwires.
If the problem cannot be eliminated, consider changing
the system to an ultraviolet flame detection system.
Repeat step 7 to verify the pilot gas pressure reading at
the exact point the FLAME LED light goes out.
Increase the pilot gas pressure immediately until the
FLAME LED comes on, and then turn it down slowly to
obtain a pressure reading just above the dropout point or
until the flame signal increases to above the flame
threshold value (See flame threshold parameter).
Main Flame Establishing Period, make sure the automatic main fuel valve(s) opens; then smoothly open the
manual main fuel shutoff valve(s) (or any other manuallyopened safety shutoff valve(s), if used) and watch for
main burner ignition. If the lightoff is not rough and the
main burner flame is established, go to step 18.
11.
When the main burner lights reliably with the pilot at turndown, disconnect the manometer (or pressure gauge)
and turn up the pilot gas flow to that recommended by
the equipment manufacturer.
If used, remove the bypass jumpers from the terminals,
limits/controls, or switches.
Run the system through another cycle to check for
normal operation.
Return the system to normal operation.
If the main burner flame is not established within 5
seconds, or within the normal lightoff time specified by
the equipment manufacturer, close the manual main fuel
shutoff valve(s) and open the master switch. If the lightoff
is rough, the pilot flame size is too small.
Close the master switch and perform another pilot hold
test (see step 5).
Increase the pilot flame size by increasing its fuel flow
until a smooth main flame lightoff is accomplished.
Reposition the flame rod or the flame scanner sight tube
or use orifices until the pilot flame signal voltage is in the
range of 0.7 Vdc above the flame threshold value.
66-1171—03
NOTE: Some burners continue to purge oil lines between the
valves and nozzles even though the fuel valves are
closed. Terminating the firing cycle (instead of opening the master switch) allows purging of the combustion chamber. This reduces buildup of fuel vapors in
the combustion chamber caused by oil line purging.
4.
70
If the detector is sensing hot refractory, correct the condition by one or more of the following procedures:
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
g. Select the Verify button.
h. Select Begin.
i. Follow the prompts on the Operator Interface.
FOR PILOT SYSTEMS
a. Using the S7999 Operator Interface Module, select
the Configure button (lower left corner of the Status
page).
b. Using the left scroll down function, scroll down to
select the System Configuration Parameter page
(you will need to be logged in with a password).
c. Select Flame Sensor Type parameter.
d. Select UV Power Tube with Spark Interference.
e. Select the Burner Control Ignition Page.
f. Select Ignitor On During parameter.
g. Select 1st half of PFEP.
h. Changing these two parameters will require parameter verification.
i. Page back one level (upper right screen corner back
arrow button).
j. Select the Verify button.
k. Select Begin.
l. Follow the prompts on the Operator Interface.
a. Add an orifice plate in front of the cell to restrict the
viewing area of the detector.
b. Resight the detector at a cooler, more distant part of
the combustion chamber. Make sure the detector
properly sights the flame.
c. Try lengthening the sight pipe or decreasing the pipe
size (diameter).
For details, refer to the detector Instructions and the equipment
Operating Manual. Continue adjustments until hot refractory
hold-in is eliminated.
IGNITION SPARK RESPONSE
TEST (ULTRAVIOLET
DETECTORS)
Test to make certain that the ignition spark is not actuating the
FLAME LED:
1.
2.
3.
—
—
—
—
—
4.
5.
Open the master switch.
Close the pilot and main burner manual fuel shut-off
valve(s).
Close the master switch
Go to the S7999 Operator Interface Module.
Select Diagnostics Test button at the bottom of the
display.
Select Diagnostics test button at the bottom of this new
screen.
Select Pilot Test at the bottom of this new screen.
Select Start Test at the bottom of this screen.
Start the system with a call for heat. Raise the setpoint of
the operating controller. The R7910 or R7911 SOLA
sequence should start and prepurge (if applicable)
should begin. The sequence will hold in pilot flame
establishing period with only the ignition on. Ignition
spark should occur but the flame signal should not be
more than 0.5 Vdc.
If the flame signal is higher than 0.5 Vdc and the FLAME
LED does come on, consult the equipment operating
manual and resight the detector farther out from the
spark, or away from possible reflection. It may be necessary to construct a barrier to block the ignition spark from
the detector view. Continue adjustments until the flame
signal due to ignition spark is less than 0.5 Vdc.
Response to Other Ultraviolet
Sources
Some sources of artificial light (such as incandescent or
fluorescent bulbs, and mercury sodium vapor lamps) and
daylight produce small amounts of ultraviolet radiation. Under
certain conditions, an ultraviolet detector responds to these
sources as if it is sensing a flame. To check for proper detector
operation, check the Flame Failure Response Time (FFRT) and
conduct Safety Shutdown Tests under all operating conditions.
Flame Signal With Hot Combustion
Chamber (All Installations)
1.
2.
3.
NOTE: For R7910 or R7911 controllers with software revision
xxxx.2292 or higher, if the above procedures have
been attempted and flame signal is still above 0.5
Vdc, use the following procedure:
4.
FOR DIRECT BURNER IGNITION SYSTEMS
a. Using the S7999 Operator Interface Module, select
the Configure button (lower left corner of the Status
page).
b. Using the left scroll down function, scroll down to
select the System Configuration Parameter page
(you will need to be logged in with a password).
c. Select Flame Sensor Type parameter.
d. Select UV Power Tube with Spark Interference.
e. Changing the Flame Sensor Type will require parameter verification.
f. Page back one level (upper right screen corner back
arrow button).
5.
6.
7.
8.
71
With all initial start-up tests and burner adjustments completed, operate the burner until the combustion chamber
is at the maximum expected temperature.
Observe the equipment manufacturer’s warm-up
instructions.
Recycle the burner under these hot conditions and measure the flame signal. Check the pilot alone, the main
burner flame alone, and both together (unless monitoring
only the pilot flame when using an intermittent pilot, or
only the main burner flame when using DBI). Check the
signal at both High and Low Firing Rate positions and
while modulating, if applicable.
Lower the setpoint of the operating controller and
observe the time it takes for the burner flame to go out.
This should be within four seconds FFRT of the R7910
or R7911 controller.
If the flame signal is too low or unsteady, check the flame
detector temperature. Relocate the detector if the temperature is too high.
If necessary, realign the sighting to obtain the proper signal and response time.
If the response time is still too slow, replace the R7910 or
R7911 controller.
If the detector is relocated or resighted, or the R7910 or
R7911 controller is replaced, repeat all required Checkout tests.
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
SAFETY SHUTDOWN TESTS
(ALL INSTALLATIONS)
f.
Perform these tests at the end of Checkout, after all other tests
are completed. If used, the external alarm should turn on.
Press the RESET pushbutton on the R7910 or R7911 SOLA
Module to restart the system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Open a Pre-Ignition Interlock (if PII parameter is enabled)
during the STANDBY or PREPURGE period.
a. *Pre-Ignition ILK* fault is displayed on the Operator
Interface Module.
b. Safety shutdown occurs.
Opening a Lockout Interlock during PREPURGE, PILOT
IGN, MAIN IGN or RUN period.
a. *Lockout ILK* fault is displayed on the Operator
Interface Module.
b. Safety shutdown occurs.
Detection of flame 240 seconds after entry to STANDBY
from RUN. Detection of flame from 10 seconds up to 30 seconds into PREPURGE time.
a. Simulate a flame to cause the flame signal voltage
level to rise above the flame threshold value for 240
seconds after entry to STANDBY from RUN and also
simulate a flame signal for 10 seconds to 30 seconds
for PREPURGE.
b. *Flame Detected out of sequence* fault is displayed
on the Operator Interface Module.
c. Safety shutdown occurs.
Failure to ignite pilot or Main Burner (DBI setup).
a. Close pilot and main fuel manual shutoff valve(s).
b. Cycle burner on.
c. Automatic pilot valve(s) or main valves (DBI) should
be energized but the pilot or main burner (DBI) cannot ignite.
d. *Ignition Failure* fault is displayed on the Operator
Interface to indicate the fault.
e. Safety shutdown occurs.
Failure to ignite main (only interrupted pilot application).
a. Open the manual pilot valve(s); leave the main fuel
manual shutoff valve(s) closed.
b. Depress the RESET button.
c. Start the system.
d. The pilot should ignite and the flame signal should be
above the flame threshold value but the main burner
cannot light.
e. The flame signal should drop below the flame threshold value within the FFRT after the interrupted pilot
goes out.
f. *Ignition Failure* fault is displayed on the Operator
Interface Module.
g. Safety shutdown occurs.
Loss of flame during RUN.
a. Open the main fuel manual shutoff valve(s) and open
manual pilot shutoff valve(s).
b. Depress the RESET button.
c. Start the system. Start-up should be normal and the
main burner should light normally.
d. After the sequence is in the normal RUN period for at
least 10 seconds with the main burner firing, close the
manual main fuel shutoff valve(s) to extinguish the
main burner flame. (On intermittent pilot applications,
also, close the pilot manual shutoff valve.)
e. The flame signal should drop below the flame threshold value within the FFRT of the R7910 or R7911
SOLA Module after the main flame and/or pilot goes
out.
66-1171—03
*Main Flame Fail* fault is displayed on the Operator
Interface Module.
g. Safety shutdown or recycle, then lock out on failure to
light the pilot depending on the configuration the
R7910 or R7911 SOLA Module.
Open a Pre-Ignition Interlock after the first 5
seconds of POSTPURGE.
a. Open the main fuel manual shutoff valve(s) and open
manual pilot shutoff valve(s).
b. Depress the RESET button.
c. *Pre-Ignition ILK* fault is displayed on the Operator
Interface Module.
d. Safety shutdown occurs.
IMPORTANT
If the R7910 or R7911 SOLA Module fails to shut
down on any of these tests, take corrective action;
refer to Troubleshooting and the SOLA Module diagnostics and return to the beginning of all checkout
tests.
When all checkout tests are completed, reset all switches to
the original status. Remove any jumpers that you may have
installed for testing.
TROUBLESHOOTING
System Diagnostics
Troubleshooting control system equipment failures is easier
with the R7910 or R7911 SOLA Module self-diagnostics and
first-out annunciation. In addition to an isolated spst alarm
relay (audible annunciation), the R7910 or R7911 SOLA
Module provides visual annunciation by displaying a fault code
and fault or hold message at the S7999 Operator Interface
Module. The R7910 and R7911 SOLA Modules provide many
diagnostic and alert messages for troubleshooting the system.
Self-diagnostics of the R7910 and R7911 SOLA Modules
enables them to detect and annunciate both external and
internal system problems. Fault messages, such as interlock
failures, flame failures and false flame signals are displayed at
the Operator Interface Module and annunciated at the R7910
or R7911 SOLA Module by the ALARM LED.
The Operator Interface displays a sequence status message
indicating: STANDBY, PURGE, PILOT IGN, MAIN IGN, RUN
and POSTPURGE. The selectable messages also provide
visual indication of current status and historical status of the
equipment such as: Flame Signal, Total Cycles, Total Hours,
Fault History, Diagnostic Information and Expanded
Annunciator terminal status (if used). With this information,
most problems can be diagnosed without extensive trial and
error testing.
Diagnostic Information Lockout and Alert History Data are
available to assist in troubleshooting the SOLA Module.
The module provides diagnostic information to aid the service
mechanic in obtaining information when trouble-shooting the
system.
Diagnostic Information Index
The R7910 and R7911 SOLA Modules monitor digital and
analog input/output (I/O) terminals and can display the status
of the terminal at the Operator Interface Module. The display
shows the actual status of the terminal. If voltage is detected at
a digital I/O terminal, the LED turns green next to the terminal
72
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
energized, but if no voltage is detected at the terminal, the LED
will be red. Actual analog I/O values are displayed on the
operator interface module.
The LL master PID operates using a percent rate: 0% is a
request for no heat at all, and 100% means firing at the
maximum modulation rate.
Historical Information Index
This firing rate is sent to the slaves as a percentage, but this is
apportioned to the slave Solas according to the rate allocation
algorithm selected by the Rate allocation method parameter.
The R7910 and R7911 SOLA Modules have nonvolatile
memory that allows them to retain historical information for the
fifteen most recent lockouts. Each of the fifteen lockout files
retains the cycle when the fault occurred, the hour of operation
when the fault occurred, a fault code, a fault message and
burner status when the fault occurred. In addition to the lockout
files, the R7910 and R7911 SOLA modules retain fifteen alert
files.
For some algorithms, this rate might be common to all slave
Solas that are firing. For others it might represent the total
system capacity and be allocated proportionally.
For example, if there are 4 slaves and the LL master's percent
rate is 30%, then it might satisfy this by firing all four slaves at
30%, or by operating the first slave at 80% (20% of the
system’s capacity) and a second slave at 40% (10% of the
system’s capacity).
SERVICE NOTES:
1. Reset the device module by pressing the RESET pushbutton on the device or pressing a remote reset pushbutton wired into connector J10 or through the display. A
power-up reset causes an electrical reset of the module
but does not reset a lockout condition.
2. Use the connector screw terminals to check input or output voltage.
The LL master may be aware of slave SOLA’s minimum firing
rate and use this information for some of its algorithms, but
when apportioning rate it may also assign rates that are less
than this. In fact, the add-stage and drop-stage algorithms may
assume this and be defined in terms of theoretical rates that
are possibly lower than the actual minimum rate of the SOLA
control. A SOLA that is firing and is being commanded to fire at
less than its minimum modulation rate will operate at its
minimum rate: this is a standard behavior for a SOLA control in
stand-alone (non-slave) mode.
LEAD LAG
SOLA devices contain the ability to be a stand-alone control,
operate as a Lead Lag Master control (which also uses the
SOLA control function as one of the slaves), or to operate
solely as a slave to the lead lag system.
If any slave under LL Master control is in a Run-Limited
condition, then for some algorithms the LL master can
apportion to that stage the rate that it is actually firing at.
SOLA devices utilize two ModBus™ ports (MB1 and MB2) for
communications. One port is designated to support a system
S7999B display and the other port supports communications
from the LL Master with its slaves. Fig. 28 shows a simplified
wiring diagram connecting the system display with a 4 system
Lead Lag arrangement.
Additionally when a slave imposes its own Run-limited rate,
this may trigger the LL Master to add a stage, if it needs more
capacity, or drop a stage if the run-limiting is providing too
much heat (for example if a stage is running at a higher-than
commanded rate due to anti-condensation).
The Lead Lag master is a software service that is hosted by a
SOLA control. It is not a part of that control, but is an entity that
is “above” all of the individual SOLA controls (including the one
that hosts it). The Lead Lag master sees the controls as a set
of Modbus devices, each having certain registers, and in this
regard it is entirely a communications bus device, talking to the
slave SOLA controls via Modbus.
By adjusting the parameters in an extreme way it is possible to
define add-stage and drop-stage conditions that overlap or
even cross over each other. Certainly it is incorrect to do this,
and it would take a very deliberate and non-accidental act to
accomplish it. But there are two points in this:
1. LL master does not prevent it, and more important;
2. it will not confuse the LL master because it is implemented as a state machine that is in only one state at a
time;
The LL master uses a few of the host SOLA's sensors (header
temperature and outdoor temperature) and also the STAT
electrical inputs in a configurable way, to provide control
information.
for example:
— if its add-stage action has been triggered, it will remain
in this condition until either a stage has been added,
or
Lead Lag (LL) Master General
Operation
—
The LL master coordinates the firing of its slave Solas. To do
this it adds and drops stages to meet changes in load, and it
sends firing rate commands to those that are firing.
the criteria for its being in an add-stage condition is no
longer met; only then will it take another look around to
see what state it should go to next.
Assumptions
Modulating stage The modulating stage is the SOLA that is
receiving varying firing rate requests to track the load.
The LL master turns the first stage on and eventually turns the
last stage off using the same criteria as for any modulation
control loop:
• When the operating point reaches the Setpoint minus the
On hysteresis, then the first SOLA is turned on.
• When the operating point reaches the Setpoint plus the Off
hysteresis then the last slave SOLA (or all slave SOLAs)
are turned off.
First stage This is the SOLA that was turned on first, when no
slave Solas were firing.
Previous stage The SOLA that was added to those stages
that are firing Just prior to the adding of the SOLA that is under
discussion.
73
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Add-stage method, Add-stage detection
timing,
Add-stage request
Next stage The SOLA that will or might be added as the next
SOLA to fire.
Last stage The SOLA that is firing and that was added the
most recently to the group of slaves that are firing. Typically
this is also the modulating stage, however as the load
decreases then the last-added stage will be at its minimum rate
and the previous stage will be modulating.
An Add-stage method implements the criteria for adding
another stage. Criteria that may apply are the firing rate of a
stage or stages vs. a threshold, the amount of operating point
versus setpoint error seen by the master, the rate at which
setpoint error is developing, and the rate at which a stage or
stages are approaching their maximum or baseload firing rate.
Lead boiler The Lead boiler is the SOLA that is the first stage
to fire among those stages which are in the equalize runtime
(Lead/Lag) group. If a boiler is in the “Use first” group it may
fire before the Lead boiler fires.
Typically these use Add-stage detection timing to determine
how long these things have persisted. When all criteria have
been met for a sufficient time, then an Addstage request is
active.
First boiler A SOLA may be assigned to any of three groups:
“Use First”, “Equalize Runtime”, or “Use Last”. If one or more
Solas are in the “Use First” category, then one of these (the
one with the lowest sequence number) will always be the first
boiler to fire. If there is no SOLA in the “Use First” category and
one or more are in the “Equalize Runtime” category, then the
First boiler is also the Lead boiler.
66-1171—03
Drop-stage method, Drop-stage detection
timing, Drop-stage request
A Drop-stage method implements the criteria for dropping a
stage. Criteria that may apply are the firing rate of a stage (or
stages) vs. a threshold, the amount of operating point versus
setpoint error seen by the master, the rate at which setpoint
error is developing, and the rate at which a stage or stages are
approaching their minimum firing rate. Typically these use
Drop-stage detection timing to determine how long these
things have persisted. When all criteria have been met for a
sufficient time, then an Drop-stage request is active.
74
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
S7999B
AS LOCAL DISPLAY
COM1
120
VAC
L1
L2
MEAN WELL S-25-12
POWER SUPPLY
NEUTRAL (L2)
N
120VAC (L1)
L
COM2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+12
+12
GND
(C)
(B)
(A)
N/C
N/C
(A)
(B)
EARTH
GROUND
12 DC OUT +
V+
DC OUT
(COMMON GND)
V-
2
VADJ
A
B
C
A
MB1
WIRING KEY
1
DO NOT CONNECT THE S7999B TO TERMINALS 1 2 3.
THIS WILL RENDER THE DISPLAY INOPERABLE.
2
DISPLAY CAN ALSO BE CONNECTED TO MB2; A, B, C.
3
SOLA HAS TWO AVAILABLE MODBUS CONNECTIONS:
THIS CONFIGURATION REQUIRES ONE FOR SOLA
LEAD LAG COMMUNICATION AND ONE FOR A
S7999B SYSTEM DISPLAY.
A
B
C
1
C
A
MB1
B
2
3
ECOM J3
SOLA LL MASTER
AND DLAVE 1
3
LINE VOLTAGE
LOW VOLTAGE
DATA
B
MB2
C
1
1
2
3
ECOM J3
MB2
SOLA SLAVE 2
THERE IS NOT A CONNECTION AVAILABLE FOR A
LOCAL TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY (S7999B/C).
THE ECOM CONNECTION IS AVAILABLE FOR
CONNECTIONS OF THE S7910 LOCAL KEYBOARD
DISPLAY MODULE.
A
B
C
A
MB1
B
C
1
2
3
ECOM J3
MB2
SOLA SLAVE 3
A
B
MB1
C
A
B
C
MB2
1
2
3
ECOM J3
SOLA SLAVE 4
M29732
Fig. 28. S7999B system and lead lag wiring diagram.
Lead-Lag Operation
Assuming the Master SOLA controller remains address 1, the
address of the slave controllers in the system must have a
unique address (1–8) via the local display.
OEM Configurable parameters may be adjusted as part of the
OEM factory configuration and in the field using the System
Display with appropriate password permissions (see
“Passwords” on page 19). Specific parameters may also be
configured in the field by the local display.
Basic Operation
1.
Field Installation Configuration
1.
2.
The master and slave controllers are enabled via the
S7910 or S7999 display.
All SOLA controllers are programmed with a default
address of 1.
75
Firing rate determination – Parallel common-base limited
a. All boilers have a single assignable base load firing
rate.
b. Allocation
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
2.
3.
4.
5.
(1) As load increases:
(a)Until all stages are firing - No stage is
requested to exceed the common base load
rate.
(b)After all stages are firing - There is no restriction on the slave's commanded firing rate.
(2) As load decreases:
(a)As long as all available stages are firing There is no restriction on the slave's commanded firing rate.
(b)When at least one stage has been dropped No stage is requested to exceed the common
base load rate.
Rotation
a. The lead boiler is rotated based sequence order. The
lead boiler rotation time is a configurable OEM
parameter. Rotation is sequential by address (1-2-34; 2-3-4-1; etc.).
b. Rotation trigger occurs at the start of each new heat
cycle.
Source of heat for call – The call for heat originates at
the master boiler. This source can be configured to be an
external thermostat or via EnviraCOM Remote Stat.
Slave boiler lockout – If any slave is in lockout the master boiler will cause it to be skipped and all system load
setting calculation settings will be based only on available boilers.
Master boiler lockout – If the master boiler is in lock-out
then its burner control function will be skipped in the rotation the same as the slave controllers. However, the
master boiler function will continue to operate.
4.
System Component Failure Responses
1.
2.
If the system header sensor becomes disconnected from
the master boiler then the master boiler will control off of
one of the following OEM configurable actions
a. Disable - No backup will be used.
b. Lead Outlet - Outlet temperature of the lead boiler
will be used as the backup during firing.
c. Slave Outlet Average - Average of the outlet temperatures of all slave boilers that are firing will be used
as a backup.
If the sensor chosen by the above parameter is faulty
then the backup sensor provided may be used. When
burner demand is off and no burners are firing, then, for
either “Lead Outlet” or “Slave Outlet Average”, the lead
boiler's outlet temperature is used to monitor for burner
demand.
Local Display Configuration and Operation
1.
2.
3.
The configuration parameters available on the local display are edited in the Service Mode.
Access to the Service Mode is accomplished by pressing
both up/down buttons for 3 seconds.
Status and Operation
a. Slave status
(1) “Rmt” and “Adr” icons are on to show slave (follower) has been enabled.
(2) Current burner status is shown.
(3) To show slave CFH.
(a)Alternate “%” firing rate and actual (slave) Outlet temp to indicate slave CFH otherwise show
the Home screen.
b. Master status
66-1171—03
5.
76
(1) Rmt icon is on, Adr icon is off to show Master
(Leader) has been enabled.
(2) Current burner status is shown.
(3) Actual temperature LL (Header) temperature is
shown as described in number 5 on page 76
below.
(4) Pressing the up/down buttons allows setpoint
adjustment for LL-CH only (not LL-DHW or LLMix or others).
(a)All pump configurations must be done using
the PC Configuration tool in the OEM factories.
(5) To show Master CFH
(a)Alternate “CH” or “LL” or “Hdr” in numbers field
with the actual temperature to indicate LL CH
CFH.
Configuration
a. Continue scrolling through set-up screens until
“Remote Firing Control” screen is reached.
b. Rmt On/Off selection chooses to navigate the user
through the Master/Slave configuration as existing
today.
c. Set master/slave remote address as is done on currently on the local display.
d. The following parameters are mapped to Modbus
addresses.
(1) “LL” = LL Operation (3 user selections available)
(a)“Ldr”
• Master Enable
• Slave Enable
(b)“SLA”
• Slave Only Enable
• Master Disable
(c)“OFF”
• Master Disable
• Slave Disable
(2) HS = On/Off Hysteresis (One value used for all
LL boilers)
(a)“HS” for on and off hysteresis values.
• Only allow 1 setting for both on and off
hysteresis values.
• Must adhere to the strictest of either the HS
On or Off limits:
Highest value of the “low” range limit in
SOLA control
Lowest value of the “high” range limit in
SOLA control
• See SOLA Modbus specification for details.
Typical values: 2-15
(3) BL = Baseload common
(a)“BL” for baseload
(b)User selection 0 – 100 %
(4) Use existing timeout, Done button, and Next button functionality to enter these parameters.
(5) User selections will be selected by MMI.
(a)The local display does not adhere to the PCB
(OEM parameter selections used by S7999).
In normal display operation the display allows a user to
scroll through a list of temperatures with associated
icons (CH, Inlet, Delta, DHW, Stack, Outdoor) using the
Next button. With LL active the display will show the
header temperature at the end of the list of temperatures
as follows:
a. The characters “LL” are displayed in the number
field.
b. When the next button is pressed again the temperature is displayed.
c. If the Up or Down buttons are pressed then the LL
set-point is changed.
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Slave Operation and Setup
System Display Configuration
The following parameters are available for OEM configuration
and may be adjusted through a System Display or
programmed at the OEM production facility.
Slave Data Supporting Lead Lag
This data is provided by each slave SOLA control to support
operation when a LL master exists. Fig. 29 summarizes the
slave's registers and data:
Table 35. OEM Configuration Parameters
Master SOLA
LL frost protection enable
Slave SOLA
Slave mode
LL frost protection rate
Base load rate
Base load rate
Slave sequence order
LL CH demand switch
LL Demand to firing delay
LL CH set point source
LL Modulation sensor
LL Base load common
LL Modulation backup sensor
LL CH 4mA water temperature
LL Lead selection method
LL CH 20mA water temperature
LL Lag selection method
LL Add stage method 1
LL Add stage detection time 1
LL Add stage error threshold
LL Add stage rate offset
LL Add stage inter-stage delay
LL Drop stage method 1
LL Drop stage detection time 1
LL Drop stage error threshold
LL Drop stage rate offset
LL Lead rotation time
LL Force lead rotation time
LL Drop stage inter-stage delay
77
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
MASTER
SLAVE DATA
EnviraCOM
MASTER COMPATIBILITY
STAT
INPUTS
STAT2
TOD
SLAVE
CONTROL
READ
SLAVE CONTPOL (0X2400)
SLAVE
CONTROL
WRITE
SLAVE COMMAND
DEMAND
SUSPEND
FIRING RATE
OFF CYCLE FAN
PUMP X, Y, AND Z
TO BURNER CONTROL
TO FAN CONTROL
T
MASTER SERVICE STATUS
SLAVE STATUS
MODULATION pRATE
OUTLET TEMPERATURE
SLAVE COMPATIBILITY
SLAVES HAVE DEMAND
SLAVES ARE FIRING
MASTER’S HEAT DEMAND
CH
DHW
CH FROST
DHWFROST
MASTER’S ACTIVE SERVICE
NONE CH
FROST WWSD
TO
PUMP
CONTROL
SLAVE ACKNOWLEDGE
SLAVE HAS PRIORITY
SLAVE IS MODULATING
CH FROST PROTECTION REQUEST
DHW FROST PROTECTION REQUEST
FROST PROTECTION BURNER REQUEST
FIRING FOR LOCAL FROST PROTECTION
BURNER CONTROL STATUS
OUTDOOR
S2 4-20mA
SLAVE DATA
POLL READ
MASTER
STATUS
BROADCAST
SLAVE DATA POLL (0X2401)
SENSORS
S5
SLAVE ENABLE
SLAVE MODE
SLAVE SEQUENCE ORDER
SLAVE MBH CAPACITY
DATA ITEM
BURNER RUN TIME
PARAMETER
BASE LOAD pRATE
NOT A SEPARATE
REGISTER
TERMINALS
INPUT
OUTPUT
STATUS
MINIMUM MODULATION pRATE
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE
READ BY DISPLAY
LEAD LAG ModBus MESSAGE
DEMAND-TO-FIRING DELAY
“pRATE” = 0 TO 99.99% OF CAPACITY
T TIMEOUT: OLD DATA WILL EXPIRE
MASTER STATUS
M31186
Fig. 29. Master/Slave data transmission.
Table 36. Slave Data Supporting Lead Lag Parameters.
Parameter
LL - Slave enable
Comment
Disable, Enable via Modbus, Enable for SOLA Master
It enables or disables the “LL Slave” Demand and Rate module.
If the slave mode is set to Disable then:
none of the slave functions are active, LL - Slave Status register is zero, the LL – Master
Service Status register is not writable and is held at zero (this is important for pump control
which might otherwise use values in this location).
The LL - Slave Command register is writable but it is mostly ignored, however the Aux pump
X, Y, and Z are effective for any setting of the LL - Slave enable parameter.
The Enable for SOLA Master option LL - Slave write and LL - Slave read parameters; if
“Enable for SOLA Master” is not selected, then these parameters are disabled.
LL - Slave write
data
This allows the slave to accept command messages from a SOLA master.
LL - Slave read
data
This provides the slave status message to be read by a SOLA Master. It includes all of the
data that is read from a slave.
LL - Slave mode
Use First, Equalize Runtime, Use Last
If set to Use First, then this slave SOLA will be used prior to using other slave Solas with
other values.
If this parameter is set to Equalize Runtime, then this slave SOLA will be staged according to
a run time equalization. (Any Solas set to Use First will precede any that are set to Equalize
Runtime.)
If this parameter is set to Use Last, then this slave SOLA will be used only after all Use First
and Equalize Runtime Solas have been brought online.
66-1171—03
78
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 36. Slave Data Supporting Lead Lag Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
Comment
LL - Slave priority sequence order 0-255
Slave sequence order is used to determine the order in which the slave Solas will be used
(staged on) for those Solas with the same Slave mode setting. Numbers may be skipped, that
is 3 will be first if there is no 1 or 2.
Note: For Equalize Runtime purposes, 1 does not mean the SOLA will be used first every
time; that will vary over time based on the master's run time equalization scheme. In this case
the sequence number determines the relative order in which SOLA controls will be used in a
round-robin scheme.
If the slave sequence number value is zero, then the slave SOLA's modbus address will be
used instead.
If two Solas are set the same mode and both have the same sequence number then an alert
will occur and the order in which they are used will be arbitrary and is not guaranteed to be
repeatable.
LL - Demand-to-firing delay
mm:ss or None
This delay time is needed by the LL master to determine the length of time to wait between
requesting a slave SOLA to fire and detecting that it has failed to start. It should be set to the
total time normally needed for the burner to transition from Standby to Run, including such
things as transition to purge rate, prepurge time, transition to lightoff rate, all ignition timings,
and include some extra margin.
LL - Base load rate
rpm or %
This specifies the preferred firing rate of a burner, which is used for some types of control.
LL - Fan during off-cycle rate
rpm or % (0=disable)
This determines if or where the fan is to be operating during the standby period.
LL Master Operation and Setup
Overall control - The LL master has parameters that enable
and disable its operation.
Rate control - Each demand source has one or more
setpoints that may be active and an operation sensor. These
are used to detect turn-on and turn-off conditions. The
difference between operating point and setpoint is sent to a
PID block to determines the LL master's firing rate.
Periodic data polling - The LL master uses polling to discover
new slave SOLA devices and to periodically refresh the
information it has about a known slave SOLA devices.
Rate allocation - The PID block's output is used to determine
the firing rate of each slave SOLA using various rate allocation
techniques.
Slave control - The LL master sends each active slave a
command and also performs a slave status read for each
known slave device at a high rate. It also sends a Master
status broadcast that is heard by all slaves.
Stager - The stager determines when slave Solas should turn
on as the need for heat increases, and when they should turn
off as it decreases.
LL master operation is subdivided into the following functions:
Add-stage methods - Various methods can be used to
determine when a new stage should be added.
Slave status manager - The LL master operates a state
machine that keeps track of slave status for each SOLA that is
enabled as a slave device.
Drop-stage methods - Various methods can be used to
determine when a stage should be dropped
Demand and priority - Different sources of demand can
cause the LL master to operate in different ways. These
sources have a priority relationship.
Sequencer - The SOLA sequencer determines which SOLA
will be the next one to turn on or turn off.
Table 37. Overall Control Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
LL master enable
Disable, Enable
LL master Modbus port
MB1, MB2
The LL master may be disabled, enabled. If Disable is selected then all LL master functions
are inactive. If Enable is selected then it acts as the active bus master at all times on the
modbus port it is assigned to use by the LL Master Modbus port parameter.
LL operation switch
Off, On
This controls the LL master in the same way that the Burner switch controls a stand-alone
SOLA. If “On” then the LL master is enabled to operate. If this parameter is “Off” then the LL
master turns off all slaves and enters an idle condition.
79
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Periodic Data Polling Messages
A polled SOLA is read to determine the values of the following
data items:
a. The slave's type (compatibility) as indicated by the
LL - Slave type
b. The slave enable status LL - Slave enable
c. The slave mode as set in LL - Slave mode
d. The slave sequence order as set in LL - Slave
sequence order
e. LL - Demand-to-firing delay: mm:ss or None
See Table 38.
f. CT - Burner run time. See Table 38.
The LL master will poll to discover all the slave devices when it
starts up. Thereafter it polls the known devices to make sure
they are still present and to obtain updated status information.
It also periodically polls the entire slave address range to
discover any new slave devices.
Table 38. Data Polling Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
LL - Demand-to-firing delay
mm:ss or None
This delay time is needed by the LL master to determine the length of time to wait between
requesting a slave SOLA to fire and detecting that it has failed to start. It should be set to the
total time normally needed for the burner to transition from Standby to Run, including such
things as transition to purge rate, prepurge time, transition to lightoff rate, all ignition timings,
and some extra margin.
CT - Burner run
This parameter will be needed if measured run-time equalization is being used.
Slave Control Messages
After a slave device has been discovered, the LL master sends
each SOLA a command message.
If the commanded modulation rate is less than the burner’s
minimum modulation rate, then the burner should always
operate at its minimum rate.
There are 5 commands that might be sent:
SlaveState States
• DnFnM0: Demand=no, Run off-cycle fan=no,
Modulation=0%.
The LL master sends this message to all LL slaves when
none of these are firing. All slaves are commanded to turn
off and remain off.
• DnFyM0: Demand=no, Run off-cycle fan=yes,
Modulation=0%.
The LL master sends this message to Solas that are off,
whenever any slave is firing (due to either LL master control
or independent operation).
• DsFnM0 or DsFyM0: Demand=suspend, Run off-cycle
fan=y/n, Modulation=0%
The LL master sends this message to request a burner to
recycle and remain in Standby if it has not yet opened its
main valve (e.g. it is in Prepurge or PFEP) but to keep firing
if it has reached MFEP or Run.
Recovering A slave that is recovering is checked once per
second. If any of the following are true:
DataPollFaultCounter non-zero
StatusReadFaultCounter non-zero
AbnormalFaultCounter non-zero
then the slave's RecoveryTimer is cleared (it has not yet begun
to recover). If the RecoveryTimer reaches the RecoveryTime
then the slave has recovered and the SlaveState is changed to
Available. Each time it is checked (once per second) the
slave's RecoveryLimitTimer is also incremented and if the
slave has not yet recovered when this timer reaches the
RecoveryTimeLimit then:
If the slave is not enabled for the SOLA LL master or if its
DataPollFaultCounter or StatusReadFaultCounter is non-zero,
its SlaveState is Set to Unknown (which logically removes it
from the slave table). Otherwise the RecoveryLimitTimer is
cleared which starts a new recovery measurement and the
slave remains in recovery (indefinitely).
This message is used to abort the startup of a slave that is not
yet firing (because demand went away just before it was firing),
but to keep it on if it actually is firing (the LL master will
discover what happened in a subsequent status response).
Available A slave in the Available state remains that way until
the Stager moves it into the AddStage state or the
ProcessSlaveStatus action moves it to some other state.
The LL master also sends this message to a slave that is
OnLeave. (This ensures that if the slave is firing when it returns
to LL master control, it will stay that way until the master has
decided whether to use it; or conversely, if the slave stops firing
for some reason that it will not start up again until the LL
master has requested this.
AddStage A slave in the AddStage state remains that way until
the ProcessSlaveStatus moves it to Firing or some other state,
or the Stager times out and moves it into the Recovering state
if it fails to fire.
In either case, the command will be DsFyM0 to turn on the off
cycle fan if any other slave burners are firing, or DsFnM0 to
turn the fan off if the slave is the only slave that might (or might
not) be firing.
SuspendStage A slave in the SuspendStage state remains
that way until the ProcessSlaveStatus moves it to some other
state, or the Stager times out and moves it into either the Firing
or the Available state.
• DyFnM0-100: Demand=yes, Run off-cycle fan=no,
Modulation=0-100%
The LL master sends this message to turn the burner on
and to assign the burner’s firing rate.
Firing A slave in the Firing state remains that way until the
ProcessSlaveStatus moves it to some other state, or the
Stager drops the stage and moves it into the Available state.
66-1171—03
80
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
OnLeave A slave in the OnLeave state remains that way until
the ProcessSlaveStatus moves it to some other state.
Disabled A slave in the Disabled state remains that way until
the ProcessSlaveStatus moves it to Recovering.
Demand and Priority
LL MASTER DEMAND SOURCES
CENTRAL HEAT
LL CH DEMAND SWITCH
MASTER
HEAT DEMANDS
THE SOURCES ASKING
FOR HEAT. USED FOR
PUMP CONTROL.
DISABLE LL CH
STAT
EnviraCOM REMOTE STAT
FROST PROTECTION
LL MASTER FROST PROTECT ENABLE
WARM WEATHER SHUTDOWN
MASTER
ACTIVE SERVICE
THE DEMAND SOURCE
THAT IS CURRENTLY
CONTROLLING THE LL
MASTER.
LL WARM WEATHER SHUTDOWN ENABLE
LL WARM WEATHER SHUTDOWN SETPOINT
M31187
Fig. 30. LL Master demand sources.
CH DEMAND
Table 39. CH Demand Parameters.
Parameter
LL CH demand switch
Comment
Disable, STAT, EnviraCOM Remote Stat
The inputs that can function as the CH demand switch are: STAT, EnvironCOM Remote Stat.
If the CH demand switch value is Disable, the LL master does not respond to CH demand.
WARM WEATHER SHUTDOWN (WW-SD)
Table 40. Warm Weather Shutdown (WW-SD) Parameters.
Parameter
Warm weather shutdown enable
Comment
Disable, Shutdown after demands have ended, Shutdown immediately
81
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 40. Warm Weather Shutdown (WW-SD) Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
Comment
Warm weather shutdown setpoint Temperature or None
When warm weather shutdown is Disabled then it has no effect (i.e. the Warm Weather
Shutdown (WW-SD)) status shown on the priority diagram is false).
These two parameters are shared by the stand-alone SOLA control and the LL master and
have the same effect for either control.
If it is enabled then it uses a 4°F (2.2°C) hysteresis:
If WW-SD) is false, then when the Outdoor temperature is above the value provided by Warm
weather shutdown setpoint then:
If Shutdown after demands have ended is selected then any current CH demand that is
present prevents WW-SD) from becoming true; that is if CH demand is false then WW-SD)
becomes true.
Otherwise if Shutdown immediately is selected then WW-SD) becomes true, it immediately
causes CH demand to end.
If WW-SD) is true, then when the Outdoor temperature is below the value provided by Warm
weather shutdown setpoint minus 4°F then WW-SD) becomes false.
When warm weather shutdown is true then:
New occurrences of CH demand is inhibited.
DHW demand is not affected.
Frost Protection
If any slave is indicating CH or DHW frost protection, and
additionally that slave's BC - Slave status register indicates
burner firing is requested then the LL master's frost protection
burner demand will be true.
LL master frost protection is enabled with the LL - Frost
protection enable parameter.
The need for frost protection is actually detected independently
by each slave, which notifies the master whether frost
detection occurred in CH frost detection, and/or its DHW frost
detection, and whether it is severe enough to require burner
firing as well as pump operation. This is done via its BC - Slave
status parameter.
If the priority scheme allows the master to honor this demand,
then it will fire a single burner (the current lead burner as
specified by the sequencer) at the rate indicated by LL - Frost
protection rate: 0-100%. (100% represents 100% firing of this
boiler, and where 0% or any value less than the boiler's
minimum firing rate represents the minimum firing rate).
If LL - Frost protection enable is Enable, then the master's LL Slave write message, will indicate CH or DHW frost protection
or both as read from each slave's BC - Slave Status. This will
cause any slave pumps which are enabled to follow this status
to turn on without any other action required from the master.
66-1171—03
82
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Modulation
HEADER
ModBus
LL MODULATION TEMPERATURE
MASTER SERVICE
STATUS
ALL SLAVES KNOW WHAT
THE MASTER IS DOING.
USED FOR
PUMP CONTROL
MASTER ACTIVE SERVICE
MASTER HEAT DEMAND
LL MODULATION BACKUP SENSOR
DISABLE
LEAD OUTLET
OUTLET AVERAGE
LL MASTER FROST PROTECTION
TO
SLAVE
SOLAS
FROST PROTECTION RATE
BURNER ON/OFF
LL SLAVE DEMAND
DEMAND
OFF
HYSTERESIS
STAGING
ON
HYSTERESIS
PID
LL MASTER’S
SETPOINT
SLAVE COMMAND
A UNIQUE COMMAND
IS SENT TO EACH
LL SLAVE
RATE
ALLOCATION
RATE
FROM
SLAVE
SOLAS
P-GAIN
LL SLAVE FIRING RATE
I-GAIN
D-GAIN
SLAVE STATUS
EACH SLAVE TELLS LL
MASTER WHAT
IT IS DOING
M31188
Fig. 31. Modulation.
Modulation Sensor
Table 41. Modulation Sensor Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
LL Modulation sensor
S10
The LL master's modulation sensor uses the S10 sensor wired at J10 terminal 7 and 8.
If the LL master is enabled and its sensor is faulty then an alert will be issued.
LL Modulation backup sensor
Disable, Lead Outlet, Slave Outlet Average
If the sensor chosen by the LL Modulation sensor is faulty then the backup sensor provided
here may be used.
If Disable is selected then no backup will be used.
If Lead Outlet is selected then the outlet temperature of the lead boiler will be used as the
backup during firing.
If Slave Outlet Average is selected then average of the outlet temperatures of all slave
boilers that are firing will be used as a backup.
When the burner demand is off and no burners are firing then,
for either Lead Outlet or Slave Outlet Average, the lead boiler's
outlet temperature is used to monitor for burner demand.
83
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Setpoints
Table 42. Setpoint Parameters.
Parameter
LL CH Setpoint source
Comment
Local, S2 4-20mA
If the setpoint source is Local then the SOLA control's local setpoint system is used.
This setting enables the normal use of the CH setpoint, CH TOD setpoint, and the CH
outdoor reset parameters and functions.
If the setpoint source is S2 4-20mA then the setpoint is determined by the 4-20mA input on
S2, and the two parameters described below. If the 4-20mA signal goes out of range or is
invalid, and this persists for a specified time, then the setpoint source reverts to “Local”. In
this case once it has gone to “Local”, it remains that way until the 4-20mA signal is stable
again.
LL CH 20mA Water Temperature Temperature or None
CH 4mA Water Temperature
These provided the 20mA and 4mA temperatures for the interpolation curve. If either of these
have the None value, are invalid, are out of range, or are too close for interpolation, an alert is
issued and the setpoint reverts to “Local” when it is selected as 4-20mA.
LL CH setpoint
Degrees or None
This setpoint is used when the time-of-day input is off. If the ODR function is inactive then the
setpoint is used as-is.
If the ODR function is active then this setpoint provides one coordinate for the outdoor reset
curve.
LL CH TOD setpoint
Degrees or None
This setpoint is used when the time-of-day input is on. If the ODR function is inactive then the
setpoint is used as-is.
If the ODR function is active then this setpoint provides one coordinate for the shifted
(because TOD is on) outdoor reset curve.
LL CH ODR minimum water
temperature
Degrees or None
This specifies the minimum outdoor reset setpoint for the LL master. If the outdoor reset
function calculates a temperature that is below the temperature specified here, then this
parameter's temperature will be used.
If this parameter is invalid or None then the outdoor reset function will be inhibited and will not
run: if it is enabled then an alert is issued.
TIME OF DAY
The Time of Day has one sources of control: a switch contact.
Closed TOD is an on condition; open, then TOD is off.
• LL CH TOD setpoint
• LL CH ODR minimum outdoor temperature: degrees or
None
• LL CH ODR maximum outdoor temperature: degrees or
None
• LL CH ODR low water temperature: degrees or None
OUTDOOR RESET
The outdoor reset for the LL CH functions are implemented as
described for a stand-alone CH loop.
Demand and Rate
Each of the loops which implements outdoor reset and boost
has its own parameters. The parameters used by the LL
master are:
• LL setpoint
ON/OFF HYSTERESIS
Includes hysteresis shifting at turn-on, turn-off.
Table 43. On/Off Hysteresis Parameters.
Parameter
LL off hysteresis
LL on hysteresis
Comment
Degrees or None
The LL hysteresis values apply to all setpoint sources. The behavior of the hysteresis
function is identical to the behavior of the stand-alone CH hysteresis function, except:
• where stand-alone CH hysteresis uses the on/off status of a single burner, the LL
hysteresis uses the on/off status of all slave burners: this status is true if any slave burner
is on, and false only if all are off.
• where stand-alone CH hysteresis uses time of turn-on and turn-off of a single burner, the
LL hysteresis uses the turn-on of the first slave burners and the turn-off of the last slave
burner.
LEAD LAG PID
The behavior of the Lead Lag PID function is identical to the
behavior of the stand-alone CH PID function. The same gain
66-1171—03
scalers and algorithms are used.
84
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
• All stages are at their maximum (base load, or max
modulation) and one or more stages are rate-limited (such
as due to slow-start or stepped modulation limiting due to
high stack temperature, etc.) and the rate limited stage
recovers, changing from rate-limited to free to modulate.
(This is indicated by the Slave Status “slave is modulating”
bit: the changing of this bit from false to true is not, itself, a
trigger, but while it is true the rate allocator can assign to the
slave only the firing rate that it is reporting; thus the release
of this might allow more rate to be absorbed by the system.
It also might not do this, if for example the slave was in
anticondensation and thus the rate limit was maximum
modulation rate.)
• All firing stages are at their maximum (base load, or max
modulation) and a stage which was OnLeave returns in the
firing state and is available for modulation.
• An add-stage is in-progress and all firing burners are at their
limits (max modulation rate or base load) and then the new
stage becomes available.
RATE ADJUSTMENT
When the LL - Slave dropout/return compensation parameter
specifies a rate adjustment and a rate compensation event
occurs (a slave leaves while firing, or a slave returns) then rate
adjustment will alter the integrator value so that the
commanded rate compensates for the added or lost capacity.
INTEGRATOR COMPENSATION
A stand-alone SOLA includes a feature to smooth the
response when a rate override has occurred (such as delta-T
rate limit) causing the PID output to be ignored.
Whenever an override has occurred then, at the moment the
override ends, the integrator is loaded with a value that causes
the PID output to match the current rate, whenever this is
possible within the integrator’s limits. The Lead Lag PID will
implement similar behavior: The rate allocator will provide a
trigger that causes the integrator's value to be recomputed and
this trigger will activate whenever a rate allocation limit is
released; that is, this event will occur any time the system
transitions from the condition in which it is not free to increase
the total modulation rate, to the condition where this rate may
increase.
This also applies when the system is first starting up, that is, all
firing burners are at their limits (zero) because non are firing,
and thus when the add-stage is finished the system transitions
from no modulation at all, to modulating the first stage.
Implementation:
The examples below are ways in which this may occur, but in
implementation what is necessary, first of all, is to use a rate
allocator that assigns rate to each slave and can detect when
all of the assigned rate is absorbed, or if there is excess
requested rate that the firing stages could not absorb.
LEAD LAG BURNER DEMAND
Lead Lag burner demand will be present when Frost protection
burner demand is true, as described the section on Frost
protection. For the CH, and DHW demand sources, Lead Lag
burner demand will be true when one of these is true and also
setpoint demand from the hysteresis block is true.
Then:
1. Whenever the system is rate limited, that is, when A) all
firing stages are commanded to their respective maximums and also B) the PID is asking for more heat than
that, note that this has occurred by setting a flag and
also record total rate that the system absorbed (the total
of the commanded maximums, not the PID's requested
rate which might include excess).
2. Whenever the rate allocator completes an execution
pass and detects that both conditions of step 1 are no
longer true (demand has decreased) then it clears the
flag.
3. Whenever the rate allocator completes an execution
pass and detects both conditions of step 1 are true, and
it also detects that the total rate potentially absorbed by
the system (the commands have not yet been sent) has
increased from the value that was saved when the flag
was set, then it re-computes the integrator value based
on the old commanded maximum, clears the flag, and
actually allocates the old rate that was saved when the
flag was set.
Rate Allocation
All rate allocation methods share certain features.
The rate allocator first generates the LL - Slave Command.
Except for the Firing state, the value ultimately depends only
upon the SlaveState. The values are:
• Available
• AddStage
• SuspendStage depending on whether any other slave stage
is firing, no matter what SlaveState it is in.
• Firing
• OnLeave - same as SuspendStage This ensures that when
a slave returns and is already firing, it will remain firing until
the master decides what to do about that, or if it is not firing
it will remain off.
• Disabled - same as Available
• Recovering - same as Available
It next runs a rate allocator that depends upon the rate
allocation method. This routine fills in the modulation rate for all
Firing boilers.
Examples include:
• The rate allocator has encountered a limit such as base
load (for a “limited” rate allocation scheme) and this limit is
released.
Each rate allocation method also provides functions to return
identification of the modulating stage and the last stage, for
use by the Add-stage and Drop-stage methods.
85
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 44. Rate Allocation Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
LL - Base load common
0-100%
If set to zero, this parameter is disabled. For any non-zero value, it uses the individual base
load rates of each slave to be ignored by the LL master's routines and this common value to
be used instead. It is an easy way to set all base loads to the same value, without having to
set each slave.
Some rate allocation algorithms may specify the use of this parameter, and that the slave
base load settings are ignored.
LL - Rate allocation method
Parallel common-base limited
This selects the rate allocation method. This performs three purposes:
1) it determines how the LL master allocates firing rate to each active stage,
2) the modulating stage and last stage are determined for the Add-stage and Drop-stage
methods,
3) it determines the overflow rate and underflow rate and can provide this to staging
algorithms.
As load increases:
Until all stages are Firing: No stage is requested to exceed
the common base load rate.
OVERFLOW RATE AND UNDERFLOW RATE
The rate allocator knows the rate assigned to each stage, and
the requested rate, and thus can determine the difference
between these.
After all stages are Firing: There is no restriction on the
slave's commanded firing rate.
This difference has two forms: overflow (used by Add-stage
methods), underflow (used by Drop-stage methods).
As load decreases:
As long as all available stages are Firing, there is no restriction
on the slave's commanded firing rate.
When asked for rate overflow the threshold that is used is the
upper limit of the modulating stage per the current rate
allocation rules. Additionally this threshold may be shifted if the
Add-stage method is using a dRate/dt behavior. Rate overflow
is a positive or negative percentage offset from the threshold.
For example:
When at least one stage has been dropped: No stage is
requested to exceed the common base load rate.
Modulating stage Since all Firing stages receive the same
rate, any stage can be considered to be the modulating stage.
The one with the highest StagingOrder number is considered
to be the modulating stage.
If the modulating stage is at the staging threshold position
but the LL master is not asking for more heat than this, then
the overflow rate is 0%. If it is at this location (limited) or
above this location (unlimited) and the LL master is asking
for 10% more than the threshold value, then the overflow
rate is 10%. If it is below the staging threshold position by
5%, then the overflow rate is -5%.
Last stage The stage with the highest StagingOrder number is
the last stage.
Overflow and Underflow For the Parallel common-base
limited the LL - Base load common parameter provides the
overflow threshold.
When asked for rate underflow the threshold that is used is the
minimum modulation rate of the last stage. Additionally this
threshold may be shifted if the Drop-stage method is using a
dRate/dt behavior.
For the Parallel common-base limited the minimum modulation
rate provides the underflow threshold.
Rate underflow is a positive or negative percentage offset from
the threshold. For example:
Stager
The Stager is an internal program that manages the lead lag
functions. In all cases:
• The first burner turns on due to the combination of heat
demand (call for heat from a source) and setpoint demand
(operating point falls below the setpoint minus the on
hysteresis).
• The last burner (or all burners) turn off due to the loss of
burner demand which is caused by either the loss of heat
demand (no call for heat from any source) or the loss of
setpoint demand (the operating point climbs above the
setpoint plus the off hysteresis).
• In between those two extremes the Add-stage and Dropstage methods determine when staging occurs.
If the last stage is at the threshold position but the LL
master is not asking for less heat than this, then the underflow rate is 0%. If it is at this location and the LL master is
asking for 10% less than the threshold value, then the
underflow rate is -10%. If the last stage is 5% above the
threshold then the underflow rate is 5%.
Rate Allocation Methods
PARALLEL COMMON-BASE LIMITED
Allocation All stages that are Firing receive the same firing
rate. Only the LL - Base load common parameter is used for
base loading, the individual slave's base load values are
ignored.
66-1171—03
86
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 45. Stager Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
LL - Add-stage interstage delay
mm:ss
This specifies the minimum time that the Stager waits after adding one stage before adding
another stage or dropping a stage.
LL -Drop-stage interstage delay
mm:ss
This parameter specifies the minimum time that the Stager waits after dropping one stage
before dropping another stage or adding a stage.
Adding Stages
The internal algorithms that generate AddStageRequests are
called Add-stage methods. All methods work by observing
various criteria such as the Firing stages, the commanded rate,
or setpoint error.
Table 46. Adding Stages Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
LL - Add-Stage detection time1
mm:ss
This provides time thresholds.
LL - Add-Stage method1
Disable, Error threshold, Rate threshold, dError/dt and threshold, dRate/dt and threshold
In the descriptions below, the relevant AddStageDetectTimer is referred to as
AddStageDetectTimerN.
LL - Add-stage error threshold
degrees
This provides the error threshold as defined by the methods below.
LL - Add-stage rate offset
-100% to +100%
This provides the rate offset threshold as defined by the methods below.
Add-stage Methods
Examples:
Error threshold For error threshold staging, a stage is added
when the error becomes excessive based on degrees away
from setpoint, and time.
rate offset = 20% The add-stage condition will occur if the
modulating stage is 20% above base load for unlimited allocations, or, if limited, when there is 20% more rate to
distribute than can be absorbed by firing the stages at base
load.
Add-stage condition:
• The modulating burner(s) is at its (their) maximum position
per the rate allocation rules,
• The operating point is below the setpoint by an amount
greater than or equal to LL - Add-stage error threshold
rate offset = -20% The add-stage condition will be as
described just above, but the threshold is now 20% below
the modulating stage's base load rate.
When the Add-stage condition is false then
AddStageDetectTimerN is set to zero. (If the condition is true
then AddStageDetectTimerN is not zeroed and thus allowed to
run.) If this timer reaches or exceeds LL- Add-stage detection
timeN then AddStageRequestN is true.
To support this, the current Rate Allocation method asks for the
current “Overflow rate” - see the Rate Allocator section.
Dropping Stages
The internal algorithms that generate DropStageRequests are
called Drop-stage methods. One or two methods may be active
at any time. If two are active then their requests are OR'd
together. All methods work by observing various criteria such
as the Firing stages, the commanded rate, or Setpoint.
Rate threshold For rate based staging, a stage is added
based on the rate of the modulating stage.
Add-stage condition The modulating burner is at a rate that is
at or above the rate which is calculated by adding the LL - Addstage rate offset to the maximum position per the rate
allocation rules.
Dropping Stages Parameters:
Table 47. Dropping Stages Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
LL - Drop-Stage detection time
mm:ss
This provides time thresholds. They differ only in that: LL - Drop-Stage detection time is used
with DropStageDetectTimer In the descriptions below, the relevant parameter is referred to as
LL – Drop Stage detection timeN.
LL - Drop-Stage method
Disable, Error threshold, Rate threshold, dError/dt and threshold, dRate/dt and threshold
87
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 47. Dropping Stages Parameters. (Continued)
Parameter
Comment
LL - Drop-stage error threshold
degrees
This provides the error threshold as defined by the methods below.
LL - Drop-stage rate offset
-100% to +100%
This provides the rate offset threshold as defined by the methods below.
Drop-stage Methods
rate offset = 0% The Drop-stage condition will occur when
the last stage is at the minimum modulation rate.
Error threshold For error threshold staging, a stage is
dropped when the error becomes excessive based on degrees
away from setpoint and time.
rate offset = -20% The Drop-stage condition will occur if the
last stage is at minimum modulation and there is 20% less
rate to distribute than can be absorbed; that is, the rate allocator would like the minimum modulation rate to be lower
than it is.
Drop-stage condition:
• The modulating burner(s) is at its (their) minimum position
per the rate allocation rules,
• The operating point is above the setpoint by an amount
greater than or equal to LL - Drop-stage error threshold
When the Drop-stage condition is false then
DropStageDetectTimerN is set to zero. (If the condition is true
then
DropStageDetectTimerN is not zeroed and thus allowed to
run.) If this timer reaches or exceeds
LL - Drop-stage detection timeN then
DropStageRequestN is true.
To support this, the current Rate Allocation method asks for the
current “Underflow rate” - see “Rate Allocation Methods” on
page 86.
Sequencer
The sequencer determines which SOLA is next whenever an
Add-stage event occurs. It maintains the following variables:
Rate threshold For rate based staging, a stage is dropped
based on the rate of the last stage.
LeadBoilerSeqNum - sequence number of the current lead
boiler in the Slave Status table.
Drop-stage condition
The modulating burner(s) is at a rate that is at or below the
minimum modulation rate plus a rate offset.
Lead BoilerRunTime - the cumulative time that the current
lead boiler has been running
In all cases, if a boiler sequence number is needed and LL Slave sequence order is 0, then the boiler's modbus address is
used as its sequence number.
Examples:
rate offset = 20% The Drop-stage condition will occur when
the last stage is less than a threshold that is the minimum
modulation rate plus another 20%.
In all cases, if two boilers being compared have the same
effective sequence number, then the one that is selected is
undefined (either may prevail).
Table 48. Sequencer Parameters.
Parameter
Comment
LL - Lead selection method
Rotate in sequence order, Measured run time
This determines the selection method for lead selection and sequencing, as described below.
LL - Lag selection method
Sequence order, Measured run time
This determines the selection method for lag selection and sequencing, as described below.
LL - Lead rotation time
hh:mm or None
This determines the lead rotation time as defined below.
LL - Force lead rotation time
hh:mm or None
If this parameter is a non-zero time, then it is used to force the rotation of the lead boiler if it
stays on longer than the time specified.
Sequencer Add Boiler Selection
• Next are slaves that have the mode of Equalize Runtime.
When the add boiler routine gets to this group it first invokes
the Voluntary Lead Rotation routine (to make sure this is
done, but only once) and then selects an Available boiler, if
any, ordered according to:
• The first is the lead boiler per the
LeadBoilerSeqNum parameter.
The sequencer selects the next boiler to be added according to
a sorted order. This description assumes this is implemented
by assigning an ordering number and that the lowest numbers
are the first to be added.
• Any Available slaves that have a mode of Use First will have
the lowest ordering numbers. If two or more Use First
boilers exist, they are numbered according to their assigned
LL - Slave sequence order or Modbus address if this value
is zero, as described above.
66-1171—03
• The rest are the other slaves ordered according to
the LL –Lag selection method} parameter:
• If this parameter is “Rotate in sequence order”, then they
are ordered according to their LL – Slave sequence order or
Modbus address if this value is zero, as described above.
88
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
SLAVE MODE: USE FIRST, EQUALIZE RUNTIME, USE
LAST
• If set to Use First, then this slave SOLA will be used prior to
using other slave Solas with other values.
• If this parameter is set to Equalize Runtime, then this slave
SOLA will be staged according to a run time equalization.
(Any Solas set to Use First will precede any that are set to
Equalize Runtime.)
• If this parameter is set to Use Last, then this slave SOLA
will be used only after all Use First and Equalize Runtime
Solas have been brought online.
• If this parameter is “Measured run time” then they are
ordered according to their reported run time. If two have the
same measured run time, then either may be selected.
• Last are any Available slaves that have a mode of Use Last.
These will have the highest numbers. If two or more Use
Last boilers exist, they are numbered according to their
assigned LL - Slave sequence order or Modbus address if
this value is zero, as described above.
Voluntary Lead Rotation
The current lead boiler is identified by the LeadBoilerSeqNum
value. This value will change when the stager has asked the
sequencer for a boiler to add and either:
• the boiler identified by LeadBoilerSeqNum is neither
Available nor Firing (i.e. it has a fault or is OnLeave), or
• the LeadBoilerRunTime value exceeds LL - Lead rotation
time.
SLAVE PRIORITY SEQUENCE ORDER: 0-255
Slave sequence order is used to determine the order in which
the slave Solas will be used (staged on) for those Solas with
the same Slave mode setting. Numbers may be skipped, that
is 3 will be first if there is no 1 or 2.
NOTE: For Equalize Runtime purposes, 1 does not mean the
SOLA will be used first every time; that will vary over
time based on the master's run time equalization
scheme. In this case the sequence number determines the relative order in which SOLA controls will
be used in a round-robin scheme.
In either of these cases, the algorithm performed is:
If the LL - Lead selection method is “Rotate in sequence
order”, then
LeadBoilerSeqNum is incremented, and then new lead boiler
is the one that is a slave in Equalize Runtime mode that is
responding to the LL master (i.e. not OnLeave or Recovering,
but it might be Firing), and:
• has a sequence number equal to
LeadBoilerSeqNum, or
If the slave sequence number value is zero, then the slave
SOLA's ModBus address will be used instead.
If two Solas are set the same mode and both have the same
sequence number then an alert will occur and the order in
which they are used will be arbitrary and is not guaranteed to
be repeatable.
• If no boiler has this then the closest one with a
sequence number greater than this number is used,
or
• If no boiler has a greater sequence number, then the
one that has the smallest sequence number is used
(wrap around).
Sequencer Ordering Function
Part of the sequencer is called by the stager just before the
stager runs, to give the sequencer a chance to assign order
numbers to stages that very recently turned on, and to
maintain these in a sequence. It uses the StagingOrder item in
the Slave Status table for this purpose.
Otherwise when the LL - Lead selection method is “Measured
run time”, then the lead boiler is the one having the lowest
Measured run time value. If two have the same measured run
time, then either may be selected.
The sequencer ordering function examines all slaves and sets
to zero the StagingOrder of any stage that is not Firing.
The LeadBoilerRunTime value is then set to zero to give the
new lead boiler a fresh allotment.
This ensures that any stage that has left the Firing condition
recently is no longer in the number sequence.
NOTE: if the old lead boiler is the only one, then this process
may end up redesignating this as the “new” lead with
a fresh time allotment.
Next, skipping all of those that have 0 values in StagingOrder it
finds the lowest numbered StagingOrder and gives it the value
1, the next receive 2, etc.
Forced Lead Rotation
When the boiler identified by LeadBoilerSeqNum is firing and
also LeadBoilerRunTime reaches the LL - Force lead rotation
time parameter time then:
1.
2.
Thus if gaps have developed due to a slave dropping out these
are filled in.
Finally, the ordering function continues on, giving the next
numbers to and Firing stages which have a 0 StagingOrder
values (i.e. they recently were added, or they recently returned
from OnLeave).
The current lead boiler is noted.
Lead rotation occurs as described above under Voluntary Lead Rotation (this changes the designation, but
does not change the actual firing status).
Example:
SLAVE WRITE: DATA
This allows the slave to accept command messages from a
SOLA master.
Before
SLAVE READ: DATA
This provides the slave status message to be read by a SOLA
Master. It includes all of the data that is read from a slave.
89
After
Notfiring
3
0
Notfiring
0
0
Firing
2
Firing
5
Firing
0
Firing
4
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Sequencer Drop Lag Boiler Selection
Sequencer 1 Minute Event
When the stager asks the sequencer for a lag boiler to drop the
sequencer looks at the StagingOrder numbers of all Firing
boilers. If only one Firing boiler is found, or none are found,
then this selection function returns a value that indicates no
boiler may be dropped. Otherwise it returns an identifier for the
boiler having the highest StagingOrder number.
Part of the sequencer is called by the timing service at a 1
minute rate to implement lead rotation.
The 1 minute event checks the boiler identified by
LeadBoilerSeqNum. If it is Firing then the LeadBoilerRunTime
is incremented.
Alert and Fault Message information is shown in the appendix of the R7910 and R7911
SOLA Modules.
66-1171—03
90
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
APPENDIX A: PARAMETER GLOSSARY
R7910A parameter glossary can be found in Table 49.
Table 49. Parameter Glossary.
Parameter Name
Short Description
Ref. Page
20 mA CH pressure PSI or None
Establishes the pressures for the end points of the 4-20 mA inputs
31
4 mA water
temperature
Degrees
Establishes temperature for 4 mA input
27
20 mA water
temperature
Degrees
Establishes temperature for 20 mA input
27
Absolute max fan
speed
The fan will never be commanded to operate above the RPM provided by this parameter,
regardless of the rate request.
52
Absolute min fan
speed
The fan will never be commanded to operate below the RPM provided by this parameter,
regardless of the rate request, except by commanding it to turn off.
52
Alarm silence time
Alarms can be silenced for the amount of time given by this parameter.
64
Analog output
hysteresis
When modulating via 0-10V or 4-20mA, changes in the direction of PID output can be
limited by a small amount of hysteresis, to decrease the occurrence of actual control
reversals.
53
21
Annunciation enable This parameter determines whether the Annunciator features of the R7910 are active.
When disabled, the R7910 will ignore the Annunciator inputs (because the application does
not use this feature).
Annunciator 1
location
The location of the contacts monitored by the A1 annunciator input.
62
Annunciator 1 long
name
The long name (up to 20 characters) of the A1 annunciator input.
62
Annunciator 2
location
The location of the contacts monitored by the A2 annunciator input.
62
Annunciator 2 long
name
The long name (up to 20 characters) of the A2 annunciator input.
62
Annunciator 3
location
The location of the contacts monitored by the A3 annunciator input.
62
Annunciator 3 long
name
The long name (up to 20 characters) of the A3 annunciator input.
62
Annunciator 4
location
The location of the contacts monitored by the A4 annunciator input.
62
Annunciator 4 long
name
The long name (up to 20 characters) of the A4 annunciator input.
62
Annunciator 5
location
The location of the contacts monitored by the A5 annunciator input.
62
Annunciator 5 long
name
The long name (up to 20 characters) of the A5 annunciator input.
62
Annunciator 6
location
The location of the contacts monitored by the A6 annunciator input.
62
Annunciator 6 long
name
The long name (up to 20 characters) of the A6 annunciator input.
62
Annunciator 7
location
The location of the contacts monitored by the A7 annunciator input.
62
Annunciator 7 long
name
The long name (up to 20 characters) of the A7 annunciator input.
62
Annunciator 8
location
The location of the contacts monitored by the A8 annunciator input.
62
Annunciator 8 long
name
The long name (up to 20 characters) of the A8 annunciator input.
62
91
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 49. Parameter Glossary.
Parameter Name
Annunciator mode
Short Description
The annunciator may be fixed, in which the labels and locations of the inputs is preassigned, or programmable in which these things may be altered.
Ref. Page
62
Annunciator 1 short The short (3 letter) name of the contacts monitored by the A1 annunciator input.
name
62
Annunciator 2 short The short (3 letter) name of the contacts monitored by the A2 annunciator input.
name
62
Annunciator 3 short The short (3 letter) name of the contacts monitored by the A3 annunciator input.
name
62
Annunciator 4 short The short (3 letter) name of the contacts monitored by the A4 annunciator input.
name
62
Annunciator 5 short The short (3 letter) name of the contacts monitored by the A5 annunciator input.
name
62
Annunciator 6 short The short (3 letter) name of the contacts monitored by the A6 annunciator input.
name
62
Annunciator 7 short The short (3 letter) name of the contacts monitored by the A7 annunciator input.
name
62
Annunciator 8 short The short (3 letter) name of the contacts monitored by the A8 annunciator input.
name
62
Anticondensation > Anti-condensation (rate increase) may have a higher or lower priority than Delta-T (rate
Delta-T
decrease), when both of these are active and competing.
51
Anticondensation > Anti-condensation (rate increase) may have a higher or lower priority than forced rate (a
Forced rate
specific firing rate), when both of these are active and competing.
51
Anticondensation > Anti-condensation (rate increase) may have a higher or lower priority than Outlet high limit
Outlet limit
(rate decrease), when both of these are active and competing.
51
Anticondensation
Priority
Anticondensation is more important than (check those that apply):
Stack limit, Delta T limit, Slow start, Forced rate, Outlet high limit
51
Anticondensation > Anti-condensation (rate increase) may have a higher or lower priority than slow start (a
Slow start
specific firing rate slope), when both of these are active and competing.
51
Anticondensation > Anti-condensation (rate increase) may have a higher or lower priority than Stack high limit
Stack limit
(rate decrease), when both of these are active and competing.
51
Anti short cycle time Whenever the burner is turned off due to no demand the anti-short-cycle timer is started and 22
the burner remains in a Standby Delay condition waiting for this time to expire. Does not
apply, however, to recycle events or DHW demand.
BLR function
This parameter selects the function for the output terminal—J5 Terminal 5 and 6.
57
Burner name
This parameter allows each control to have a unique name.
21
Boiler pump cycles
Can be written to a new value (e.g. if the pump or controller is replaced).
6
Burner cycles
Burner cycle count. Incremented upon each entry to Run. Can be written to a new value
(e.g. if the burner or controller is replaced).
6
Burner run time
Burner run time. Measures the time spent in the Run state. Can be written to a new value
(e.g. if the burner or controller is replaced).
6
Burner switch
This parameter enables or disables the burner control. When it is off, the burner will not fire. 20
CH
anticondensation
enable
This parameter enables or disables anti-condensation for CH and LL demand.
CH
anticondensation
pump
If CH anti-condensation is in control of the burner and this parameter is Forced off, then the 51
CH pump is turned off to warm up the heat exchanger more quickly.
CH
anticondensation
setpoint
If CH anti-condensation is enabled, has priority, CH or LL slave is firing the burner, and the 51
outlet temperature is below this parameter then the firing rate set to the Maximum
modulation rate until the temperature exceeds this by 4 degrees F.
CH D gain
This gain applied to the Differential term of the PID equation for the CH loop.
51
27
CH Demand source Local, Modbus, 4-20 mA
27
CH demand switch
26
66-1171—03
The source of CH loop control can be specified to use different inputs.
92
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 49. Parameter Glossary.
Parameter Name
Short Description
Ref. Page
CH enable
This parameter determines whether the CH loop is enabled or disabled. It may be disabled 20
to turn it off temporarily, or because the application does not use this feature.
CH forced rate
For CH demand, if the CH forced rate time is non-zero, then the firing rate will be held at the 49
rate specified here during that time. This parameter is also needed as the starting point for
Slow State, even if the forced rate time is zero.
CH forced rate time For CH demand, if this time is non-zero then, upon entry to Run, the firing rate will be held
at the CH forced rate.
49
CH frost protection
enable
42
The CH frost protection feature can be enabled to turn the CH pump and possibly fire the
burner whenever the CH input sensor is too cold.
CH has Priority over Yes, No, Cancel
Lead Lag
20
CH hysteresis step
time
The time needed for one step of hysteresis shift, when the off hysteresis threshold or on
hysteresis threshold is shifted due to a burner-on or burner-off event, respectively. Zero
disables this function.
27
CH I gain
This gain applied to the Integral term of the PID equation for the CH loop.
27
CH maximum
modulation rate
Provides the upper limit of analog output or fan speed during modulation when firing for CH. 52
CH maximum
This parameter determines the maximum outdoor temperature for the CH outdoor reset
outdoor temperature graph. At the maximum outdoor temperature the setpoint will be the minimum water
temperature.
28
CH minimum
This parameter determines the X coordinate of one point on the ODR graph. At this outdoor 28
outdoor temperature temperature the setpoint will be the CH setpoint (or the CH TOD setpoint, if TOD is on).
CH minimum
pressure
Provides the minimum Steam Pressure used to calculate the 4-20mA remote controlled
setpoint.
31
CH minimum water
temperature
This parameter provides the CH setpoint when the outdoor reset temperature is at its
defined maximum.
28
CH ODR boost
setup
Degrees or None
28
mm:ss
CH ODR boost
recovery setup time
28
CH ODR maximum This parameter determines one point on the ODR graph. At the maximum outdoor
water temperature temperature, the setpoint will be the minimum water temperature.
28
CH ODR minimum This parameter determines the X coordinate of one point on the ODR graph. At that outdoor 28
outdoor temperature temperature, the setpoint will be the CH setpoint (or the CH TOD setpoint, if TOD Is on).
CH ODR minimum
water temperature
This parameter determines one point on the ODR graph. At the maximum outdoor
temperature, the setpoint will be the minimum water temperature.
28
CH off hysteresis
The off hysteresis is added to the CH setpoint to determine the temperature at which this
demand turns off
27
CH on hysteresis
The on hysteresis is subtracted from the Setpoint to determine the temperature at which
demand turns on.
27
CH outdoor reset
27
If outdoor reset is enabled then the current outdoor temperature is used to determine the
Setpoint by interpolation using CH Setpoint (or CH Time-Of-Day Setpoint if TOD is on), the
min water temperature, and the min and max outdoor temperatures.
CH P gain
This gain applied to the proportional term of the PID equation for the CH loop.
27
6
CH pump cycles
Can be written to a new value (e.g. if the pump or controller is replaced).
CH frost overrun
time
This time indicates how long the CH pump should remain on after frost protection demand 42
ends. That is, whenever the pump has been on due to frost protection and then this demand
ends, it always continues to run for the time given by this parameter.
CH sensor or Inlet
The sensor used for modulation and demand may be either the Outlet sensor or a 4-20mA 26
Header sensor input.
CH setpoint
This Setpoint is used when the time-of-day input is off. If the ODR function is active, this
Setpoint provides one coordinate for the outdoor reset curve, as described for the CH
Outdoor Reset parameter.
27
CH setpoint source
Local
S2 (J8-6) 4-20mA
27
93
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 49. Parameter Glossary.
Parameter Name
Short Description
Ref. Page
CH slow start
enable
This parameter enables or disables the slow start limit function for CH (or LL slave)
demand.
50
CH TOD setpoint
This Setpoint is used when the time-of-day input is on. If the ODR function is active, this
Setpoint provides one coordinate for the shifted (because TOD is on) outdoor reset curve,
as described for the CH Outdoor Reset parameter.
27
DBI time
None, 4 sec, 10 sec, 15 sec
59
Delta-T degrees
If the outlet is hotter than the inlet temperature by the amount given by this parameter, the 45
response defined for the Delta-T Limit Response will occur. Stepped Modulation Limiting will
occur as the temperature approaches this limit.
Delta-T delay
This parameter provides the delay time for the Delta-T limit.
45
Delta-T enable
This parameter enables or disables the entire delta-T limit function.
45
Delta-T exch/outlet
enable
Disable, Enable Delta-T, Enable Inversion Detection, Enable Delta-T and Inversion
Detection.
45
Delta-T inlet/exch
enable
Disable, Enable Delta-T, Enable Inversion Detection, Enable Delta-T and Inversion
Detection.
44
Delta-T inlet/outlet
enable
Disable, Enable Delta-T, Enable Inversion Detection, Enable Delta-T and Inversion
Detection.
44
Delta-T inverse limit This provides the time limit during which inverted temperature is tolerated when one of the 45
time
two inverse detection option is enabled.
Delta-T inverse limit If temperature inversion detection is enabled and it persists for the time given by the Delta- 45
response
T inverse limit time, then the response described by this parameter occurs.
The delay time used is the time specified by the Delta-T delay and the retry limit is the count
specified by the Delta-T retry limit.
Delta-T rate limit
enable
Disable then no modulation limiting occurs as the delta-T threshold is approached.
Enable, then the Stepped Modulation Limiting feature is active for Delta-T.
45
Delta-T response
If the temperature difference exceeds the limit and Recycle && delay is selected then the
burner control recycles and holds while waiting for a delay (see the Delta-T Limit Delay
parameter) to expire.
45
Delta-T retry limit
If either the Delta-T response or the Delta-T inverse limit response specify a retry limit, then 45
any recycles due to reaching the corresponding response threshold are counted. If this
count ever exceeds the “n” value, then a lockout occurs.
DHW
anticondensation
enable
This parameter enables or disables anti-condensation for the DHW sensor.
DHW
anticondensation
setpoint
If DHW anti-condensation is enabled, has priority, DHW is firing the burner, and the outlet is 51
below the temperature given by this parameter then the firing rate set to the Maximum
modulation rate until the temperature exceeds this by 4 degrees F.
DHW Connector
Type
Designates the Sensor type connected to the control for proper reading.
21
DHW D gain
This gain applied to the Differential term of the PID equation for the DHW loop.
35
DHW demand
switch
The source of DHW loop control can be specified to use different inputs.
35
DHW enable
This parameter determines whether the DHW loop is enabled or disabled. It may be
disabled to turn it off temporarily or because the application does not use this feature.
20
DHW forced rate
For DHW demand, if the DHW forced rate time is non-zero, then the firing rate will be held
at the rate specified here during that time. This parameter is also needed as the starting
point for Slow State, even if the forced rate time is zero.
49
DHW forced rate
time
For DHW demand, if this time is non-zero then, upon entry to Run, the firing rate will be held 49
at the DHW forced rate.
DHW frost overrun
time
This time indicates how long the DHW pump should continue to run after DHW frost
protection pump demand ends.
43
DHW frost
protection enable
The DHW frost protection feature can be enabled to turn the DHW pump and possibly fire
the burner whenever the DHW input sensor is too cold.
43
DHW high limit
This parameter enables or disables the DHW high limit function. It must be disabled when
the DHW input is used as a switch to indicate DHW demand.
50
66-1171—03
94
51
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 49. Parameter Glossary.
Parameter Name
Short Description
Ref. Page
DHW high limit
response
If Recycle && hold is selected, the burner control recycles and waits for the DHW
50
temperature to fall. It will remain in this holding condition until the DHW temperature is lower
than the DHW high limit temperature minus 5 degrees F.
DHW high limit
setpoint
If the DHW temperature reaches the value given by this parameter then a response will
occur.
50
DHW hysteresis
step time
The time needed for one step of hysteresis shift, when the off hysteresis threshold or on
hysteresis threshold is shifted due to a burner-on or burner-off event, respectively. Zero
disables this function.
35
DHW I gain
This gain applied to the Integral term of the PID equation for the DHW loop.
35
DHW maximum
modulation rate
Provides the upper limit of analog output or fan speed during modulation when firing for
DHW.
52
DHW modulation
sensor
This parameter selects the source of modulation control for the DHW system. If the selected 36
input is not a temperature (e.g. S1 is steam pressure for a steam control) then an alert
occurs and the DHW control subsystem is suspended.
DHW off hysteresis The off hysteresis is added to the DHW Setpoint to determine the temperature at which
DHW demand turns off
35
DHW on hysteresis The on hysteresis is subtracted from the DHW Setpoint to determine the temperature at
which DHW demand turns on.
35
DHW P gain
This gain applied to the Proportional term of the PID equation for the DHW loop.
35
DHW priority source Disabled, DHW heat demand
20
DHW priority
method
Boost during priority time, drop after priority time
20
DHW Priority Time
ODR Enable
When enabled, the DHW Priority Override Time is derated when the outdoor temperature is 35
below 32°F. When the outdoor temperature is at or above 32°F, the programmed time is
used as-is. For temperatures at or below -40°F, the programmed override time is derated to
zero (no override).
Between 32°F and -40°F, a linear interpolation is used. For example, at -4°F, DWH priority
override time is half the value provided by the parameter.
DHW priority versus This parameters determines the priority of DHW versus the CH call-for-heat, when both of 21
CH
these are enabled and active. (If DHW has a lower priority, it may be boosted to the highest
priority temporarily via the DHW Priority Override Time parameter.)
DHW priority versus This parameters determines the priority of DHW versus the LL slave call-for-heat, when
LL
more than one source is enabled. (If DHW has a lower priority, it may be boosted to the
highest priority temporarily via the DHW Priority Time parameter.)
21
DHW priority
override time
21
If this parameter is non-zero then a DHW demand will take priority over other demand
sources for the specified time. If this persists for longer than this time the priority will expire.
The timer is reset when demand from the DHW source turns off.
DHW pump cycles
Can be written to a new value (e.g. if the pump or controller is replaced).
DHW pump frost
protection overrun
time
This time indicates how long the DHW pump should remain on after frost protection demand 43
ends. That is, whenever the pump has been on due to frost protection and then this demand
ends, it always continues to run for the time given by this parameter.
DHW setpoint
This Setpoint is used whenever the time-of-day switch is off or not connected (unused).
35
DHW slow start
enable
This parameter enables or disables the slow start limit function for DHW demand.
50
DHW storage
enable
This parameter enables or disables the DHW storage feature. If it is disabled then the other 40
parameters below are ignored.
DHW storage off
hysteresis
This provides the off hysteresis as an offset that is applied to the DHW storage setpoint,
used during DHW storage demand.
40
DHW storage on
hysteresis
This provides the on hysteresis as an offset that is applied to the DHW storage setpoint,
used during DHW storage demand.
40
DHW storage
setpoint
The temperature setpoint that the boiler maintains during the DHW storage time.
40
DHW storage time
The time DHW storage temperature is maintained.
40
DHW time of day
setpoint
This Setpoint is used when the time-of-day switch is on.
35
95
6
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 49. Parameter Glossary.
Parameter Name
Exchanger T-Rise
enable
Short Description
This enables/disables temperature rise detection for the heat exchanger sensor S9 (J9
terminal 6).
Ref. Page
46
Fan during off cycle If this parameter is non-zero for a control that is enabled as a LL slave, then it provides the
rate
modulation rate (e.g. fan speed) that should be used when the LL master indicates this
burner should be off but should run its fan at the off cycle rate.
Fan gain down
This parameter determines how aggressively the fan controller changes the fan duty cycle 53
when the fan should slow down. It is the gain of a first-order filter (e.g. it is the I gain of a PID
control in which the P and D gains are always zero).
Fan gain up
This parameter determines how aggressively the fan controller changes the fan duty cycle 53
when the fan should speed up. It is the gain of a first-order filter (e.g. it is the I gain of a PID
control in which the P and D gains are always zero).
Fan min duty cycle
53
Whenever a variable speed fan is on it will never receive a duty cycle less than this
parameter's value. It should be set to the duty cycle at which the fan is guaranteed to keep
spinning (after it has started) so that it will never stall.
Fan speed error
response
If fan fails in Run and recycle is selected then the burner control recycles back to the
61
beginning of Prepurge, then continues with the normal burner startup process to attempt to
bring the fan up to speed again.
Firing rate control
If one of the manual modes is chosen then the Manual Rate parameter controls the firing
rate during the specified states.
Flame sensor type
Different kinds of flame detectors may be used. This parameter tells the control what type of 59
sensor is installed.
Flame threshold
The flame threshold can be adjusted to match various kinds of flame detectors and
equipment. It is specified in tenths of volts, where 0.1V = 0.1 microamp for a flame rod.
Forced recycle
interval time
After scheduled time of continuous run, system is recycled, specifically if inversion detection 59
is used to provide Safe Start.
Frost protection
anticondensation
enable
When Frost Protection is in control, either the CH or DWH anticondensation function is
enabled.
51
Frost protection
method
Determines what happens when Frost Protection (from any source) becomes active.
43
Heat exchanger
high limit
This enables/disables temperature rise detection for the heat exchanger sensor S9 (J9
terminal 6).
46
Heat exchanger
high limit delay
Specifies the delay time that occurs whenever a recycle occurs due to a Heat exchanger
high limit event and the specified response includes “Recycle...” The burner will remain in
the Standby Hold condition until the delay expires.
46
Heat exchanger
high limit response
Specifies response should “Heat exchanger high limit setpoint” threshold is reached.
46
Heat exchanger
high limit setpoint
Provides the setpoint at which a response occurs if “Heat exchanger high limit” function is
enabled.
46
Heat exchanger
retry limit
If the “Heat exchanger high limit response” specifies a retry limit, then any recycles due to 46
reaching the heat exchanger high limit threshold are counted. If this count ever exceeds the
“n” value, then a lockout occurs.
Heat exchanger Trise enable
Enabled, Disabled
46
IAS start check
enable
This parameter enables a start check for the Interrupted Air Switch input. If enabled, this
input must be off before leaving Standby, to prove that it is not shorted.
58
Ignite failure delay
When Recycle && hold after retries is selected as the response for an ignition failure, this
parameter provides the delay time for the hold.
61
Ignite failure
response
If ignition fails then several responses are possible. This parameter selects one of these
responses.
61
Ignite failure retries
This parameter provides the number of retries for an ignition failure, if the response to
failure of ignition includes retries.
61
Igniter on during
The igniter may be on throughout the pilot establishing period, or only during the first half of 60
it (early ignition termination). Ignored if DBI is selected.
Ignition source
Several outputs may be selected as the ignition source. This parameter selects one of
these.
66-1171—03
96
52
61
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 49. Parameter Glossary.
Parameter Name
ILK bounce
detection enable
Short Description
Enable, Disable
Ref. Page
58
ILK long name
The long name (up to 20 characters) of the ILK annunciator input.
62
ILK short name
The short (3 letter) name of the contacts monitored by the ILK annunciator input.
62
Inlet Connector
Type
Designates the sensor type connected to the control for proper reading.
21
Installation data
The installer may edit this parameter to provide installation information.
22
ILK/IAS open
response
During prepurge after a delay to establish airflow and during Ignition, MFEP, and Run, the
burner control requires the ILK to remain on. If it opens during these times, this parameter
determines the response: either a lockout or a recycle.
58
Interlock (ILK) start
check enable
If enabled, the control will check the ILK input as it exits the Standby condition in response 58
to demand. If on, the burner control will hold waiting for it to turn off. If this hold time expires
and the ILK is still on, a lockout occurs.
Interrupted air
This parameter enables the Interrupted Air Switch input. If enabled it is tested in the same
switch (IAS) enable way and during the same states as the ILK input.
58
LCI enable
The LCI input may be enabled as a recycle interlock, or this may be disabled. (It is normal to 58
disable the LCI here if it is to be used as a demand input for the CH control loop.)
LCI long name
The long name (up to 20 characters) of the LCI annunciator input.
62
LCI short name
The short (3 letter) name of the contacts monitored by the LCI annunciator input.
62
Lead Lag frost
protection enable
Enabled, Disabled
82
Lead Lag frost
protection rate
Set the protection rate as a percentage. 100% represents 100% firing of this boiler, and
where 0% or any value less than the boiler's minimum firing rate represents the minimum
firing rate.
82
Lead lag time of day This Setpoint is used when the time-of-day input is on. If the ODR function is active, this
setpoint
Setpoint provides one coordinate for the shifted (because TOD is on) outdoor reset curve,
as described for the LL Outdoor Reset parameter.
Not available
at this time.
Lightoff rate
52
This parameter specifies the analog output or fan speed used during Ignition.
Lightoff rate proving This parameter specifies the input used to confirm the Prepurge rate has been reached.
59
LL - Base load rate
This specifies the preferred firing rate of a burner, which is used for some types of control.
79
LL - Demand-tofiring delay
This delay time is needed by the LL master to determine the length of time to wait between 79
requesting a slave SOLA to fire and detecting that it has failed to start. It should be set to
the total time normally needed for the burner to transition from Standby to Run, including
such things as transition to purge rate, prepurge time, transition to lightoff rate, all ignition
timings, and include some extra margin.
LL - Fan during offcycle rate
This determines if or where the fan is to be operating during the standby period.
79
LL master enable
Disable, Enable
79
LL master Modbus
port
The LL master may be disabled, enabled. If Disable is selected then all LL master functions 79
are inactive. If Enable is selected then it acts as the active bus master at all times on the
modbus port it is assigned to use by the LL Master Modbus port parameter.
LL operation switch This controls the LL master in the same way that the Burner switch controls a stand-alone 79
SOLA. If “On” then the LL master is enabled to operate. If this parameter is “Off” then the LL
master turns off all slaves and enters an idle condition.
LL - Slave enable
It enables or disables the “LL Slave” Demand and Rate module.
LL - Slave mode
If set to Use First, then this slave SOLA will be used prior to using other slave Solas with
78
other values. If this parameter is set to Equalize Runtime, then this slave SOLA will be
staged according to a run time equalization. (Any Solas set to Use First will precede any
that are set to Equalize Runtime.) If this parameter is set to Use Last, then this slave SOLA
will be used only after all Use First and Equalize Runtime Solas have been brought online.
LL - Slave priority
sequence order
Slave sequence order is used to determine the order in which the slave Solas will be used
(staged on) for those Solas with the same Slave mode setting. Numbers may be skipped,
that is 3 will be first if there is no 1 or 2.
LL - Slave read
This provides the slave status message to be read by a SOLA Master. It includes all of the 78
data that is read from a slave.
97
78
79
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 49. Parameter Glossary.
Parameter Name
Short Description
Ref. Page
LL - Slave write
This allows the slave to accept command messages from a SOLA master.
78
Manual firing rate
This parameter specifies the analog output or fan speed during burner modulation, when
the Firing rate control parameter specifies Manual mode.
52
MFEP
This parameter provides choices for the duration of the MFEP (main flame establishing
period) time. Flame must remain on throughout the MFEP or a response occurs. Not
needed and ignored unless the Pilot type is Interrupted.
61
MFEP flame failure
response
If flame fails in the Main Flame Establishing Period and recycle is selected then the burner 61
control recycles back to the beginning of Prepurge, then continues with the normal burner
startup process to attempt to light the burner again.
Minimum
modulation rate
Provides the lower limit of analog output or fan speed during modulation (this is for both CH 52
and DHW).
Modulation output
This parameter selects the modulation output. The R7910 software responds by driving the 52
appropriate circuit to provide modulation of firing rate.
Modulation rate
source
If the modulation rate source is Local, then the control’s PID algorithm determines the
modulation rate.
If the modulation rate source is S2 4-20mA, then the modulation rate is determined by the
S2 4-20mA modulation routine that exists in prior controls. If this sensor is invalid then the
control behaves as if Local were selected.
Modulation sensor
The selected input provides the temperature clearance for modulation control.
27
As a startup check, if the CH Loop is enabled for a hydronic system, and if the select sensor
is not a temperature input, then this causes an alert and forces the CH loop to suspend.
NTC sensor type
The sensors used may all be the 10K NTC type in which safety sensors are redundant, or
all be a 12K NTC type in which no sensors are redundant and external temperature limit
devices are required. The latter is for MCBA retrofit compatibility.
OEM identification
The OEM may provide identification information here.
22
Outdoor Connector
Type
Designates the Sensor type connected to the control for proper reading.
21
Outdoor frost
protection setpoint
This parameter provides the setpoint for frost protection based on outdoor temperature.
When the outdoor temperature falls below this threshold then frost protection will be active.
Outlet Connector
Type
Designates the Sensor type connected to the control for proper reading.
21
Outlet high limit
enable
Used to set the Outlet high limit on or off.
47
Outlet high limit
response
If Recycle && hold is selected, the burner control recycles and waits for the outlet
47
temperature to fall. It will remain in this holding condition until the outlet temperature is lower
than the outlet high limit temperature minus 5 degrees F.
Outlet high limit
setpoint
If the outlet temperature reaches the value given by this parameter, a response will occur.
Outlet T-Rise enable This enables/disables temperature rise detection for the outlet sensor S3 (J8 terminal 8).
PFEP
27
58
47
46
This parameter provides choices for the duration of the pilot flame establishing period.
60
Flame must be on at the end of this period. This parameter is ignored if DBI (Direct Burner
Ignition) is selected.
PII enable
This parameter enables the Pre-Ignition Interlock input. If disabled the PII input is ignored.
58
PII long name
The long name (up to 20 characters) of the PII annunciator input.
62
PII short name
The short (3 letter) name of the contacts monitored by the PII annunciator input.
62
Pilot test hold
If the Pilot type is Interrupted or Intermittent and this parameter is enabled then the burner 58
control sequence will hold (forever) at 1 second into the Ignition state, while monitoring the
flame via a 15 second timer.
Pilot type
Interrupted pilot turns off after MFEP (main flame establishing period). Intermittent pilot
59
remains on during the Run period (no MFEP). DBI (direct burner ignition) indicates the main
flame is lit directly using a 4 second ignition period.
Plate preheat delay Whenever the Preheat block is false, it monitors the Tap demand block's output and
after tap
operates a timer that ensures preheat will not begin too soon after a tap demand has
recently ended.
66-1171—03
98
38
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 49. Parameter Glossary.
Parameter Name
Short Description
Ref. Page
Plate preheat off
hysteresis
The preheat off threshold is calculated as:
TOFF = Plate preheat setpoint + Plate preheat off hysteresis
If the preheat block is True, then it becomes False when:
• Tap during Preheat is recognized (see below) OR
• Both
• DHW sensor temperature >= TOFF, AND
• The preheat minimum on time has elapsed.
38
Plate preheat
minimum on time
This parameter provides the minimum on time for preheating.
39
Plate preheat on
hysteresis
The preheat on threshold is calculated as:
TON = Plate preheat setpoint - Plate preheat on hysteresis
If the preheat block is False, then it is Set (becomes True) when:
1. Tap demand is false, AND
2. The preheat delay-after-tap time has elapsed, AND
3. DHW sensor temperature <= TON, AND
4. The above have remained true for the time specified by:
Plate preheat on recognition time
That is, whenever conditions 1, 2, or 3 are not true, a preheat recognition timer is reset.
Whenever they are all true then the timer is allowed to run. If the time elapses then the
preheat block becomes true (preheat is active, and this causes the plate demand to be
true).
39
Plate preheat on
recognition time
This parameter provides the time duration for recognizing that preheat demand exists.
38
Plate preheat
setpoint
This parameter provides the DHW setpoint used when firing for preheat. It also is used as
the basis for detecting the need to preheat.
38
Postpurge rate
This parameter specifies the analog output or fan speed used during Postpurge.
52
Postpurge time
This parameter sets the burner control's postpurge time. Setting this parameter to zero
disables prepurge.
58
Preignition time
hr:mm:ss
60
Prepurge rate
This parameter specifies the analog output or fan speed used during Prepurge.
52
Prepurge time
This parameter sets the burner control's prepurge time. Setting this parameter to zero
disables prepurge.
58
Pulses per
revolution
The number of pulses per revolution of the fan is provided by this parameter. (Typically it is 53
the number of Hall-effect sensors that the fan contains.)
Pump exercise
interval
This parameter specifies the maximum number of days that a pump can be off. If this limit is 56
reached then the pump is turned on for the specified exercise time. If the interval is zero
then this exercise function is disabled.
Pump exercise time This parameter specifies the amount of time that a pump remains on, when it has been
turned on due to the exercise interval. If this time is zero then the exercise function is
disabled.
56
Purge rate proving
This parameter specifies the input used to confirm the Prepurge rate has been reached.
59
PWM frequency
This parameter provides the frequency of the pulse-width modulation for variable speed fan 53
control.
Run flame failure
response
If flame fails in Run and recycle is selected then the burner control recycles back to the
61
beginning of Prepurge, then continues with the normal burner startup process to attempt to
light the burner again.
Run stabilization
time
During run stabilization the modulation rate is held at the Lightoff Rate parameter setting
58
and is released for modulation only after the hold time given by this parameter has expired.
If this parameter is zero then there is no stabilization time.
Slow down ramp
Whenever the burner is firing it will be commanded to decrease its RPM no faster than the 53
rate provided by this parameter.
Slow start ramp
When slow start limiting is effective, the modulation rate will increase no more than the
amount per minute given by this parameter.
Slow start setpoint
If slow start limiting is enabled and the outlet temperature is less than the temperature
50
provided by this parameter, slow start rate limiting is effective, whereas whenever the outlet
temperature is above this value, slow start limiting has no effect.
Spark Voltage
Spark voltage configuration for Safety uC
99
50
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 49. Parameter Glossary.
Parameter Name
Short Description
Ref. Page
Speed up ramp
Whenever the burner is firing it will be commanded to increase its RPM no faster than the
rate provided by this parameter.
53
Stack Connector
Type
Designates the Sensor type connected to the control for proper reading.
21
Stack limit delay
This parameter provides the delay time for the Stack limit.
47
Stack limit enable
This parameter enables or disables the entire stack temperature limit function.
47
Stack limit response For Recycle and Delay, the burner control recycles and holds while waiting for a delay (see 47
the Stack Limit Delay parameter) to expire, and after the delay it tries again.
Stack limit setpoint
If the stack temperature exceeds the temperature given by this parameter then the
response defined for the Stack Limit Response parameter will occur. As the temperature
approaches this limit, the Stepped Modulation Limiting function is active.
47
Standby Rate
Specifies the analog output of fan speed used during standby or demand off time.
52
Steam 4-20mA
remote
Allows modulation from source other than pressure sensor.
31
Steam D gain
Gain applied to the differential
31
Steam enable
Disable/enable steam feature.
30
Steam demand
source
The source of Steam loop control can be specified to use different inputs.
30
Steam hysteresis
step time
Time for each step.
31
Steam I gain
Gain applied to the Integral.
31
Steam min.
pressure
Provides minimum pressure used to calculate the 4-20ma setpoint for 4ma.
31
Steam P gain
Gain applied to the Proportional.
31
Steam pressure
off hysteresis,
on hysteresis
On or Off hysteresis adjusted to the setpoint at which this demand turns off or on.
31
Steam pressure
setpoint
Pressure Control setpoint
31
Steam sensor
The sensor used for modulation and demand - typically a 4-20ma source.
30
Steam time of day
setpoint
Provides the steam pressure setpoint when TOD is on.
31
System pump
cycles
Can be written to a new value (e.g. if the pump or controller is replaced).
6
T-Rise degrees per
second limit
For any input that has T-rise detection enabled, this parameter provides the maximum rate 46
of temperature increase that will be allowed. If the temperature increases at a rate greater
than this, and this rate of increase persists for 4 seconds then the response specified by Trise response occurs.
T-Rise response
Specifies response should “T-Rise degrees per second limit” is exceeded.
46
T-rise delay
Specifies the delay time that occurs whenever a recycle occurs due to a T-rise event and
the specified response includes “Recycle...” The burner will remain in the Standby Hold
condition until the delay expires.
46
T-rise retry limit
If the “T-rise response” specifies a retry limit, then any recycles due to reaching the
corresponding response threshold are counted.
46
Tap detect degrees
per second
This tap demand “set” criteria depends on rate of change of the DHW sensor. The rate of
change of this temperature is monitored.
37
Tap detect minimum Once a tap detect event has occurred, and the Tap demand block is Set, it remains true for 38
on time
at least the time provided by this parameter. If DHW loses control due to priority, the timer is
restarted, so that when Tap demand again gains control of the burner it remains in this
condition for the full minimum on time.
Tap detect on
threshold
66-1171—03
-17 °C to 82 °C (-0 °F to 180 °F)
37
100
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 49. Parameter Glossary.
Parameter Name
Short Description
Ref. Page
Tap detect on
hysteresis
37
The second tap demand “set” criteria depends on the value of the DHW sensor. If the
temperature is less than or equal to the threshold given by subtracting this parameter from
the normal DHW setpoint, and if this condition has persisted for the time specified by the
Tap detect recognition time parameter, the Tap demand block is “Set” (Tap demand
becomes true and the minimum on timer is started).
Tap detect on
recognition time
This parameter provides the time for a Tap detect event due to the Tap detect on hysteresis 37
parameter, as described just above.
Tap stop Inlet-DHW One criteria for asserting “Clr” is based on the difference between the DHW and the Inlet
degrees
temperature, calculated as: Inlet - DHW. When this value is positive and is greater than or
equal to the degrees given by this parameter, tap demand’s “Clr” input is asserted.
38
Tap stop Outlet-Inlet The other criteria for asserting “Clr” is based on the difference between the Outlet and the 38
degrees
Inlet temperature, calculated as: Outlet - Inlet. When this value is negative or is less than or
equal to the degrees given by this parameter, tap demand’s “Clr” input is asserted.
Temperature units
This parameter determines whether temperature is represented in units of Fahrenheit or
Celsius degrees.
22
Warm Weather
Shutdown
Enable, Disable, Shutdown after demands have ended, Shutdown immediately
20
Warm Weather
Shutdown Setpoint
Temperature, None
21
XX pump output
This allows the XX pump function to be disconnected or to be attached to any of the pump 55
outputs.
If two pump blocks are connected to the same pump output then their signals are effectively
OR'd together as shown in Fig. 22.
XX pump control
The XX pump can be turned on manually, or it can be set to operate automatically. If it is
turned on then it remains on until changed back to Auto.
55
XX pump start delay When the pump demand changes from off to on, this delay time is used to delay the start of 56
the pump. The pump then starts after the delay expires, assuming that the demand is still
present.
A delay time of zero disables the delay.
For a stand-alone (non-slave) SOLA, this delay is skipped and does not occur if it is already
firing when the pump demand off-to-on event occurs.
For a SOLA in slave mode, this delay is skipped and does not occur if the “Master Service
Status” (defined in the LL specification and noted in the drawing) informs the slave SOLA
that some slave burner in the system is already firing, when the pump demand off-to-on
event occurs.
XX pump overrun
time
56
This time indicates how long the pump should remain on after pump demand ends.
A time of zero disables the overrun.
However, a pump should overrun to use up the last of the heat only if it is the last pump
running.
Therefore: For a stand-alone SOLA if any local service is active then this status cancels any
overrun that is in-progress.
For a slave SOLA if any master service is active at this time this status cancels any overrun
that is in-progress.
XX pump cycles
56
The XX pump cycle counters are mapped to the physical cycle counters; there is one
counter for each of the three physical pump outputs and this counter is visible via this
parameter, for whichever pump block (or blocks) are connected to it via the block's XX
pump output parameter. It is possible for two (or more) pump functions to be assigned to the
same physical pump. In this case, that physical pump's cycle counter is visible in each
pump control block. A pump cycle counter has the range 0 through 999,999 and it can be
restarted if a pump is replaced.
101
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
APPENDIX B: HYDRONIC DEVICE PARAMETER WORKSHEET EXAMPLE
Table 50 is an example of a completed parameter worksheet.
Table 50. Example of a Completed Device Parameter Worksheet.
Parameter Name
Burner cycle count
Customer
Choice - Hidden,
Read Only or
Password
protected
Minimum Range
Read Only
Default Setting
Maximum Range Parameter Units
0
Cycles
Burner run time
Read Only
0
Hours
CH pump cycles
Read Only
0
Cycles
DHW pump cycles
Read Only
0
Cycles
System pump cycles
Read Only
0
Cycles
Boiler pump cycles
Read Only
0
Cycles
Auxiliary pump cycles
Read Only
0
Cycles
Temperature units
Read Only
A:Fahrenheit
Antishort cycle time
Read Only
1m 0s
Alarm silence time
Read Only
5m 0s
Burner name
Read Only
mmm:ss
mmm:ss
20 chars
Installation data
Read Only
20 chars
OEM identification
Read Only
20 chars
Modulation output
Hidden
B:Demand rate is
in % units
CH maximum modulation
rate
Read Only
100%
% | RPM
DHW maximum modulation
rate
Read Only
100%
% | RPM
Minimum modulation rate
Read Only
0%
% | RPM
Prepurge rate
Read Only
100%
% | RPM
Lightoff rate
Read Only
25%
% | RPM
Postpurge rate
Read Only
25%
% | RPM
CH forced rate
Read Only
25%
% | RPM
CH forced rate time
Read Only
1m 0s
mmm:ss
DHW forced rate
Read Only
25%
% | RPM
DHW forced rate time
Read Only
120m 0s
mmm:ss
Burner switch
Read Only
Yes/True/On
Firing rate control
Read Only
A:Automatic firing
Manual firing rate
Read Only
25%
Analog output hysteresis
Read Only
0
CH enable
Read Only
Enabled
CH demand source
Read Only
D:Sensor & LCI
CH sensor
Read Only
CH setpoint
Read Only
% | RPM
20
A:Outlet sensor
32°F 0°C
180°F 82°C
240°F 116°C
CH tod setpoint
Read Only
32°F 0°C
160°F 71°C
240°F 116°C
CH on hysteresis
Read Only
2°F 1°C
15°F 8°C
100°F 56°C
CH off hysteresis
Read Only
2°F 1°C
15°F 8°C
100°F 56°C
CH outdoor reset enable
Read Only
66-1171—03
Disabled
102
1 to 10
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 50. Example of a Completed Device Parameter Worksheet. (Continued)
Parameter Name
Customer
Choice - Hidden,
Read Only or
Password
protected
Minimum Range
Default Setting
Maximum Range Parameter Units
CH P gain
Read Only
50
400
CH I gain
Read Only
50
400
CH D gain
Read Only
0
400
CH hysteresis step time
Read Only
1m 0s
Ignition source
Read Only
A:Internal ignition
(spark)
BLR HSI function
Read Only
A:Blower motor
Igniter on during
Read Only
A:On throughout
PFEP
Pilot type
Read Only
A:Interrupted (off
during Run)
Flame sensor type
Read Only
A:No flame sensor
Purge rate proving
Read Only
B:Prove via HFS
terminal
Lightoff rate proving
Read Only
B:Prove via LFS
terminal
Prepurge time
Read Only
0m 30s
mmm:ss
Preignition time
Read Only
0m 0s
mmm:ss
mmm:ss
PFEP
Read Only
C:10 seconds
MFEP
Read Only
C:10 seconds
Run stabilization time
Read Only
0m 10s
mmm:ss
Postpurge time
Read Only
0m 15s
mmm:ss
Interlock start check enable
Read Only
Disabled
Interlock open response
Read Only
A:Lockout
Ignite failure response
Read Only
A:Lockout
Ignite failure retries
Read Only
A:Number of
retries not set
Ignite failure delay
Read Only
5m 0s
MFEP flame failure response Read Only
A:Lockout
Run flame failure response
Read Only
A:Lockout
Pilot test hold
Hidden
Disabled
NTC sensor type
Read Only
A:10K dual safety
Interrupted air switch enable Read Only
A:no IAS
IAS start check enable
Enabled
Hidden
LCI enable
Read Only
Enabled
PII enable
Read Only
Enabled
mmm:ss
Flame threshold
Read Only
2
8
140
.1 Volts/uA
Absolute max fan speed
Read Only
500
5000
7000
RPM
Absolute min fan speed
Read Only
500
800
5000
RPM
PWM frequency
Read Only
Pulses per revolution
Read Only
Fan speed up ramp
Read Only
D:3000 Hz
1
3
10
0
RPM/sec
Fan slow down ramp
Read Only
0
Fan gain up
Read Only
50
100
Fan gain down
Read Only
50
100
103
RPM/sec
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 50. Example of a Completed Device Parameter Worksheet. (Continued)
Parameter Name
Customer
Choice - Hidden,
Read Only or
Password
protected
Minimum Range
Default Setting
Maximum Range Parameter Units
Fan min duty cycle
Read Only
10
CH pump output
Read Only
A:No pump
assignment
CH pump control
Read Only
A:Automatic pump
control
CH pump overrun time
Read Only
1m 0s
mmm:ss
CH pump frost protection
overrun time
Read Only
1m 0s
mmm:ss
DHW pump output
Read Only
A:No pump
assignment
DHW pump control
Read Only
A:Automatic pump
control
DHW pump overrun time
Read Only
1m 0s
mmm:ss
DHW pump frost protection
overrun time
Read Only
1m 0s
mmm:ss
DHW pump start delay
Read Only
0m 0s
mmm:ss
Boiler pump output
Read Only
A:No pump
assignment
Boiler pump control
Read Only
A:Automatic pump
control
Boiler pump overrun time
Read Only
1m 0s
Auxiliary pump output
Read Only
A:No pump
assignment
Auxiliary pump control
Read Only
A:Automatic pump
control
Auxiliary pump on when
Read Only
A:Auxiliary ON
when CH pump is
ON
System pump output
Read Only
A:No pump
assignment
System pump control
Read Only
A:Automatic pump
control
100
0-100%
mmm:ss
System pump overrun time
Read Only
1m 0s
mmm:ss
Pump exercise interval
Read Only
0
Days
Pump exercise time
Read Only
0m 0s
mmm:ss
Annunciation enable
Read Only
Enabled
Annunciator 1 location
Read Only
E:No annunciation
for this terminal
Annunciator1 short name
Read Only
A1
3 chars
Annunciator 1 long name
Read Only
Annunciator 1
20 chars
Annunciator 2 location
Read Only
E:No annunciation
for this terminal
Annunciator2 short name
Read Only
A2
3 chars
Annunciator 2 long name
Read Only
Annunciator2
20 chars
Annunciator 3 location
Read Only
E:No annunciation
for this terminal
Annunciator3 short name
Read Only
A3
3 chars
Annunciator 3 long name
Read Only
Annunciator3
20 chars
66-1171—03
104
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 50. Example of a Completed Device Parameter Worksheet. (Continued)
Parameter Name
Customer
Choice - Hidden,
Read Only or
Password
protected
Minimum Range
Default Setting
Maximum Range Parameter Units
Annunciator 4 location
Read Only
A:No annunciation
for this terminal
Annunciator4 short name
Read Only
A4
3 chars
Annunciator 4 long name
Read Only
Annunciator4
20 chars
Annunciator 5 location
Read Only
E:No annunciation
for this terminal
Annunciator5 short name
Read Only
A5
3 chars
Annunciator 5 long name
Read Only
Annunciator5
20 chars
Annunciator 6 location
Read Only
E:No annunciation
for this terminal
Annunciator6 short name
Read Only
A6
3 chars
Annunciator 6 long name
Read Only
Annunciator6
20 chars
Annunciator 7 location
Read Only
E:No annunciation
for this terminal
Annunciator7 short name
Read Only
A7
3 chars
Annunciator 7 long name
Read Only
Annunciator7
20 chars
Annunciator 8 location
Read Only
E:No annunciation
for this terminal
Annunciator8 short name
Read Only
A8
3 chars
Annunciator 8 long name
Read Only
Annunciator8
20 chars
PII short name
Read Only
PII
3 chars
PII long name
Read Only
Pre-Ignition ILK
20 chars
LCI short name
Read Only
LCI
3 chars
LCI long name
Read Only
Load Control Input
20 chars
ILK short name
Read Only
ILK
3 chars
ILK long name
Read Only
Interlock
20 chars
DHW enable
Read Only
Disabled
DHW demand source
Read Only
A:DHW sensor
only
DHW has priority over CH
Read Only
No/False/Off
DHW has priority over LL
Read Only
No/False/Off
DHW priority time
Read Only
30m 0s
mmm:ss
DHW setpoint
Read Only
32°F 0°C
140°F 60°C
240°F 116°C
DHW tod setpoint
Read Only
32°F 0°C
120°F 49°C
240°F 116°C
DHW on hysteresis
Read Only
2°F 1°C
5°F 3°C
100°F 56°C
DHW off hysteresis
Read Only
2°F 1°C
5°F 3°C
100°F 56°C
DHW P gain
Read Only
0
50
400
DHW I gain
Read Only
0
50
400
DHW D gain
Read Only
0
50
400
DHW hysteresis step time
Read Only
0m 0s
Outlet high limit setpoint
Read Only
32°F 0°C
220°F 104°C
Outlet high limit response
Read Only
[ A B #c #d ]
A:Lockout
Stack limit enable
Read Only
Stack limit setpoint
Read Only
32°F 0°C
200°F 93°C
Stack limit response
Read Only
[ A #b C #d ]
A:Lockout
mmm:ss
240°F 116°C
Disabled
105
500°F 260°C
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 50. Example of a Completed Device Parameter Worksheet. (Continued)
Parameter Name
Customer
Choice - Hidden,
Read Only or
Password
protected
Minimum Range
Default Setting
Stack limit delay
Read Only
5m 0s
Delta-T enable
Read Only
Disabled
Delta-T degrees
Read Only
Delta-T response
Read Only
mmm:ss
30°F 17°C
[ A #b C #d ]
A:Lockout
Delta-T delay
Read Only
5m 0s
DHW high limit enable
Read Only
Enabled
DHW high limit setpoint
Read Only
32°F 0°C
150°F 66°C
DHW high limit response
Read Only
[ A B #c D ]
D:Suspend DHW
CH slow start enable
Read Only
Disabled
DHW slow start enable
Read Only
Disabled
Slow start ramp
Read Only
10%
Slow start setpoint
Read Only
0°F -18°C
20°F -7°C
CH anticondensation enable Read Only
mmm:ss
240°F 116°C
% | RPM per
minute
180°F 82°C
Disabled
CH anticondensation
setpoint
Read Only
CH anticondensation pump
Force Off
Read Only
Disabled
DHW anticondensation
enable
Read Only
Disabled
DHW anticondensation
setpoint
Read Only
32°F 0°C
135°F 57°C
32°F 0°C
135°F 57°C
DHW anticondensation pump Read Only
force off
Disabled
Anticondensation > Outlet
limit
Read Only
No/False/Off
Anticondensation > Delta-T
Read Only
No/False/Off
Anticondensation > Stack
limit
Read Only
No/False/Off
Anticondensation > Slow
start
Read Only
Yes/True/On
Anticondensation > Forced
rate
Read Only
Yes/True/On
CH ODR max outdoor
temperature
Read Only
80°F 27°C
CH ODR min outdoor
temperature
Read Only
0°F -18°C
CH ODR min water
temperature
Read Only
CH frost protection enable
Read Only
Disabled
DHW frost protection enable Read Only
Disabled
Outdoor frost protection
setpoint
32°F 0°C
32°F 0°C
50°F 10°C
Read Only
TROUBLESHOOTING
240°F 116°C
240°F 116°C
240°F 116°C
may have been occurring prior to the actual Lockout.
Note Column: H= Hold message; L=Lockout message; H or L=
either Hold or Lockout depending on Parameter Configuration
To support the recommended Troubleshooting, the R7910 has
an Alert File. Review the Alert history for possible trends that
66-1171—03
Maximum Range Parameter Units
106
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 51. R7910A Lockout and Hold Codes.
Code
Description
Recommended Troubleshooting of Lockout Codes
NOTE
Safety Data Faults
L
1
Unconfigured safety data
1. New Device, complete device configuration and safety
verification.
2. If fault repeats, replace module.
2
Waiting for safety data verification
L
1. Device in Configuration mode and safety parameters
need verification and a device needs reset to complete
verification.
2. Configuration ended without verification, re enter
configuration, verify safety parameters and reset device to
complete verification.
3. If fault repeats, replace module.
Internal Operation Errors
107
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 51. R7910A Lockout and Hold Codes. (Continued)
Code
Description
Recommended Troubleshooting of Lockout Codes
Internal Fault.
1. Reset Module.
2. If fault repeats, replace module.
NOTE
3
Internal fault: Hardware fault
4
Internal fault: Safety Relay key feedback
error
H
5
Internal fault: Unstable power (DCDC)
output
H
6
Internal fault: Invalid processor clock
H
7
Internal fault: Safety relay drive error
H
8
Internal fault: Zero crossing not detected
H
9
Internal fault: Flame bias out of range
H
10
Internal fault: Invalid Burner control state
L
11
Internal fault: Invalid Burner control state flag
L
12
Internal fault: Safety relay drive cap short
H
13
Internal fault: PII shorted to ILK
H or L
14
Internal fault: HFS shorted to LCI
H or L
15
Internal fault: Safety relay test failed due to
feedback ON
L
16
Internal fault: Safety relay test failed due to
safety relay OFF
L
17
Internal fault: Safety relay test failed due to
safety relay not OFF
L
18
Internal fault: Safety relay test failed due to
feedback not ON
L
H
19
Internal fault: Safety RAM write
L
20
Internal fault: Flame ripple and overflow
H
21
Internal fault: Flame number of sample
mismatch
H
22
Internal fault: Flame bias out of range
H
23
Internal fault: Bias changed since heating
cycle starts
H
24
Internal fault: Spark voltage stuck low or high
H
25
Internal fault: Spark voltage changed too
much during flame sensing time
H
26
Internal fault: Static flame ripple
H
27
Internal fault: Flame rod shorted to ground
detected
H
28
Internal fault: A/D linearity test fails
H
29
Internal fault: Flame bias cannot be set in
range
H
30
Internal fault: Flame bias shorted to adjacent
pin
H
31
Internal fault: SLO electronics unknown error
H
32-46
Internal fault: Safety Key 0 through 14
L
System Errors
47
Flame Rod to ground leakage
48
Static flame (not flickering)
49
24VAC voltage low/high
66-1171—03
H
H
1. Check the Module and display connections.
2. Check the Module power supply and make sure that
both frequency, voltage and VA meet the specifications.
108
H
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 51. R7910A Lockout and Hold Codes. (Continued)
Code
Description
Recommended Troubleshooting of Lockout Codes
NOTE
50
Modulation fault
51
Pump fault
Internal sub-system fault.
1. Review alert messages for possible trends.
2. Correct possible problems.
3. If fault persists, replace module.
H
52
Motor tachometer fault
53
AC inputs phase reversed
1. Check the Module and display connections.
2. Check the Module power supply and make sure that
both frequency and voltage meet the specifications.
3. On 24Vac applications, assure that J4-10 and J8-2 are
connected together.
L
54
Safety GVT model ID doesn't match
application's model ID
L
55
Application configuration data block CRC
errors
L
56-57
RESERVED
H
58
Internal fault: HFS shorted to IAS
59
60
Internal Fault: Mux pin shorted
Normal Event Status
Internal Fault: HFS shorted to LFS
61
Anti short cycle
62
Fan speed not proved
63
LCI OFF
H
1. Check wiring and correct any faults.
2. Check Interlocks connected to the LCI to assure proper
function.
3. Reset and sequence the module; monitor the LCI status.
4. If code persists, replace the module.
64
PII OFF
1. Check wiring and correct any faults.
H or L
2. Check Preignition Interlock switches to assure proper
functioning.
3. Check the valve operation.
4. Reset and sequence the module; monitor the PII status.
5. If code persists, replace the module.
65
Interrupted Airflow Switch OFF
66
Interrupted Airflow Switch ON
1. Check wiring and correct any possible shorts.
2. Check airflow switches to assure proper functioning.
3. Check the fan/blower operation.
4. Reset and sequence the module; monitor the airflow
status.
5. If code persists, replace the module.
67
ILK OFF
68
ILK ON
69
Pilot test hold
70
Wait for leakage test completion
71-77
RESERVED
78
79
Internal Fault.
1. Reset Module.
2. If fault repeats, replace module.
H
L
L
L
Will not be a lockout fault. Hold Only.
H
H
H or L
H or L
H or L
1. Check wiring and correct any possible shorts.
2. Check Interlock (ILK) switches to assure proper
H or L
function.
3. Verify voltage through the interlock string to the interlock
input with a voltmeter.
4. If steps 1-3 are correct and the fault persists, replace the
1. Verify Run/Test is changed to Run.
H
2. Reset Module.
3. If fault repeats, replace module.
1. Internal Fault. Reset Module.
2. If fault repeats, replace module.
H
Demand Lost in Run
1. Check wiring and correct any possible errors.
2. If previous steps are correct and fault persists, replace
the module.
H
Outlet high limit
1. Check wiring and correct any possible errors.
2. Replace the Outlet high limit.
3. If previous steps are correct and fault persists, replace
the module.
H or L
109
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 51. R7910A Lockout and Hold Codes. (Continued)
Code
Description
Recommended Troubleshooting of Lockout Codes
NOTE
80
DHW high limit
1. Check wiring and correct any possible errors.
2. Replace the DHW high limit.
3. If previous steps are correct and fault persists, replace
the module.
H or L
81
Delta T limit
1. Check Inlet and Outlet sensors and pump circuits for
proper operation.
2. Recheck the Delta T Limit to confirm proper setting.
3. If previous steps are correct and fault persists, replace
the module.
H or L
82
Stack limit
1. Check wiring and correct any possible errors.
2. Replace the Stack high limit.
3. If previous steps are correct and fault persists, replace
the module.
H or L
83
Delta T exchanger/outlet limit
H or L
84
Delta T inlet/exchanger limit
H or L
85
Inlet/outlet inversion limit
H or L
86
Exchanger/outlet inversion limit
H or L
87
Inlet/exchanger inversion limit
H or L
88
Outlet T-rise limit
H or L
89
Exchanger T-rise limit
H or L
Heat exchanger high limit
H or L
90
Sensor Faults
91
Inlet sensor fault
1. Check wiring and correct any possible errors.
2. Replace the Inlet sensor.
3. If previous steps are correct and fault persists, replace
the module.
H
92
Outlet sensor fault
1. Check wiring and correct any possible errors.
2. Replace the Outlet sensor.
3. If previous steps are correct and fault persists, replace
the module.
H
93
DHW sensor fault
1. Check wiring and correct any possible errors.
2. Replace the DHW sensor.
3. If previous steps are correct and fault persists, replace
the module.
H
94
Header sensor fault
1. Check wiring and correct any possible errors.
2. Replace the header sensor.
3. If previous steps are correct and fault persists, replace
the module.
H
95
Stack sensor fault
1. Check wiring and correct any possible errors.
2. Replace the stack sensor.
3. If previous steps are correct and fault persists, replace
the module.
H
96
Outdoor sensor fault
1. Check wiring and correct any possible errors.
2. Replace the outdoor sensor.
3. If previous steps are correct and fault persists, replace
the module.
H
97
Internal Fault: A2D mismatch.
98
Internal Fault: Exceeded VSNSR voltage
Internal Fault.
1. Reset Module.
2. If fault repeats, replace module.
99
Internal Fault: Exceeded 28V voltage
tolerance
Pressure Sensor Fault
100
66-1171—03
L
L
L
1. Verify the Pressure Sensor is a 4-20ma source.
2. Check wiring and correct any possible errors.
3. Test Pressure Sensor for correct operation.
4. Replace the Pressure sensor.
5. If previous steps are correct and fault persists, replace
the module.
110
H
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 51. R7910A Lockout and Hold Codes. (Continued)
Code
101-104
Description
Recommended Troubleshooting of Lockout Codes
NOTE
RESERVED
Flame Operation Faults
105
Flame detected out of sequence
H or L
1. Check that flame is not present in the combustion
chamber. Correct any errors.
2. Make sure that the flame detector is wired to the correct
terminal.
3. Make sure the F & G wires are protected from stray
noise pickup.
4. Reset and sequence the module, if code reappears,
replace the flame detector.
5. Reset and sequence the module, if code reappears,
replace the module.
106
Flame lost in MFEP
107
Flame lost early in run
1. Check pilot valve (Main Valve for DSI) wiring and
operation - correct any errors.
2. Check the fuel supply.
3. Check fuel pressure and repeat turndown tests.
4. Check ignition transformer electrode, flame detector,
flame detector siting or flame rod position.
5. If steps 1 through 4 are correct and the fault persists,
replace the module.
108
Flame lost in run
109
Ignition failed
110
Ignition failure occurred
L
L
L
L
Hold time of recycle and hold option. Will not be a lockout H
fault. Hold Only.
111
Flame current lower than WEAK threshold
Internal hardware test. Not a lockout,
H
112
Pilot test flame timeout
L
113
Flame circuit timeout
Interrupted Pilot or DSI application and flame lost when
system in “test” mode.
1. Reset the module to restart.
Flame sensed during Initiate or off cycle, hold 240
seconds, if present after 240 seconds, lockout.
114-121
RESERVED
1. Check wiring and correct any potential wiring errors.
2. Check VFDs ability to change speeds.
3. Change the VFD
4. If the fault persists, replace the module.
L
L
Rate Proving Faults
122
Lightoff rate proving failed
123
Purge rate proving failed
124
High fire switch OFF
125
High fire switch stuck ON
126
Low fire switch OFF
127
Low fire switch stuck ON
L
H
1. Check wiring and correct any potential wiring errors.
2. Check High Fire Switch to assure proper function (not
H
welded or jumpered).
3. Manually drive the motor to the High Fire position and
adjust the HF switch while in this position and verify
voltage through the switch to the HFS input with a
voltmeter.
4. If steps 1-3 are correct and the fault persists, replace the
module.
H
1. Check wiring and correct any potential wiring errors.
2. Check Low Fire Switch to assure proper function (not
H or L
welded or jumpered).
3. Manually drive the motor to the High Fire position and
adjust the LF switch while in this position and verify voltage
through the switch to the LFS input with a voltmeter.
4. If steps 1-3 are correct and the fault persists, replace the
module.
1. Check wiring and correct any potential wiring errors.
2. Check VFDs ability to change speeds.
3. Change the VFD
4. If the fault persists, replace the module.
H or L
128
Fan speed failed during prepurge
129
Fan speed failed during preignition
130
Fan speed failed during ignition
131
Fan movement detected during standby
H
132
Fan speed failed during run
H
133-135
RESERVED
H or L
H or L
Start Check Faults
111
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 51. R7910A Lockout and Hold Codes. (Continued)
Code
Description
Recommended Troubleshooting of Lockout Codes
NOTE
136
Interrupted Airflow Switch failed to close
H
1. Check wiring and correct any possible wiring errors.
2. Check Interrupted Airflow switch(es) to assure proper
function.
3. Verify voltage through the airflow switch to the IAS input
with a voltmeter.
4. If steps 1-3 are correct and the fault persists, replace the
module.
137
ILK failed to close
H
1. Check wiring and correct any possible shorts.
2. Check Interlock (ILK) switches to assure proper
function.
3. Verify voltage through the interlock string to the interlock
input with a voltmeter.
4. If steps 1-3 are correct and the fault persists, replace the
module.
138-142
RESERVED
FAULT CODES 149 THROUGH 165 ARE
OEM SPECIFIC FAULT CODES.
143
Internal fault: Flame bias out of range 1
L
144
Internal fault: Flame bias out of range 2
L
145
Internal fault: Flame bias out of range 3
L
146
Internal fault: Flame bias out of range 4
L
147
Internal fault: Flame bias out of range 5
L
148
Internal fault: Flame bias out of range 6
149
Flame detected
OEM Specific
1. Holds if flame detected during Safe Start check up to
Flame Establishing period.
150
Flame not detected
H
OEM Specific
1. Sequence returns to standby and restarts sequence at
the beginning of Purge after the HF switch opens. if flame
detected during Safe Start check up to Flame Establishing
period.
151
High fire switch ON
H or L
OEM Specific
1. Check wiring and correct any potential wiring errors.
2. Check High Fire Switch to assure proper function (not
welded or jumpered).
3. Manually drive the motor to the High Fire position and
adjust the HF switch while in this position and verify
voltage through the switch to the HFS input with a
voltmeter.
4. If steps 1-3 are correct and the fault persists, replace the
module.
152
Combustion pressure ON
153
Combustion Pressure Off
H or L
OEM Specific
1. Check wiring and correct any errors.
H or L
2. Inspect the Combustion Pressure Switch to make sure it
is working correctly.
3. Reset and sequence the relay module.
4. During STANDBY and PREPURGE, measure the
voltage between Terminal J6-5 and L2 (N). Supply voltage
should be present. If not, the lockout switch is defective
and needs replacing.
5. If the fault persists, replace the relay module.
154
Purge Fan switch On
155
155
Purge Fan switch Off
Purge fan switch OFF
66-1171—03
L
OEM Specific
1. Purge fan switch is on when it should be off.
112
H or L
H or L
H
H or L
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 51. R7910A Lockout and Hold Codes. (Continued)
Code
Description
156
Combustion pressure and Flame ON
157
Combustion pressure and Flame OFF
158
Main valve ON
159
Main valve OFF
160
Ignition ON
161
Ignition OFF
162
Pilot valve ON
163
Pilot valve OFF
164
Block intake ON
165
Block intake OFF
166-171
RESERVED
Recommended Troubleshooting of Lockout Codes
NOTE
H or L
OEM Specific
1. Check that flame is not present in the combustion
L
chamber. Correct any errors.
2. Make sure that the flame detector is wired to the correct
terminal.
3. Make sure the F & G wires are protected from stray
noise pickup.
4. Reset and sequence the module, if code reappears,
replace the flame detector.
OEM Specific
L
1. Check Main Valve terminal wiring and correct any errors. L
2. Reset and sequence the module. If fault persist, replace
the module.
OEM Specific
L
1. Check Ignition terminal wiring and correct any errors.
L
2. Reset and sequence the module. If fault persist, replace
the module.
L
OEM Specific
1. Check Pilot Valve terminal wiring and correct any errors. L
2. Reset and sequence the module. If fault persist, replace
the module.
L
OEM Specific
1. Check wiring and correct any errors.
L
2. Inspect the Block Intake Switch to make sure it is
working correctly.
3. Reset and sequence the module.
4. During Standby and Purge, measure the voltage across
the switch. Supply voltage should be present. If not, the
Block Intake Switch is defective and needs replacing.
5. If the fault persists, replace the relay module.
Feedback
172
Main relay feedback incorrect
173
Pilot relay feedback incorrect
174
Safety relay feedback incorrect
Internal Fault.
1. Reset Module.
2. If fault repeats, replace module.
L
L
L
175
Safety relay open
L
176
Main relay ON at safe start check
L
177
Pilot relay ON at safe start check
L
178
Safety relay ON at safe start check
L
179-183
RESERVED
Parameter Faults
184
185
Invalid BLOWER/HSI output setting
Invalid Delta T limit enable setting
186
Invalid Delta T limit response setting
1. Return to Configuration mode and recheck selected
parameters, reverify and reset module.
2. If fault repeats, verify electrical grounding.
3. If fault repeats, replace module.
L
L
L
187
Invalid DHW high limit enable setting
L
188
Invalid DHW high limit response setting
L
189
Invalid Flame sensor type setting
L
190
Invalid interrupted air switch enable setting
L
191
Invalid interrupted air switch start check
enable setting
L
192
Invalid igniter on during setting
L
193
Invalid ignite failure delay setting
L
113
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 51. R7910A Lockout and Hold Codes. (Continued)
Code
Description
194
Invalid ignite failure response setting
195
Invalid ignite failure retries setting
Recommended Troubleshooting of Lockout Codes
1. Return to Configuration mode and recheck selected
parameters, reverify and reset module.
2. If fault repeats, verify electrical grounding.
3. If fault repeats, replace module.
NOTE
L
L
196
Invalid ignition source setting
197
Invalid interlock open response setting
L
198
Invalid interlock start check setting
L
199
Invalid LCI enable setting
L
L
200
Invalid lightoff rate setting
L
201
202
203
Invalid lightoff rate proving setting
Invalid Main Flame Establishing Period time
Invalid MFEP flame failure response setting
L
L
L
204
Invalid NTC sensor type setting
L
205
Invalid Outlet high limit response setting
L
206
Invalid Pilot Flame Establishing Period
setting
L
207
Invalid PII enable setting
L
208
Invalid pilot test hold setting
L
209
Invalid Pilot type setting
L
210
Invalid Postpurge time setting
L
211
Invalid Power up with lockout setting
L
212
Invalid Preignition time setting
L
213
Invalid Prepurge rate setting
L
214
Invalid Prepurge time setting
L
215
Invalid Purge rate proving setting
L
216
Invalid Run flame failure response setting
L
217
Invalid Run stabilization time setting
L
218
Invalid Stack limit enable setting
L
219
Invalid Stack limit response setting
L
220
Unconfigured Delta T limit setpoint setting
L
221
Unconfigured DHW high limit setpoint
setting
L
222
Unconfigured Outlet high limit setpoint
setting
L
223
Unconfigured Stack limit setpoint setting
L
224
Invalid DHW demand source setting
L
225
Invalid Flame threshold setting
L
226
Invalid Outlet high limit setpoint setting
L
227
Invalid DHW high limit setpoint setting
L
228
Invalid Stack limit setpoint setting
L
229
Invalid Modulation output setting
L
230
Invalid CH demand source setting
L
231
Invalid Delta T limit delay setting
L
232
Invalid Pressure sensor type setting
L
233
Invalid IAS closed response setting
L
234
Invalid Outlet high limit enable setting
L
235
Invalid Outlet connector type setting
L
236
Invalid Inlet connector type setting
L
237
Invalid DHW connector type setting
L
238
Invalid Stack connector type setting
L
66-1171—03
114
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 51. R7910A Lockout and Hold Codes. (Continued)
Code
Description
Recommended Troubleshooting of Lockout Codes
NOTE
239
Invalid S2 (J8-6) connector type setting
L
240
Invalid S5 (J8-11) connector type setting
L
241
Exchanger sensor not allowed with stack
connector setting
L
242
Invalid DHW auto detect configuration
L
243
Invalid UV with spark interference not
compatible with Ignitor on throughout PFEP
L
244
Internal fault: Safety relay test invalid state
L
245
Invalid Outlet connector type setting for Trise
L
246
4-20mA cannot be used for both modulation
and setpoint control
L
247
Invalid ILK bounce detection enable
L
248
Invalid forced recycle interval
L
249
STAT cannot be demand source when
Remote Stat is enabled
L
250
Invalid Fan speed error response
L
251-255
RESERVED
Table 52. Alerts. (Continued)
Table 52. Alerts.
Code
Code
Description
Description
22
CRC errors were found in application
EE Management Faults
23
Backup Alert PCB was restored from active one
0
None (No alert)
24
RESERVED
1
Alert PCB was restored from factory defaults
25
Lead Lag operation switch was turned OFF
2
Safety configuration parameters were restored
26
Lead Lag operation switch was turned ON
3
Configuration parameters were restored from
27
Safety processor was reset
4
Invalid Factory Invisibility PCB was detected
28
Application processor was reset
5
Invalid Factory Range PCB was detected
29
Burner switch was turned OFF
6
Invalid range PCB record has been dropped
30
Burner switch was turned ON
7
EEPROM lockout history was initialized
31
Program Module (PM) was inserted into socket
8
Switched application annunciation data blocks
32
Program Module (PM) was removed from socket
9
Switched application configuration data blocks
33
Alert PCB was configured
10
Configuration was restored from factory defaults
34
Parameter PCB was configured
11
Backup configuration settings was restored from
35
Range PCB was configured
12
Annunciation configuration was restored from
36
Program Module (PM) incompatible with product
13
Annunciation configuration was restored from
37
Program Module application parameter revision
14
Safety group verification table was restored from
38
Program Module safety parameter revision
15
Safety group verification table was updated
39
PCB incompatible with product contained in
16
Invalid Parameter PCB was detected
40
Parameter PCB in Program Module is too large
17
Invalid Range PCB was detected
41
Range PCB in Program Module was too large for
System Parameter Errors
42
Alert PCB in Program Module was too large for
18
Alarm silence time exceeded maximum
43
IAS start check was forced on due to IAS
19
Invalid safety group verification table was
20
Backdoor Password could not be determined.
44
Low voltage was detected in safety processor
21
Invalid safety group verification table was
45
High line frequency occurred
System Operation Faults
115
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 52. Alerts. (Continued)
Code
46
Table 52. Alerts. (Continued)
Description
Code
Description
Low line frequency occurred
89
RESERVED
47
Invalid subsystem reset request occurred
90
Modulation output type was invalid
48
Write large enumerated Modbus register value
91
Firing rate control parameter was invalid
49
Maximum cycle count was reached
92
Forced rate was out of range vs. min/max
50
Maximum hours count was reached
93
Forced rate was invalid, % vs. RPM
51
Illegal Modbus write was attempted
94
Slow start ramp value was invalid
52
Modbus write attempt was rejected (NOT
95
Slow start degrees value was invalid
53
Illegal Modbus read was attempted
96
Slow start was ended due to outlet sensor fault
54
Safety processor brown-out reset occurred
97
Slow start was end due to reference setpoint
55
Application processor watchdog reset occurred
98
CH max modulation rate was invalid, % vs. RPM
56
Application processor brown-out reset occurred
99
CH max modulation rate was > absolute max
57
Safety processor watchdog reset occurred
100
CH modulation range (max minus min) was too
58
Alarm was reset by the user at the control
101
DHW max modulation rate was invalid, % vs.
Demand/Rate Command Faults
102
DHW max modulation rate was > absolute max
59
Burner control firing rate was > absolute max
103
DHW modulation range (max minus min) was too
60
Burner control firing rate was < absolute min rate
104
Min modulation rate was < absolute min rate
61
Burner control firing rate was invalid, % vs. RPM
105
Min modulation rate was invalid, % vs. RPM
62
Burner control was firing with no fan request
106
Manual rate was invalid, % vs. RPM
63
Burner control rate (nonfiring) was > absolute
107
Slow start enabled, but forced rate was invalid
64
Burner control rate (nonfiring) was < absolute
108
Analog output hysteresis was invalid
65
Burner control rate (nonfiring) was absent
109
Analog modulation output type was invalid
66
Burner control rate (nonfiring) was invalid, % vs.
110
IAS open rate differential was invalid
67
Fan off cycle rate was invalid, % vs. RPM
111
IAS open step rate was invalid
68
Setpoint was overridden due to sensor fault
112
MIX max modulation rate was invalid, % vs. RPM
69
Modulation was overridden due to sensor fault
113
MIX max modulation rate was >absolute max or
70
No demand source was set due to demand
114
MIX modulation range (max minus min) was too
71-73
RESERVED
Modulation Operation Faults
Fan Parameter Errors
115
Fan was limited to its minimum duty cycle
Periodic Forced Recycle
116
Manual rate was > CH max modulation rate
75
Absolute max fan speed was out of range
117
Manual rate was > DHW max modulation rate
76
Absolute min fan speed was out of range
118
Manual rate was < min modulation rate
77
Fan gain down was invalid
119
Manual rate in Standby was > absolute max rate
78
Fan gain up was invalid
120
Modulation commanded rate was > CH max
79
Fan minimum duty cycle was invalid
121
Modulation commanded rate was > DHW max
80
Fan pulses per revolution was invalid
122
Modulation commanded rate was < min
81
Fan PWM frequency was invalid
123
Modulation rate was limited due to outlet limit
82-83
RESERVED
124
Modulation rate was limited due to Delta-T limit
74
Modulation Parameter Errors
125
Modulation rate was limited due to stack limit
84
Lead Lag CH 4-20mA water temperature setting
126
Modulation rate was limited due to
85
No Lead Lag add stage error threshold was
127
Fan Speed out of range in RUN
86
No Lead Lag add stage detection time was
128
Modulation rate was limited due to IAS was open
87
No Lead Lag drop stage error threshold was
129
Slow start ramp setting of zero will result in no
88
No Lead Lag drop stage detection time was
130
No forced rate was configured for slow start
66-1171—03
116
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 52. Alerts. (Continued)
Table 52. Alerts. (Continued)
Code
Code
Description
CH parameter Errors
131
Description
170
DHW modulation sensor was not compatible for
DHW control was suspended due to fault
DHW Operation Faults
CH demand source was invalid
132
CH P-gain was invalid
171
133
CH I-gain was invalid
172
DHW temperature was invalid
134
CH D-gain was invalid
173
DHW inlet temperature was invalid
135
CH OFF hysteresis was invalid
174
DHW outlet temperature was invalid
136
CH ON hysteresis was invalid
175
DHW high limit must be disabled for AUTO mode
137
CH sensor type was invalid
176
DHW sensortype was not compatible for AUTO
138
CH hysteresis step time was invalid
177
DHW priority source setting was invalid
139
CH remote control parameter was invalid
178
DHW priority method setting was invalid
140
CH ODR not allowed with remote control
141
Steam P-gain was invalid
179
CH S5 (J8 terminal 11) sensor was invalid
142
Steam I-gain was invalid
180
CH inlet temperature was invalid
143
Steam D-gain was invalid
181
CH S10 (J10 terminal 7) sensor was invalid
144
Steam OFF hysteresis was invalid
182
Lead Lag CH setpoint source was invalid
145
Steam ON hysteresis was invalid
CH Operation Faults (continued)
Lead Lag Parameter errors
CH Operation Faults
183
Lead Lag P-gain was invalid
CH control was suspended due to fault
184
Lead Lag I-gain was invalid
147
CH header temperature was invalid
185
Lead Lag D-gain was invalid
148
CH outlet temperature was invalid
186
Lead Lag OFF hysteresis was invalid
149
CH steam pressure was invalid
187
Lead Lag ON hysteresis was invalid
CH Parameter errors (continued)
188
Lead Lag slave enable was invalid
150
Steam setpoint source parameter was invalid
189
Lead Lag hysteresis step time was invalid
151
Minimum water temperature parameter was
190
No Lead lag Modbus port was assigned
152
Minimum water temperature parameter was
191
Lead Lag base load common setting was invalid
153
Minimum pressure parameter was greater than
192
Lead Lag DHW demand switch setting was
154
Minimum pressure parameter was greater than
193
Lead Lag Mix demand switch setting was invalid
155
CH modulation rate source parameter was
194
Lead Lag modulation sensor setting was invalid
156
Steam modulation rate source parameter was
195
Lead Lag backup modulation sensor setting was
DHW Parameter Errors
196
Lead Lag slave mode setting was invalid
157
DHW demand source was invalid
197
Lead Lag rate allocation setting was invalid
158
DHW P-gain was invalid
198
Lead selection setting was invalid
159
DHW I-gain was invalid
199
Lag selection setting was invalid
160
DHW D-gain was invalid
200
Lead Lag slave return setting was invalid
161
DHW OFF hysteresis was invalid
201
Lead Lag add stage method setting was invalid
162
DHW ON hysteresis was invalid
202
STAT may not be a Lead Lag CH demand source
163
DHW hysteresis step time was invalid
203
Lead Lag base load rate setting was invalid
164
DHW sensor type was invalid
Lead Lag master was suspended due to fault
146
Lead Lag Operation Faults
165
Inlet sensor type was invalid for DHW
204
166
Outlet sensor type was invalid for DHW
205
Lead Lag slave was suspended due to fault
167
DHW Storage OFF hysteresis was invalid
206
Lead Lag header temperature was invalid
168
DHW Storage ON hysteresis was invalid
207
Lead Lag was suspended due to no enabled
DHW modulation sensor type was invalid
208
Lead Lag slave session has timed out
169
117
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 52. Alerts. (Continued)
Code
209
Table 52. Alerts. (Continued)
Description
Code
Description
Too many Lead Lag slaves were detected
252
CH min outdoor setpoint was invalid
210
Lead Lag slave was discovered
253
CH min water setpoint was invalid
211
Incompatible Lead Lag slave was discovered
254
CH outdoor temperature range was too small
212
No base load rate was set for Lead Lag slave
255
CH water temperature range was too small
213
Lead Lag slave unable to fire before demand to
256
Steam setpoint was invalid
214
Adding Lead Lag slave aborted due to add
257
Steam time of day setpoint was invalid
215
No Lead Lag slaves available to service demand
258
Steam minimum pressure was invalid
216
No Lead Lag active service was set due to
259
CH ODR min water temperature was invalid
217
No Lead Lag add stage method was specified
260
RESERVED
218
No Lead Lag drop stage method was specified
261
DHW setpoint was invalid
219
Using backup lead lag header sensor due to
262
DHW time of day setpoint was invalid
Frost Protection Faults
263
DHW storage setpoint was invalid
220
Lead Lag frost protection rate was invalid
264
STAT may not be a DHW demand source when
221
Lead Lag drop stage method setting was invalid
265-266
RESERVED
222
CH frost protection temperature was invalid
267
STAT may not be a CH demand source when
223
CH frost protection inlet temperature was invalid
268
CH 4mA water temperature setting was invalid
224
DHW frost protection temperature was invalid
269
CH 20mA water temperature setting was invalid
225-226
RESERVED
270
Steam 4mA water temperature setting was
227
DHW priority override time was not derated due
271
Steam 20mA water temperature setting was
228
Warm weather shutdown was not checked due
272
Abnormal Recycle: Pressure sensor fault
229
Lead Lag slave communication timeout
273
Abnormal Recycle: Safety relay drive test failed
230
RESERVED
274
Abnormal Recycle: Demand off during Pilot
231
Lead Lag CH setpoint was invalid
275
Abnormal Recycle: LCI off during Drive to Purge
232
Lead Lag CH time of day setpoint was invalid
276
Abnormal Recycle: LCI off during Measured
233
LL outdoor temperature was invalid
277
Abnormal Recycle: LCI off during Drive to
234
Lead Lag ODR time of day setpoint was invalid
278
Abnormal Recycle: LCI off during Pre-Ignition
235
Lead Lag ODR time of day setpoint exceeded
279
Abnormal Recycle: LCI off during Pre-Ignition
236
Lead Lag ODR max outdoor temperature was
280
Abnormal Recycle: LCI off during Main Flame
237
Lead Lag ODR min outdoor temperature was
281
Abnormal Recycle: LCI off during Ignition period
238
Lead Lag ODR low water temperature was
282
Abnormal Recycle: Demand off during Drive to
239
Lead Lag ODR outdoor temperature range was
283
Abnormal Recycle: Demand off during Measured
240
Lead Lag ODR water temperature range was too
284
Abnormal Recycle: Demand off during Drive to
241
Lead Lag DHW setpoint was invalid
285
Abnormal Recycle: Demand off during Pre-
242
Lead Lag Mix setpoint was invalid
286
Abnormal Recycle: Demand off during Pre-
243
Lead Lag CH demand switch was invalid
287
Abnormal Recycle: Flame was on during Safe
244
Lead Lag CH setpoint source was invalid
288
Abnormal Recycle: Flame was on during Drive to
245
RESERVED
289
Abnormal Recycle: Flame was on during
246
CH setpoint was invalid
290
Abnormal Recycle: Flame was on during Drive to
247
CH time of day setpoint was invalid
291
Abnormal Recycle: Flame was not on at end of
248
CH outdoor temperature was invalid
292
Abnormal Recycle: Flame was lost during Main
249
CH ODR time of day setpoint was invalid
293
Abnormal Recycle: Flame was lost early in Run
250
CH ODR time of day setpoint exceeds normal
294
Abnormal Recycle: Flame was lost during Run
251
CH max outdoor setpoint was invalid
295
Abnormal Recycle: Leakage test failed
66-1171—03
118
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 52. Alerts. (Continued)
Code
Table 52. Alerts. (Continued)
Description
Code
Description
296
Abnormal Recycle: Interrupted air flow switch
339
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware SLO bias not set
297
Abnormal Recycle: Interrupted air flow switch
340
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware SLO bias shorted
298
Abnormal Recycle: Interrupted air flow switch
341
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware SLO electronics
299
Abnormal Recycle: Interrupted air flow switch
342
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware processor clock
300
Abnormal Recycle: Interrupted air flow switch
343
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware AC phase
301
Abnormal Recycle: Interrupted air flow switch
344
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware A2D mismatch
302
Abnormal Recycle: Ignition failed due to
345
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware VSNSR A2D
303
Abnormal Recycle: ILK off during Drive to Purge
346
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware 28V A2D
304
Abnormal Recycle: ILK off during Measured
347
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware HFS IAS shorted
305
Abnormal Recycle: ILK off during Drive to
348
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware PII INTLK shorted
306
Abnormal Recycle: ILK off during Pre-Ignition
349
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware HFS LCI shorted
307
Abnormal Recycle: ILK off during Pre-Ignition
350
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware HFS LFS shorted
308
Abnormal Recycle: ILK off during Main Flame
351
Abnormal Recycle: Invalid zero crossing
309
Abnormal Recycle: ILK off during Ignition period
352
Abnormal Recycle: fault stack sensor
310
Run was terminated due to ILK was off
353
Abnormal Recycle: stack limit
311
Run was terminated due to interrupted air flow
354
Abnormal Recycle: delta T limit
312
Stuck reset switch
355
Abnormal Recycle: fault outlet sensor
313
Run was terminated due to fan failure
356
Abnormal Recycle: outlet high limit
314
Abnormal Recycle: Fan failed during Drive to
357
Abnormal Recycle: fault DHW sensor
315
Abnormal Recycle: Fan failed during Measured
358
Abnormal Recycle: DHW high limit
316
Abnormal Recycle: Fan failed during Drive to
359
Abnormal Recycle: fault inlet sensor
317
Abnormal Recycle: Fan failed during Pre-Ignition
360
Abnormal Recycle: Check Parameters Failed
318
Abnormal Recycle: Fan failed during Pre-Ignition
319
Abnormal Recycle: Fan failed during Ignition
361
Internal error: No factory parameters were
320
Abnormal Recycle: Fan failed during Main Flame
362
Internal error: PID iteration frequency was invalid
321
Abnormal Recycle: Main Valve off after 10
363
Internal error: Demand-Rate interval time was
322
Abnormal Recycle: Pilot Valve off after 10
364
Internal error: Factory calibration parameter for
323
Abnormal Recycle: Safety Relay off after 10
365
Internal error: CH PID P-scaler was invalid
324
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware flame bias
366
Internal error: CH PID I-scaler was invalid
325
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware static flame
367
Internal error: CH PID D-scaler was invalid
326
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware flame current
368
Internal error: DHW PID P-scaler was invalid
327
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware flame rod short
369
Internal error: DHW PID I-scaler was invalid
328
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware invalid power
370
Internal error: DHW PID D-scaler was invalid
329
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware invalid AC line
371
Internal error: Lead Lag master PID P-scaler was
330
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware SLO flame ripple
372
Internal error: Lead Lag master PID I-scaler was
331
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware SLO flame sample
373
Internal error: Lead Lag master PID D-scaler was
332
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware SLO flame bias
374
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware flame bias high
333
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware SLO flame bias
375
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware flame bias low
334
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware SLO spark stuck
376
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware flame bias delta
335
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware SLO spark
377
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware flame bias delta
336
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware SLO static flame
378
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware flame bias
337
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware SLO rod shorted
379
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware flame bias
338
Abnormal Recycle: Hardware SLO AD linearity
380
Abnormal Recycle: Fan Speed Not Proven
Internal Errors
119
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 52. Alerts. (Continued)
Table 52. Alerts. (Continued)
Code
Code
Description
Description
381
Abnormal Recycle: Fan Speed Range Low
488
Internal error: Safety key bit 10 was incorrect
382
Abnormal Recycle: Fan Speed Range High
489
Internal error: Safety key bit 11 was incorrect
383-450
RESERVED
490
Internal error: Safety key bit 12 was incorrect
Circulator Errors
491
Internal error: Safety key bit 13 was incorrect
451
Circulator control was invalid
492
Internal error: Safety key bit 14 was incorrect
452
Circulator P-gain was invalid
493
Internal error: Safety key bit 15 was incorrect
453
Circulator I-gain was invalid
494
Internal error: Safety relay timeout
454
Circulator temperature was invalid
495
Internal error: Safety relay commanded off
455
Circulator outlet temperature was invalid
496
Internal error: Unknown safety error occurred
456
Circulator inlet temperature was invalid
497
Internal error: Safety timer was corrupt
457
Circulator outdoor temperature was invalid
498
Internal error: Safety timer was expired
458
Circulator sensor choice was invalid
499
Internal error: Safety timings
459
Circulator PID setpoint was invalid
500
Internal error: Safety shutdown
Debug Faults
501
RESERVED
460
LCI lost in run
MIX Errors
461
Abnormal Recycle: Demand lost in run from
502
Mix setpoint was invalid
462
Abnormal Recycle: Demand lost in run due to
503
Mix time of day setpoint was invalid
463
Abnormal Recycle: Demand lost in run due to no
504
Mix outdoor temperature was invalid
464
LCI lost in Combustion Pressure Establishing
505
Mix ODR time of day setpoint was invalid
465
LCI lost in Combustion Pressure Stabilization
506
466
RESERVED
Mix ODR time of day setpoint exceeds normal
setpoint
507
Mix ODR max outdoor temperature was invalid
508
Mix ODR min outdoor temperature was invalid
509
Mix ODR low water temperature was invalid
Internal Data Faults
467
Internal error: EEPROM write was attempted
468
Internal error: EEPROM cycle count address
469
Internal error: EEPROM days count address was
470
Internal error: EEPROM hours count address
471
Internal error: Lockout record EEPROM index
472
Internal error: Request to write PM status was
514
Mix OFF hysteresis was invalid
473
Internal error: PM parameter address was invalid
515
Mix ODR min water temperature was invalid
474
Internal error: PM safety parameter address was
516
Mix hysteresis step time was invalid
475
Internal error: Invalid record in lockout history
517
Mix P-gain was invalid
476
Internal error: EEPROM write buffer was full
518
Mix I-gain was invalid
477
Internal error: Data too large was not written to
519
Mix D-gain was invalid
478
Internal error: Safety key bit 0 was incorrect
520
Mix control was suspended due to fault
479
Internal error: Safety key bit 1 was incorrect
521
Mix S10 (J10-7) temperature was invalid
480
Internal error: Safety key bit 2 was incorrect
481
Internal error: Safety key bit 3 was incorrect
482
Internal error: Safety key bit 4 was incorrect
483
Internal error: Safety key bit 5 was incorrect
484
Internal error: Safety key bit 6 was incorrect
485
510
Mix ODR outdoor temperature range was invalid
511
Mix ODR water temperature range was invalid
512
Mix demand switch was invalid
513
Mix ON hysteresis was invalid
522
Mix outlet temperature was invalid
523
Mix inlet temperature was invalid
524
Mix S5 (J8-11) temperature was invalid
525
Mix modulation sensor type was invalid
526
Mix ODR min water temperature setpoint was
invalid
Internal error: Safety key bit 7 was incorrect
527
Mix circulator sensor was invalid
486
Internal error: Safety key bit 8 was incorrect
528
Mix flow control was invalid
487
Internal error: Safety key bit 9 was incorrect
529
Mix temperature was invalid
530
Mix sensor was invalid
66-1171—03
120
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Table 52. Alerts. (Continued)
Code
Table 52. Alerts. (Continued)
Description
Code
Description
531
Mix PID setpoint was invalid
572
Heat exchanger high limit was exceeded
532
STAT may not be a Mix demand source when
Remote Stat is enabled
573
Heat exchanger high limit wasn't allowed due to
stack limit setting
533-539
RESERVED
574
540
Delta T inlet/outlet enable was invalid
Heat exchanger high limit wasn't allowed due to
stack connector setting
541
Delta T exchanger/outlet enable was invalid
575
542
Delta T inlet/exchanger enable was invalid
Heat exchanger high limit delay was not
configured for recycle response
543
Delta T inlet/outlet degrees was out of range
544
Delta T exchanger/outlet degrees was out of
range
545
Pump Errors
576
CH pump output was invalid
577
DHW pump output was invalid
Delta T inlet/exchanger degrees was out of
range
578
Boiler pump output was invalid
579
Auxiliary pump output was invalid
546
Delta T response was invalid
580
System pump output was invalid
547
Delta T inversion limit response was invalid
581
Mix pump output was invalid
548
Delta T rate limit enable was invalid
582-589
RESERVED
549
Delta T exchanger/outlet wasn't allowed due to
stack limit setting
550
Delta T inlet/outlet limit was exceeded
551
Delta T exchanger/outlet limit was exceeded
552
Delta T inlet/exchanger limit was exceeded
553
Inlet/outlet inversion occurred
554
Exchanger/outlet inversion occurred
555
Inlet/exchanger inversion occurred
556
Delta T exchanger/outlet wasn't allowed due to
stack connector setting
557
Delta T inlet/exchanger wasn't allowed due to
stack limit setting
558
Delta T inlet/exchanger wasn't allowed due to
stack connector setting
559
Delta T delay was not configured for recycle
response
DHW Plate Heat Exchanger Errors
590
DHW plate preheat setpoint was invalid
591
DHW plate preheat ON hysteresis was invalid
592
DHW plate preheat OFF hysteresis was invalid
593
Tap detect degrees was out of range
594
Tap detect ON hysteresis was invalid
595
Inlet - DHW tap stop degrees was out of range
596
Outlet - Inlet tap stop degrees was out of range
597
DHW tap detect on threshold was invalid
598
DHW plate preheat detect on threshold was
invalid
599
DHW plate preheat detect off threshold was
invalid
T Rise Errors
560
Outlet T-rise enable was invalid
561
Heat exchanger T-rise enable was invalid
562
T-rise degrees was out of range
563
T-rise response was invalid
564
Outlet T-rise limit was exceeded
565
Heat exchanger T-rise limit was exceeded
566
Heat exchanger T-rise wasn't allowed due to
stack limit setting
567
Heat exchanger T-rise wasn't allowed due to
stack connector setting
568
Outlet T-rise wasn't allowed due to outlet
connector setting
569
T-rise delay was not configured for recycle
response
Heat Exchanger High Limit Errors
570
Heat exchanger high limit setpoint was out of
range
571
Heat exchanger high limit response was invalid
121
66-1171—03
R7910A SOLA HC (HYDRONIC CONTROL) R7911 SOLA SC (STEAM CONTROL)
Automation and Control Solutions
Honeywell International Inc.
1985 Douglas Drive North
Golden Valley, MN 55422
Honeywell Limited-Honeywell Limitée
35 Dynamic Drive
Toronto, Ontario M1V 4Z9
customer.honeywell.com
® U.S. Registered Trademark
© 2009 Honeywell International Inc.
66-1171—03 M.S. Rev. 11-09
Printed in U.S.A.